Home

PGEN:CH - Artisan Technology Group

1. 7 6 5 4 2 1 0 URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Event Event Event 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE OPC Byte 5 6 bad 7 RQS 5 4 3 2 i 0 6 ESB MAV MSS G 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ESB MAV V e Figure 3 16 Status and Event Handling Process Conflicts Event Queue Output Queue Whenever a command is issued resulting in a conflict an event is generated on the EXE bit bit 4 This is the equivalent of having blinking menu items when operating the HFS 9000 from the front panel You can avoid generating this event if you concatenate commands so that the conflict is resolved when the command is completed For example if you set the pulse width longer than the period with a single command an event is generated You can then change the period to resolve the conflict However if you change the pulse width and then the period in a single concatenated command no conflict event is generated 3 134 HFS 9000 User Manual Status and Events Messages HFS 9000 User Manual Tables 3 13 through 3 18 list all the programming interface messages the HFS 9000 generates in response to commands and queries For a d
2. 3 1 Command Synfax 4 ce E I E UU RE REVERSE TEC 3 9 Clearing the HFS 9000 3 9 Command and Query Structure 3 9 Command Entry co tue RUE GS NA Ge S ERG iO 3 11 Argument Types occu t Me Eg OR URS URDU 3 13 Data FORMAIS 5 4 ee bU ba SO ba eae E o in 3 19 i Table of Contents Appendices Syntax Diagrams psss dba Rp E eS es Eie 3 20 Commands ES 3 21 Status and Events 3 129 Registers ex spese REAL ERN UOI Re RUE RR LOSS 3 129 Que es occ dea ets eee ethos oe lok Haw blag Se batty bak ed Soe atte ee 3 133 Event Handling Sequence 3 133 ER eite e gre te reps 3 134 M SSaB6eS oli kel ESQ 3 135 Programming Examples 3 139 Example 1 Setting Pulse Channel 3 139 Example 2 Command Query Usage with Error Handling 3 141 Example 3 Interacting With 3 144 Appendix A A 1 Standard A CCESSOTIES 1 Optional Accessories A 2 Power Cord Options aue REDE des A 2 Appendix B B
3. space MIN sets the time base period to the minimum MAX sets the time base period to the maximum lt NRf gt sets the time base period to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the time base period to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning PERiod is the inverse of FREQuency PERiod 1 FREQuency TBAS PER MIN sets the time base period to the minimum TBAS PER might return the value 10E 6 showing that the time base period is set to 10 us TBAS PVIew Period View sets and queries the front panel period display view This performs the same function as Select and the Period or Frequency items in the front panel Time Base menu and Pulse menu 3 109 Commands Syntax Arguments Examples TBAS PLIN Related Commands Syntax Examples TBAS PLIN INPut 3 110 TBAS PVIew PERiod FREQuency TBAS PVIew space PERiod FREQuency PERiod sets the frequency period display view to period FREQuency sets the frequency period display view to frequency TBAS PVI PER sets the period display view to period TBAS PVI might return the string FREQ showing that the period display view is set to frequency The TBAS PLIN command sets and queries the HFS 9000 phase lock parame ters TBAS TBAS TIN TBAS TOUT TBAS PLIN 9 lt TBAS PLIN might return the string TBAS PLIN INP 0
4. CC Cy CO c gt lt PAA C GOG 2 2 C C C2 2 OO OO m OO OO CO THO gt lo OO Oood gt B OO o Ofo Ofo Ofe Olle ES Bo OR o OR o O oO 0 OL OL OL Of tb k Numeric keypad lets you The Time Base card has connectors for The Pulse Generator cards have connectors type a number for any timing input and output including the for normal OUTPUT and inverted OUTPUT selected menu item having TRIGGER IN and TRIGGER OUT along with buttons to turn the outputs on and a numeric value End your connectors see page 2 65 the PHASE off and lights to indicate whether those outputs number by pressing the LOCK IN and FRAME SYNC IN connectors are on The TRANSDUCER IN connector lets ENTER button See page 2 41 and the SKEW CAL IN you apply a logic signal to directly drive a page 1 8 connector see page 2 7 channel See pages 2 13 and 2 45 The CPU card has connectors for the NEXT CHANNEL and PREVIOUS SERIAL PORT see page 2 53 and for CHANNEL buttons let you select a the GPIB bus see page 2 29 channel in menus that have channel parameters This convenience avoids a lot of menu navigation See page 2 11 HFS 9000 User Manual 2 3 A
5. The Cal Deskew Menu Deskewing Channels GPIB Connector Location SRQ Button and REMOTE Light Locations The GPIB Menu The Pulse Men erm y het hey se The Levels Menu and Associated Display The Time Base Card Connectors The Time Base Menu with the PhaseLockIn Menu Phase Lock In and Frame Sync In Timing Relationships n e err Figure 2 33 Figure 2 34 Figure 2 35 Figure 2 36 Figure 2 37 Figure 2 38 Figure 2 39 Figure 2 40 Figure 2 41 Figure 2 42 The Cal Deskew Menu A Typical Configuration Display The Pulse Ment ss 4v wegen The Save Recall Menu with Reset and Factory Items SERIAL PORT Connector Location The RS232 Me u err hm m mem hy The Save Recall Menu The Cal Deskew Menu The Time Base and Cal Deskew Menus The Timing Diagram Illustrating the Count Parameter eL C eu OVE e wee e Uds Figure 2 43 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 The Time Base and Cal Deskew Menus GPIB Connector Location H
6. A 00111000 01000111 V PAN J v a Vv a Data2 gt Figure 3 9 Reading Binary Encoded Data into Vectors Datal Datad O FP OR FP O c HFS 9000 User Manual Commands VECTor BlOFormat VECTor BIOFormat Vector Binary Input Output Format specifies the signals named channels to receive binary data supplied in subsequent VECTor BDATA commands Related Commands PGEN x CH n BDATA Syntax VECTor BIOFormat signal signal VECTor BIOFormat Arguments signal identifies the signal s to receive the data provided by subsequent BDATA commands Examples VECTOR BIOFORMAT Addr 0 7 sets the binary input output format to bus ADDR 0 7 VECTor DATA VECTor DATA Vector Data Input Output is used to input and output vectors specified by the VECTor IOFORMAT command Because this command should always be used in conjunction with the VECTor IOFormat the examples given below use both a VECTor IOFormat command as well as one or more DATA commands Related Commands PGEN x CH n DATA Syntax VECTor DATA lt address gt lt count gt lt ascii data VECTor DATA address count
7. D 1 Table F 1 Required Test Equipment Le F 1 Table F 2 Trigger Output Level and Phase Lock Test F 3 Table F 3 Test Record for HFS 9DG1 Card F 4 Table F 4 Test Record for HFS 9DG2 Card F 6 Table F 5 Test Record for HFS 9PG1 Card 7 Table 6 Test Record for HFS 9PG2 Card 9 Table 7 HFS 9DG1 Output Level Checks First Settings F 14 Table F 8 HFS 9DG1 Output Level Checks Second Settings F 14 Table F 9 HFS 9DG1 Output Level Checks Third Settings F 15 Table F 10 HFS 9DG1 Output Level Checks Fourth Settings F 15 Table F 11 HFS 9DG2 and HFS 9PG2 Output Level Checks First alee etes eo more eared F 17 Table F 12 HFS 9DG2 and HFS 9PG2 Output Level Checks Second Settings uve F 17 Table F 13 HFS 9PG2 Output Level Checks Third Settings F 18 Table 14 HFS 9PG2 Output Level Checks Fourth Settings F 18 Table F 15 HFS 9PG1 Output Level Checks First Settings F 19 Table 16 HFS 9PG1 Output Level Checks Second Settings 20 Table 17 HFS 9PG1 Output Level Checks Third Settings F 20 Table F 18 HFS 9PG1 Output Level Checks Fourth Settings F 21 Table F 19 Settings for Trigger Output Check F 22 Table 20 Settings for Rise Time and Fall Time Checks F 23 Table 21 DSO Settings for
8. Pulse Vector Menu Faver Recall Henu Vector Menu press SELECT Go to the next channel Channel Ad Mode Loop End Auta a Y Mec Radix Data Radix Mieu Decimal Hex Channel Press Select to vieu ether Mectorz 009009 000001 000002 000003 000004 000005 000006 i 000007 000008 i 000009 000010 000011 000012 000013 To edit data B set a channel s Signal to HRZ RZ or Ri Data Edit Menu HFS 9000 User Manual press SELECT to sha press SELECT Go to the next channel Channel Data Fill Menu press SELECT Channel High Level Low Level Limit P1 20 1 off 3 High Limit Low Limit View ou Channel Signal Menu press Channel DATAG Signal Hame DATAG Mowe Signal Data Radix 4 the Pulse Menu Time Baze Levelz Henu Henu Data Edit Menu Signal Menu Data Copy Menu Cal Deskity Menu to the next channe 1 Dest Chan Dest Start Swap Block Block DATAG 13 to Dest Radix View Decimal Go to the next channel Block Start Block End Clear Block DATAQ 100 Constant Hethad Fill Scale Fill Block 8 Constant 1 with Method Radix m Data Radix View Decimal Hex Chann
9. 10p 20 _______ 401 Chanel j b500ps 195 l ___ 805 1 310 ques 5 350 10 400 MPa 50 80 oe 101 30 Not Output Normal 100 20 _________ _______ 401 Chanel b50ps 195 l _______ 805 aes 1 310 5 350 10 400 50 80 101 30 Edge Placement Pulse Width Variance 1 of width 300 ps Output Normal 500ps 195 ______ 805 Chanel 750p 43 l ___ 1060 aA NM 1 310 Not Output Normal 500 ps 105 J 805 Channel 750 ps BAS eM 1058 lns 0 690 1 310 HFS 9000 User Manual F 7 Appendix Performance Verification Table F 5 Test Record for HFS 9PG1 Card Cont Channel Page of Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH Date of Calibration Technician Performance Test Nominal Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum Pulse Width Limits 1 of width 300 ps Output Nomad 5ns 460 j _________ 5 350 Chanel 9 00 H 10 400 Boudin tum 50 80 EIN 101 30 PIG 505 30 MONDE 1 010 Not Output Nomad 5ns 460 Jo 5 350 Chanel 9 00 H3H 10 400 lectis chen 50 80 POLVO 101 30 dee ES 505 30 MARE DN 1 010 Frequency Accuracy 1 Output 50kHz 4950 Jo 50 50 Channel 324MHz 13208 3212 326 13227 S 329 3 400 3960 foo Jo 404 0 433MH
10. space address address specifies the start address for the data count specifies the number of data bits that follow or that should be returned block represents a block of binary bytes NOTE Each byte in block contains eight data bits PGENC CH2 BDATA 0 16 1268 enters 16 bits of data into channel C2 starting at address 0 Where is the block start character 1 is the number of digits in the length field 2 is the length field and specifies the number of data bytes eight bits per byte The sixteen bits of data is represented by G8 where 01000111 8 00111000 Figure 3 8 illustrates how the data in the above example would be read into the channel memory Note how each byte is read in from right to left In other words the least significant bit of each byte is read in first 3 61 Commands Block Start Character address Number of Digits in Length Field Length Field Number of Data Bytes to Follow PGENC CH2 BDATA 0 16 1268 Card Channel count Data Bytes Vector Channels address Cl C2 000000 000001 000002 000003 000004 000005 000006 000007 000008 000009 000010 000011 000012 000013 000014 000015 A 01000111 G gt lt gt lt gt lt K K lt lt K K lt lt lt 0X 0X 0X lt Oh AOA oor
11. A2 1 sets the display order to the reverse of the default FPAN CORDER returns the channel display order FPAN DCHannel FPAN DCHannel Displayed Channel displays a selected channel or returns the displayed channel This performs the same function as the Channel item in the front panel Pulse Levels or Cal Deskew menus Syntax FPAN DCHannel lt QString gt FPAN DCHannel HFS 9000 User Manual 3 43 Commands Arguments Examples FPAN DITem Syntax Arguments Examples 3 44 imi Em lt QString gt specifies the channel to display Valid strings for this parameter are those displayed in the argument field of the Channel item in the front panel Pulse Levels and Cal Deskew menus FPAN DCH 1 sets the displayed channel to A1 FPAN DCH returns the displayed channel FPAN DITem Displayed Item displays a selected item from the currently displayed menu or queries the displayed menu item This performs the same function as selecting an item from a front panel menu FPAN DITem lt QString gt FPAN DITem lt QString gt specifies the menu item to select Valid strings are the menu item titles from the currently displayed menu for example Width Period Slope etc for the Pulse menu To change the displayed menu use the FPAN DMENu command FPAN DIT Period displays the Period item FPAN DIT Width displays the Width item FPAN DIT returns the curre
12. VECTOR IOF VECTOR DATA VECTOR BIOF and VECTOR are the commands to use Symbol radix Meaning The data radix lt bin gt lt oct gt lt hex gt address constant count Data address NR1 bin oct hex Data constant NR1 bin oct lt gt Data count NR1 bin oct lt gt binary byte Binary data byte lt NR1 gt lt bin gt lt oct gt lt hex gt lt ascii data gt ASCII encoded data lt Qstring gt lt binary data gt lt bin gt lt oct gt Binary encoded data block lt block gt Binary encoded number B 0 1 Octal encoded number Q 0 1 2 3 7 lt hex gt Hexadecimal encoded number H 0 1 2 3 F HES 9000 User Manual Command Syntax Data Formats Data can be sent to or read from the HFS 9000 in either ASCII or binary format ASCII Data Format To provide for interfacing to CAD workstations and present human readable vectors several commands accept ASCII formatted data These are m PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA m SIGNAL DATA m VECTOR IOFORMAT m VECTOR DATA These commands accept data as quoted strings for example 11011100 or FE4210D See each command for specific information on formatting the data Binary Data Format To facilitate fast downloading and uploading of data several commands which use binary f
13. VECTOR BDATA 0 16 712aJ The BIOFORMAT command specifies that data will load into Addr0 only The command enters 16 bits of data into signal AddrO starting at address 0 VECTOR BIOFORMAT Data 3 0 VECTOR BDATA 0 16 18aabbccdd VECTOR BDATA 16 16 18eeffgghh The BIOFORMAT command specifies that data will load into four pins Data3 Data2 Datal and DataO The first command enters 16 bits of data starting at address 0 see Figure 3 9 The second command loads another 16 bits of data starting at address 16 Data3 gets bytes aaee Data2 gets bytes bbff Datal gets bytes ccgg Data0 gets bytes ddhh Each pin s data is loaded starting at address 0 with 16 bits as specified by the address of 0 and count of 16 To load 16 bits of data per pin requires 2 bytes per channel or 8 bytes total The 18 specifies that 8 bytes of data are in the binary block The pins are loaded in order as specified by the previous BIOFORMAT command 3 119 Commands 3 120 VECTOR BDATA 0 16 18aabbccdd Vector address 000000 000001 000002 000003 000004 000005 000006 000007 000008 000009 000010 000011 000012 000013 000014 000015 Block Start Character address count Data3 Cc gt Number of Digits in Length Field Length Field Number of Data Bytes to Follow Data Bytes
14. 100 mV Trigger level resolution Table B 11 Nominal Traits Trigger Out Performance Name Description Pretrigger range TRIGGER OUT Zero to 70 ns before time zero reference TRIGGER OUT pulse width in 100 auto mode 10 Width ns 0 1 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 Output Frequency MHz Table B 12 Nominal Traits Power Requirements Name HFS 9003 Description HFS 9009 Description Fuse ratings 5 A 250 V type 3AG 15 A 250 V type 3AG fast Tektronix part 159 0014 00 blow Tektronix part and 159 0256 00 250 V type 3AG fast blow Tektronix part 159 0017 00 Table B 13 Nominal Traits System Memory Performance Description Non volatile memory retention Instrument settings and calibration constants are retained time in non volatile memory for 5 years or more Card identification is retained for 10 years Extended storage above 50 C may degrade the life of all non volatile memory HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix B Specifications Table B 14 Nominal Traits HFS 9003 Mechanical Name Description Weight in 12 channel configura Cabinet Rackmount tion Shipping weight includes all Net weight 45 Ibs 20 5 kg 51 Ibs 23 2 kg standard accessories Shipping weight 60 105 27 3 kg 66105 30 0 kg Overall Dimensions Cabinet Rackmount Width 16 3 in 414 mm 19 0 in 483 mm Height 7 0 178 mm 7 0 in 178 mm Depth 24
15. to 2 5 V PGENA 2 OFFS returns the offset for channel A2 PGEN x CH n OUTPut PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OUTPut enables disables or queries the output setting of the selected channel This performs the same function as the Output item in the front panel Pulse menu Syntax PGEN x CH n 0UTPut ON OFF lt NRf gt PGEN x lt gt OUTPut HS OFF e space Arguments ON or lt NRf gt 0 enables the output OFF or lt NRf gt 0 disables the output Examples PGENA CH1 0UTP ON enables the output for channel A1 HFS 9000 User Manual 3 77 Commands PGENB CH2 0UTP OFF disables the output for channel B2 PGENB CH2 OUTP returns the output setting for channel B2 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PHASe PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PHASe sets and queries the phase of the selected channel This performs the same function as the Phase item in the front panel Pulse menu Related Commands PGEN x CH n LDELay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LHOLd Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PHASe MIN MAX lt NRf gt PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PHASe MIN 2 atu a space Arguments MIN sets the phase to minimum LDELay 100 channel period where channel period is TBAS PERiod if PGEN x CH n PRATe is either NORMal or OFF and channel period is 2 if PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PRATe is HALF MAX depends on the values of PGEN lt x
16. 2 Use the arrow buttons surrounding the SELECT button to move the menu item highlight to the Save Recall Menu item 3 Press the SELECT button The Save Recall menu as shown in Figure 1 4 is displayed 1 4 HFS 9000 User Manual Getting Started Save Recall Menu Figure 1 4 The Save Recall Menu Once in the Save Recall menu you can reset the HFS 9000 by selecting the Reset menu item 4 Use the arrow buttons to move the menu item highlight to the Reset menu item 5 Press the SELECT button Accidentally resetting the instrument can be inconvenient especially if you have spent some time getting the perfect setup For your protection the HFS 9000 asks you to verify that you really want to reset To perform the verification the HFS 9000 displays a temporary screen dialog as shown in Figure 1 5 This operation will discard the current instrument setup Reset the instrument Cancel Figure 1 5 The Reset Verification Dialog You can select from the options in the dialog by using either the up and down Arrow keys or by turning the knob Once you have the proper selection press SELECT to perform the verified action 6 Make certain that the Yes choice in the dialog is highlighted and then press the SELECT button to verify the reset request After the HFS 9000 resets it displays the Main menu HFS 9000 User Manual 1 5 Getting Started Part 2 Set the Time Base HFS 9000 provides sev
17. PGEN lt x gt CHen gt WIDTh Related Commands Syntax HES 9000 User Manual PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt WIDTh sets and queries the width of the specified channel This performs the same function as the Width item in the front panel Pulse menu PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DCYCle PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LDELay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt THOLd TBAS PERiod PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt WIDTh MIN MAX lt NRf gt PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt WIDTh 3 85 Commands PSC 3 86 Arguments Examples Related Commands Syntax MIN ibe MAX a aH lt space gt MIN sets the width to the minimum MAX sets the width to channel period minimum recovery width where channel period is TBAS PERiod if PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PRATe is either NORMal or OFF and channel period is 2 if PGEN x CH n PRATe is HALF Minimum recovery width is 800 ps for both High Speed and Var Rate cards lt NRf gt sets the width to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the width to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning DCYCIe and TDELay are coupled with WIDTh as follows m DCYCle WIDTh 100 TBAS PERiod m TDELay LDELay WIDTh PGENB CH1 WIDT 2 5ns sets the width of channel to 2 5 ns PGENA CH2 WIDT returns the width setting of channel A2 The PSC Power On Status Clear command sets and queries the power on st
18. PGENC CHI1 BDATA FILL 0 512 fills the first 512 addresses of channel C1 with alternating zeros and ones that is 01010101010101 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt CDELay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt CDELay sets and queries the channel delay of a selected channel This performs the same functions as the Chan Delay item in the front panel Cal Deskew menu HFS 9000 User Manual 3 63 Commands Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt CDELay MIN MAX lt NRf gt PGEN x lt gt CDELay space Arguments MIN sets the channel delay to the minimum MAX sets the channel delay to the maximum lt NRf gt sets the channel delay to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the channel delay to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning Examples PGENB CH2 CDELay 10E 6 sets the channel delay of channel B2 to 10 us PGENA CH2 CDELay returns the channel delay value for channel A2 PGEN x CH n COUTput PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt COUTput Complementary Output enables disables or queries a selected complementary OUTPUT channel This performs the same function as the Output item in the front panel Pulse menu Syntax X PGEN x CH n COUTput ON OFF lt NRf gt PGEN x lt gt COUTput OFF aN lt space gt ON or lt NRf gt 0 enables the complementary output OFF or lt NRf gt 0 disables the complem
19. Skew Cal In Performance B 5 Table B 10 Nominal Traits Trigger In Performance B 6 Table B 11 Nominal Traits Trigger Out Performance B 6 Table B 12 Nominal Traits Power Requirements B 6 Table B 13 Nominal Traits System Memory Performance B 6 vii Table of Contents viii Table B 14 Nominal Traits HFS 9003 Mechanical B 7 Table B 15 Nominal Traits HFS 9009 Mechanical B 7 Table B 16 Warranted Characteristics HFS 9PG1 Output Performance e ERU e n aree eee ig B 8 Table B 17 Warranted Characteristics HFS 9PG2 Output Performance 2 over B 8 Table B 18 Warranted Characteristics HFS 9DG1 Output Performance oeer ocn VE x B 8 Table B 19 Warranted Characteristics HFS 9DG2 Output Performance cri e 9 Table B 20 Warranted Characteristics Time Base 9 Table 21 Warranted Characteristic Performance to External Frequency Reference B 9 Table 22 Warranted Characteristics Output Edge Placement Performance 9 Table 23 Warranted Characteristics Trigger Out Performance m ocn t RR IH B 10 Table B 24 Warranted Characteristics Power Requirements B 10 Table 25 Warranted Characteristics Environmental and Safety PP
20. space address Ci lt count gt 5 lt data GIECTor gt 7 HFS 9000 User Manual 3 121 Commands 3 122 Arguments Examples address sets queries the start address for the data count specifies the number of data elements that follow or that should be returned block represents a block of data bytes formatted in hexadecimal VECTOR IOFORMAT A 0 7 HEX VECTOR DATA 0 12 010101010202020201010101 The IOFORMAT command specifies that data will load into A 0 7 and be formatted in hexadecimal The DATA command enters 12 bits of data into signal 1 Addr2 Addr7 starting at address 0 VECTOR IOFORMAT WE BIN VECTOR DATA 0 4 0011 The IOFORMAT command specifies that data will load into one pin WE The data for WE will be read in as binary VECTOR IOFORMAT G1 BIN VECTOR DATA 0 4 The IOFORMAT command specifies that the data at pin G1 is in binary format The data command will return the data for 4 vectors starting at address 0 VECTOR IOFORMAT D 3 0 HEX WE BIN VECTOR DATA 0 4 1 1 The IOFORMAT command specifies that data will load into five pins D3 D2 D1 DO and WE The data for D 3 0 will be read in as hex and the data for WE will be read in as binary See Figure 3 10 HFS 9000 User Manual Com
21. 4M5 555 wees 1 060 Sree 5 100 A 10 150 Soweto ds 50 55 101 05 Edge Placement Pulse Width Variance 1 of width 50 ps Output Normal 500ps 45 2 ______ 555 Chanel 750p 693 808 1 060 Not Output Normal 500 ps 45 J ____ 555 Channel 750 ps 693 LL I lem 808 1 5 0 940 1 060 F 4 HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification Table F 3 Test Record for HFS 9DG1 Card Cont Channel Page of Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH Date of Calibration Technician Performance Test Nominal Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum Pulse Width Limits 1 of width 50 75ps Output Normal 49 5 ze 5 100 Channel 9 825 ee 10 150 49425 _________ 50 55 989255 101 05 494925 ELA uus 505 05 0990 1 010 Not Output Normal 48 5 2s ee 5 100 Channel 9 825 lxx mmm 10 150 49425 J ______ 50 55 98 9255 _ 101 05 494995 505 05 0 990 sto ede Wee mets 1 010 Frequency Accuracy 1 Output J 5OkHz 14950 ________ 50 50 Chanel 34MH 1328 _______ 327 2 329 3 404 0 437 3 470 7 Mec 505 0 PANE 538 3 571 7 TS 606 0 636 3 HFS 9000 User Manual F 5 Appendix Performance Verification
22. Arguments Examples IDN Query Only Related Commands Syntax HFS 9000 User Manual HEADER AES OFF space ON or lt NRf gt 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to TRUE This causes the HFS 9000 to include headers on applicable query responses You can then use the query response as a command OFF or lt NRf gt 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to FALSE This causes the HFS 9000 to omit headers on query responses so that only the argument is returned HEADER OFF causes the HFS 9000 to omit headers from query responses HEADER 1 causes the HFS 9000 to include headers on applicable query responses HEADER might return the value 1 showing that the Response Header Enable State is TRUE The IDN Identification query returns the HFS 9000 s unique identification code This performs the same function as the View Config item from the front panel Calibrate menu OPT IDN The query response is an ASCII string separated into four fields by commas TEKTRONIX HFS9000 lt serial number gt CF 89 1CN CPU lt firmware version number gt 3 55 Commands Examples LRN Query Only 3 56 Related Commands Syntax Examples IDN might return the response TEKTRONIX HFS9000 B010101 CF 89 1CN CPU 1 1 NOTE Use to determine the particular configuration of your HFS 9000 The LRN Learn Device Setup query returns a string listing the HFS 9000
23. Burst and Auto Burst The HFS 9000 completes the defined burst and holds and the outputs at the logic level of the last bit Auto and Trig Auto No specified output state For Single Step operation use the following procedure 1 Setthe time base to Auto Mode Program Start Loop and End to the same address Press Run to begin operation and Stop to end operation Perform steps 2 and 3 for the next address 2 63 Time Base Blinking Menu Items Trigger In Manual Trigger 2 64 You can set the menu items described in the Pulse Timing section to conflict For example you could set the pulse width to be twice the period of the time base The HFS 9000 lets you set up conflicts but causes the conflicting menu items to blink If you see a blinking menu item look at other menu item s that are also blinking You can resolve the conflict by adjusting any of the blinking menu items Sometimes the conflict is between the time base and some other channel For example if you change the period the new value may not conflict with the channel you are viewing In this case use the Channel menu item to search the other channels to find the conflict The Time Base menu gives you control of the detection of trigger events at the TRIGGER IN connector There are four Trigger In menu items m Trigger In can be set to on or off When Trigger In is set to off no trigger events can be detected at the TRIGGER IN connector When
24. CH n SIGNal HFS 9000 User Manual Commands m Arguments pin is the name to be assigned to the channel Examples PGENA CH1 SIGNAL G2 assigns the name G2 to channel PGENA CH2 SIGNAL Addr 6 assigns the name Addr6 to channel A2 PGENF 1 SIGNAL returns the name assigned to channel F1 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay Trailing Delay sets and queries the trailing delay of the selected channel This performs the same function as the Trail Delay item in the front panel Pulse menu Related Commands PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DCYCle PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LDELay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt THOLd PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt WIDTh TBAS PERiod Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay MIN MAX lt NRf gt PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay MIN an MAX m space Arguments MIN sets the trailing delay to LDELay minimum WIDTh MAX sets the trailing delay to LDELay channel period minimum WIDTh where channel period is TBAS PERiod if PGEN x CH n PRATe is either NORMal or OFF and channel period is 2 if PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PRATe is HALF lt NRf gt sets the trailing delay to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the trailing delay to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning HFS 9000 User Manual 3 81 Commands Examples DCYCIe and WID
25. Time Base The time base controls the timing of all channels of the HFS 9000 The time base defines times when the pulse channels will generate pulses The time base can be externally triggered and phase locked to an external signal The time base can provide an external trigger for other instruments Timing and Trigger Relationships HFS 9000 User Manual The time base specifies when the pulse generator will create pulses relative to a trigger event detected at the TRIGGER IN connector The timing setting items are in the Time Base menu and include the Pretrigger item in the Cal Deskew menu see Figure 2 41 Time Base Menu press SELECT Auto Burstbk uto Burst Trig Auta Mode Feriod Count Qut Feriod Autoa Burst 1 rns 1 Trigger In Trig Slope Trig Level PhaseLockIn On Fositive au Run Stop __ Running eee Self Test Calibrate Pretrigger Channel Chan Delay rons Al os Figure 2 41 The Time Base and Cal Deskew Menus The time base does not directly determine the placement of pulses The time base defines windows in time during which each channel can generate a pulse The pulse generators can be individually set to generate a pulse during each of these windows in time with varying leading and trailing edge delays and levels The Pulse Generator section on page 2 45 describes parameters that can be set individually for each pulse generator To set the time base mode highlight the Mode menu item and pres
26. 2 21 Data Time Generators parameter used when filling a block Note that valid numbers for Constant depend on the Data Radix setting To change the constant turn the knob or use the numeric keypad m Method specifies the algorithm used to fill a Block with data Constant fills the Block with the value in the Constant menu item Invert logically inverts the value of all the data in the Block Count Up fills each vector in the Block with an incrementally larger value Count Up starts with the value specified by the Constant menu item Count Down fills each vector in the Block with an incrementally smaller value Count Down starts with the value specified by the Constant menu item Random fills vectors in the Block with a pseudo random data pattern The pattern generated is based on the value of Constant m Fill Scale is a multiplier It sets the number of vectors that receive each fill pattern For example if the fill method is set to Count Up and Constant is set to 0 then the Start vector is filled with a 0 the next vector receives a 1 the next vector receives a 2 etc If Fill Scale is set to 3 then the Start vector and the next two vectors receive Os the next three vectors receive 1s etc Figures 2 20 and 2 21 show the result of setting Fill Scale to 1 and to 3 Press A Select d to view d other Vectors L 1 S ood ood i 0 00 1 FillScale was setto 1 when this block was filled ooddds i 201 Thus ev
27. 2 28 HFS 9000 User Manual GPIB You can use the GPIB IEEE 488 2 1987 interface to control the HFS 9000 from a remote controller or computer The Reference section of this manual gives you step by step details of how to set up the HFS 9000 for remote operation The following information describes the settings and controls that affect GPIB operation Connect your HFS 9000 to the GPIB using an IEEE STD 488 GPIB cable available as Tektronix part number 012 0991 00 Figure 2 25 shows the location of the GPIB connector on the front of the HFS 9000 HFS 9000 User Manual 2 29 GPIB 976 5 6 96 9 6 BE SP m GPIB Connector GIGO CIAA C ACS Cc C GPIB Connector Figure 2 25 GPIB Connector Location 2 30 HFS 9000 User Manual GPIB Operator Controls One common application for the HFS 9000 is as one instrument in a suite of automated test equipment In this environment the controlling program may need to operate the HFS 9000 for extended periods without operator interven tion The program may need to stop to have the operator perform some specific action The program then n
28. HFS 9000 User Manual i Appendix E Packing for Shipment If you ship the HFS 9000 pack it in the original shipping carton and packing material If the original packing material is not available package the instrument as follows 1 HFS 9000 User Manual Use a corrugated cardboard shipping carton with inside dimensions of at least 15 cm 6 in taller wider and deeper than the HFS 9000 The shipping carton must be constructed of cardboard with 375 pound test strength If you are shipping the HFS 9000 to a Tektronix field office for repair attach tag to the HFS 9000 showing the instrument owner and address the name of the person to contact about the instrument the instrument type and the serial number Wrap the HFS 9000 with polyethelene sheeting or equivalent material to protect the finish Cushion the HFS 9000 in the shipping carton by tightly packing dunnage or urethane foam on all sides between the carton and the HFS 9000 Allow 7 5 cm 3 in on all sides top and bottom Seal the shipping carton with shipping tape or an industrial stapler Appendix E Packing for Shipment E 2 HFS 9000 User Manual PED I E f Appendix F Performance Verification The following tests verify that the HFS 9000 Stimulus System achieves its specified performance Required Test Equipment Refer to Table F 1 for a list of the test equipment required to verify performance Ta
29. Right Limit 100 Proximal 20 Distal 8076 Tracking On Level Mode Relative 7 Once the DSO captures high and low levels turn off tracking 8 Setthe DSO sweep speed to 500 ps div and position the first rising edge at center screen The measured rise time should be less than 200 ps for HFS 9 cards and less than 250 ps for a HFS 9DGI cards Use waveform averaging to stabilize the measurement 9 Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Complement The measured fall time should be less than 200 ps for HFS 9PGI cards and less than 250 ps for HFS 9 1 cards 10 Repeat steps 1 through 9 for each of the HFS 9PG1 or HFS 9DGI card channels in the system For Not Output channels set Output off and Output on 11 Disconnect test setup HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification Rise Time and Fall Time Checks HFS 9PG2 and HFS 9002 Cards Only A HFS 9000 User Manual These checks verify the rise time and fall times of HFS 9PG2 pulse card and HFS 9DG2 data time generator channels You will check each HFS 9000 high speed channel in turn A reference to the channel is a reference to the particular channel under test Equipment Required One Tektronix 11801B Digital Sampling Oscilloscope or CSA803A Communication Signal Analyzer item 5 with sampling head item 6 Two SMA coaxial cables item 8 One SMA 5X attenuator item 7 One threaded SMA female to SMA male slip on connector
30. Ut an space AMPLitude Arguments MIN sets the amplitude to the minimum MAX sets the amplitude as follows m If LIMit is ON MAX sets the amplitude to the smallest of 2 HLIMit OFFSet 2 OFFSet LLIMit or maximum AMPLitude m IfLIMitis OFF MAX sets the amplitude to the smallest of 2 maximum level OFFSet 2 OFFSet minimum level or maximum AMPLitude lt NRf gt sets the amplitude to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal limited range sets the amplitude to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning HIGH and LOW are coupled with AMPLitude and OFFSet as follows m HIGH OFFSet AMPLitude 2 m LOW OFFSet AMPLitude 2 Examples PGENA CH1 AMPL MAX sets the amplitude of channel Al to MAX PGENB CH2 AMPL 2 5 sets the amplitude of channel B2 to 2 5 V PGENC 1 AMPL returns the current amplitude of channel C1 3 60 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands PGEN x CH n BDATA Related Commands Syntax Arguments Examples HFS 9000 User Manual PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA Binary Data Input Output provides binary encoded data input output for a single channel VECTor BIOFormat VECTor BDATA SIGNAL BDATA PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA lt address gt lt count gt lt block gt PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA lt address gt lt count gt lt count gt lt address gt count
31. m Auto Burst mode does not wait for a trigger before generating a burst of pulses W Auto mode generates a continuous stream of pulses without waiting for a trigger or delaying for re arm time m Trig Auto mode works like Auto mode except it does not begin until it receives a trigger event To keep this example simple we will use Auto Burst mode Set the mode control with the SELECT button The prompt line just below the menu title shows you the current mode setting with an arrow k Each time you press SELECT the arrow moves to a different setting and the text in the Mode item changes 2 Press the SELECT button twice When you are done the prompt line should appear as in Figure 1 8 Time Base Menu press SELECT Auto Burstk uto Burst Trig nuto Autoa Burst Figure 1 8 Mode Set to Auto Burst Two other items in the top line of the Time Base menu Period and Count control the generated pulses When either of these items is highlighted the waveform display above the menu is augmented to more clearly illustrate the parameter being adjusted with that item Period controls the timing of the individual pulses produced by the pulse generators This can also be changed to be a Frequency control as will be demonstrated later in this tour W Count determines the number of pulses generated after the startup delay Both of these items can be adjusted with the knob or each can be entered using the keypad When using
32. 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 999 Example 3 Listing CLS PRINT HFS 90x0 Precision Pulse Generator PRINT Example 3 Interacting With a User PRINT GPIB Version PRINT REM REM decl bas REM REM GURU initialization code declarations REM CLEAR 58900 BASICA Declarations BYTES FREE size bib m IBINIT1 58900 smaller than calculated is OK in lines 1 amp 2 IBINIT2 IBINIT1 3 Lines 1 thru 6 MUST be included in your program BLOAD bib m IBINIT1 CALL IBINIT1 IBFIND IBTRG IBCLR IBPCT IBSIC IBLOC IBPPC IBBNA IBONL IBRSC IBSRE IBRSV IBPAD IBSAD IBIST IBDMA IBEOS IBTMO IBEOT IBRDF IBWRTF IBTRAP CALL IBINIT2 IBGTS IBCAC IBWAIT IBPOKE IBWRT IBWRTA IBCMD IBCMDA IBRD IBRDA IBSTOP IBRPP IBRSP IBDIAG IBXTRC IBRDI IBWRTI IBRDIA IBWRTIA IBSTA IBERR IBCNT BDNAME GPIBO CALL IBFIND BDNAME BRDO IF BRDO lt 0 THEN PRINT IBFIND ERROR END BDNAME TEKDEV1 CALL IBFIND BDNAME TEKDEV1 IF TEKDEV1 lt 0 THEN PRINT IBFIND ERROR END REM REM Initialize reset the pulse generator and enable error generation REM WRT rst header on verbose on CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT WRT cls dese 255 ese 255 sre 32 CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT REM REM Lockout the front pan
33. 3 71 Limits 2 37 3 70 3 73 Low 2 36 2 37 3 74 Offset 2 46 3 76 On off 2 2 2 3 2 10 2 14 2 43 2 46 3 64 3 77 Phase 2 48 3 78 Polarity 2 46 2 49 3 79 Pulse rate 2 49 3 79 Pulse width 2 48 3 85 Queue 3 133 Rise time 2 48 3 83 Trail delay 2 48 3 81 Transducer input 2 49 3 83 Transition 2 48 3 83 Voltages 2 36 2 46 3 69 3 74 Width 2 48 3 85 OUTPUT button 1 11 2 2 2 3 OUTPUT connector 1 11 2 2 2 3 2 7 2 10 2 14 2 46 Output Level Checks HFS 9DG1 F 13 HFS 9DG2 and HFS 9PG2 F 16 HFS 9PGI F 19 Output menu item 2 10 2 14 2 46 Output queue 3 133 HFS 9000 User Manual Output menu item 2 10 2 14 2 46 Parallel poll C 1 Parity menu item 2 55 3 5 Paste Channel menu item 2 50 Performance Verification Procedures F 1 Period 1 8 2 47 2 62 3 109 Phase lock 2 40 Period menu item 1 7 2 40 2 47 2 62 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt command PGEN lt x gt 3 58 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt 3 59 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt AMPLitude 3 59 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA 3 61 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA FILL 3 63 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt CDELay 3 63 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt COUTput 3 64 PGEN x CH n CVIew 3 65 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA 3 65 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA COPY 3 66 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA S WAP 3 67 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DCYCle 3 67 PGEN lt x
34. After you have set up the first channel for a particular check use the Copy Channel and Paste Channel menu items to transfer the setup to the other channels These tests check the output level in volts DC of each data generator channel You will need to repeat these checks for each output channel the number of times you repeat a check depends on the configuration of your HFS 9000 A reference to the channel is a reference to the particular channel being checked Equipment One DVM digital voltmeter item 1 Required q One BNC female to dual banana connector item 2 One precision coaxial cable item 3 One feedthrough termination item 4 One threaded SMA female to SMA male slip on connector item 11 1 Reset the HFS 9000 2 Set the Digital Voltmeter to measure DC volts on Auto Range F 13 Appendix Performance Verification 3 Construct the termination assembly by connecting the following items in the order listed a b c d e one BNC female to dual banana connector item 2 one precision coaxial cable item 3 one feedthrough termination item 4 one BNC female to SMA male adapter item 10 one threaded SMA female to SMA male slip on connector item 11 4 Connect banana plug end of the termination assembly to the input of the DVM and connect the other end to the channel normal OUTPUT connector 5 Setthe HFS 9000 according to Table 7 Table F 7 HFS 9DG1 Output Level Ch
35. Amplitude 2 46 3 59 Channel delay 2 25 3 63 Channel query 3 59 Complementary output 3 64 Duty cycle 2 48 3 67 Fall time 2 48 3 83 High 2 36 2 37 2 46 3 69 Lead delay 2 47 3 71 Leading hold 3 72 Level view 3 75 Limits 2 37 3 70 3 73 Low 2 36 2 37 3 74 Offset 2 46 3 76 On off 2 2 2 3 2 10 2 43 2 46 3 64 3 77 Output 2 10 2 46 3 77 Output 2 10 2 46 3 64 Phase 2 48 3 78 Polarity 2 46 2 49 3 79 Pulse rate 2 49 3 79 Pulse width 2 48 3 85 Query 3 58 Rise time 2 48 3 83 Trail delay 2 48 3 81 Trailing hold 3 82 Transducer input 2 49 3 83 Transition 2 48 3 83 Voltages 2 36 2 46 3 69 3 74 Width 2 48 3 85 Pulse menu 1 4 2 10 2 35 2 45 Timing diagram 2 45 Pulse Rate menu item 2 49 2 65 Pulse window 2 1 2 62 PURGE command 3 87 Purge menu item 2 58 Purge setting command 3 87 Index 8 Q Query Header in query response 3 54 3 126 Query command 3 9 Queue Event 3 133 Output 3 133 Quoted string Command argument 3 14 R Rack mount A 2 Random 2 22 RCL command 3 88 Recall menu item 2 57 Recall setting command 3 88 Register DESER 3 32 3 86 3 131 ESER 3 33 3 86 3 131 SBR 3 105 3 130 SESR 3 31 3 34 3 57 3 129 SRER 3 86 3 105 3 132 REM debug indicator C 4 REMOTE light 2 2 2 3 2 31 Required Test Equipment F 1 Reserved words 3 Reset 1 5 Calibrati
36. C 1 Enable C 1 SERIAL PORT connector 2 53 Service request enable command 3 105 Service request enable register 3 105 SESR register 3 31 3 34 3 57 3 129 Set command 3 9 Setting HFS 9000 User Manual Command query 3 56 Purge command 3 87 Query 3 56 Recall command 3 88 Save command 3 96 Setting menu item 2 57 Settings 2 57 Signal 2 16 Data Fill Binary 3 99 Data Input Output Binary 3 98 Parameter Setting 3 96 SIGNAL command SIGNAL lt parameter gt 3 96 SIGNAL BDATA 3 98 SIGNAL BDATA FILL 3 99 SIGNal command SIGNal CVIew 3 100 SIGNal DATA 3 101 SIGNal DATA COPY 3 102 SIGNal TYPE 3 104 Signal command SIGNal DRADix 3 103 Signal Menu 2 14 Signal menu 1 4 Signal Name menu item 2 14 Signal Type menu item 2 16 2 46 Single step operation 2 63 SKEW CAL IN connector 2 2 2 3 2 7 SPD C 1 SPE C 1 Specified characteristics B 8 SRE command 3 105 3 132 SRER register 3 86 3 105 3 132 SRQ button 2 2 2 3 2 31 Start vector indicator 2 18 Startup delay 2 1 2 62 Status and error commands ALLEV 3 29 STB query 3 105 3 130 Stop Bits menu item 2 55 3 5 Synchronizing to external signal 2 39 Syntax BNF Backus Naur form 3 9 Diagram 3 19 3 20 T Table ASCII character C 2 Common command 3 21 Device command 3 22 Programming message 3 135 Reserved words 3 TADS debug indicator C 4 Index 9 Index TBAS command TBAS 3 106 TBAS C
37. CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property Terms the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product 4 m DANGER Protective Ground ATTENTION Double High Voltage Earth Terminal Refer to Insulated Manual Xii HFS 9000 User Manual General Safety Summary Certifications and Compliances CSA Certified Power CSA Certification includes the products and power cords appropriate for use in Cords the North America power network other power cords supplied are approved for the country of use Compliances Consult the product specifications for IEC Installation Category Pollution Degree and Safety Class HFS 9000 User Manual xiii General Safety Summary xiv HFS 9000 User Manual Preface The HFS 9000 User Manual contains operating and programming information for the HFS 9003 and HFS 9009 Stimulus Systems This manual contains the following sections m Getting Started provides a product description along with a brief tour of the HFS 9000 m Operating Basics contains a graphical overview of the HFS 9000 followed
38. CH lt n gt DATA lt address gt lt count gt lt ascii data gt lt count gt Arguments address sets queries the start address for the data count specifies the number of data elements that follow or that should be returned ascii data represents the ascii formatted binary data to be entered Examples PGENC CH2 DATA 0 16 1110001000011100 enters 16 bits of data into channel C2 starting at address 0 PGENA CH1 DATA 0 12 returns the first 12 bits of data starting from address 0 from channel A1 PGEN x CH n DATA COPY PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA COPY Data Copy copies data from one channel to another Related Commands SIGNAL DATA COPY Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA COPY lt address1 gt lt count gt lt channel gt lt address2 gt CE ROC SO OT DO CT race lt address1 gt lt count gt channel Ce ressa Arguments x and n specify the destination channel lt address1 gt specifies the destination address count specifies the number of data elements to be copied 3 66 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands lt channel gt specifies the source channel address represents the source address Examples PGENA CH1 DATA COPY 0 512 1 1024 copies 512 data bits from channel 1 address 1024 to channel A1 address 0 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA SWAP PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA SWAP Data Swap swaps blocks of data between channels S
39. Channels 2 9 Check Procedures F 13 Clear Block menu item 2 21 Clear Status 3 31 CLS command 3 31 Command Abbreviating 3 12 ALIas CATalog 3 27 ALIas DEFine 3 27 ALIas DELEte ALL 3 28 ALIas DELEte NAME 3 28 ALIas STATE 3 29 Argument 3 10 Block argument 3 15 CAL CID 3 30 CAL CONStant 3 30 Card channel mnemonic 3 16 Channel argument 3 16 CLS 3 31 Common List 3 21 Concatenating 3 12 DESE 3 32 3 131 Device List 3 22 ESE 3 33 3 132 ESR 3 34 3 129 3 34 EVMSG 3 34 FACTORY 3 35 Index 2 FPAN 3 38 FPAN ADVance 3 38 FPAN BEND 3 39 FPAN BSIZe 3 40 FPAN BSTart 3 41 FPAN CONStant 3 41 FPAN COPies 3 42 FPAN CORDer 3 43 FPAN DCHannel 3 40 3 43 FPAN DITem 3 44 FPAN DMENu 3 45 FPAN DNCHannel 3 45 FPAN DNSignal 3 46 FPAN DNSTart 3 46 FPAN DSETting 3 47 FPAN DSIGnal 3 47 FPAN DVECtor 3 48 FPAN FSCale 3 49 FPAN KEY 3 49 FPAN KRESolution 3 51 FPAN MESSage 3 52 FPAN METHod 3 52 FPAN SORDer 3 53 FPAN VRADix 3 54 HEADER 3 54 Header 3 10 IDN 3 55 List Common command 3 21 Device command 3 22 LRN 3 56 Message 3 10 Mnemonic 3 10 Numeric argument 3 16 3 57 OPT 3 57 PGEN lt x gt 3 58 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt 3 59 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt AMPLitude 3 59 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA 3 61 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA FILL 3 63 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt CDELay 3 63 PGEN lt x gt CH
40. Figure 2 32 Phase Lock In and Frame Sync In Timing Relationships 2 41 Phase Lock Phase Lock After Power on or Recall Phase lock is set to off whenever you power on the HFS 9000 or whenever you recall a setting This is because a signal must be applied to the PHASE LOCK IN connector before phase lock is established Once you have recalled a setting or powered on you can connect your phase lock signal and then turn on phase lock mode 2 42 HFS 9000 User Manual Configuration HFS 9000 User Manual When you power on the HFS 9000 it runs the self test diagnostics Then it restores the instrument setting to the same way it was the last time it was powered off with the exception of the following two conditions m outputs remained turned off This prevents the HFS 9000 from damaging any equipment or devices under test that happen to be connected during power on m The phase lock mode is turned off because phase lock requires an external signal to be attached at the time phase lock is turned on If you need to restore phase lock mode power the HFS 9000 on connect the phase lock signal to the PHASE LOCK IN connector then turn on phase lock using the Time Base menu PhaseLockIn item The HFS 9000 can display the configuration of the instrument Use the View Config item in the Cal Deskew menu Figure 2 33 shows this menu and Figure 2 34 shows a typical configuration display Cal Deskew Menu press SE
41. Nominal Traits Output Edge Placement Performance Name Description Channel deskew Chan Delay 60 ns to 2 0 us range channels relative to time zero reference Channel deskew Chan Delay HFS 9PG1 HFS 9PG2 5 ps resolution HFS 9DG1 HFS 9DG2 1 ps Delay Lead Delay adjustment Zero to 20 us range Delay Lead Delay Trail Delay HFS 9PG1 HFS 9PG2 5 ps adjustment resolution HFS 9DG1 HFS 9DG2 1 ps Pulse width adjustment range HFS 9PG1 HFS 9P G2 Zero to one period 790 ps inclusive HFS 9DG1 HFS 9DG2 Zero to one period x 65 536 inclusive Pulse width adjustment resolu HFS 9P G1 HFS 9P 62 5 ps tion HFS 9061 HFS 9062 1 ps Fine knob resolution of timing 5 ps Measured at 50 levels each channel independent Table B 8 Nominal Traits Transducer In Performance Name TRANSDUCER IN input charac teristic Description HFS 9P G1 1000 pF DC blocking capacitor followed by 50 termination to ground HFS 9P G2 100 pF DC blocking capacitor followed by 50 O termination to ground Table B 9 Nominal Traits Skew Cal In Performance Description SKEW CAL IN usage Calibration use only No signal except from a channel OUTPUT connector during the calibration process should ever be applied to this input Appendix B Specifications Table B 10 Nominal Traits Trigger In Performance Description 5 V maximum 4 70 V Name Input Voltage range Trigger level range
42. Output Off Pulse menu Pulse Rate Off Pulse menu Polarity Complement Pulse menu High Level 2 6V Pulse menu Low Level 0 4V F 19 Appendix Performance Verification The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 2 498 V and 2 702 V 6 Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Normal The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 0 562 V and 0 238 V 7 Set the HFS 9000 according to Table F 16 Table F 16 HFS 9PG1 Output Level Checks Second Settings Control Setting Pulse menu High Level 10V Pulse menu Low Level 2 0V The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 2 090 V and 1 910 V 8 Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Complement The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 1 07 V and 0 93 V 9 Move the feedthrough termination assembly to the channel complemented OUTPUT The DVM is now set to monitor the complement output 10 Set the HFS 9000 according to Table F 17 Table F 17 HFS 9PG1 Output Level Checks Third Settings Control Setting Pulse menu Output Off Pulse menu Output On Pulse menu Polarity Normal Pulse menu High Level 2 6 V Pulse menu Low Level 0 4V The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 2 498 V and 2 702 V 11 Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Complement The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 0 562 and 0 238 V
43. by an alphabetical arrangement of topics Each topic covers an essential aspect of operating the HFS 9000 m Reference explains how to use the HFS 9000 over the General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB and describes the programming commands and the status and event reporting system This section also includes programming examples of how to control the HFS 9000 over the GPIB Appendices includes a list of product accessories product specifications interface specifications and error messages The final appendix is a complete performance verification procedure with forms that may be photocopied and used for recording test results Related Manuals The following manuals contain additional user service or reference information for the HFS 9000 products m HFS 9003 Service Manual 070 8564 00 m HFS 9009 Service Manual 070 8366 01 m BitWriter User Manual 070 8859 00 HFS 9000 User Manual XV Preface xvi HFS 9000 User Manual Getting Started Product Description HFS 9000 User Manual This section presents a product description followed by a brief tour of the HFS 9000 Stimulus System The brief tour illustrates how easy it is to use the HFS 9000 The 9000 Stimulus System combines the capabilities of a complete data generator pulse generator and switch matrix in a single instrument Together with a high speed digitizing oscilloscope the HFS 9000 provides a complete device characterization and test solution with unsu
44. direct current 4 Highlight the Signal Type menu item in the Pulse menu Figure 1 11 Turn the knob to change the signal type 9000 User Manual 1 11 Getting Started 1 12 Pulse Menu press SELECT Pulse HRZkRZ R1 DC Transducer Channel High Level Low Level Polarity C1 B8 mWV 1 8M Hormal Period Lead Delay Duty Cycle Transition ans s 30x Pulse Rate Output Output Hormal off Copy Paste Signal Type View Channel Channel Channel Figure 1 11 Setting the Signal Type 5 Observe how the illustration at the top of the display changes with the signal type Set the signal type to NRZ 6 Press the MAIN MENU button 7 Use the arrow keys to highlight the Data Fill menu and press the SELECT button A channel is initially filled with zeros You can change the data in the channel using the Data Fill menu or by editing the data in the channel one bit at a time in the Data Edit menu The Data Fill menu is the quickest method for placing data in a channel using the front panel The commands in the Data Fill menu work on a Block of vectors A Block is defined by a start vector and an end vector Initially the block start and end vectors are set to 0 Highlight the Block End menu item On the numeric keypad press 1 5 and ENTER This sets the block end vector to 15 Blocks are filled using the Fill Block with Method menu item The three parameters for this menu item are Con
45. lt HEX gt specifies a hexadecimal data radix SIGNAL DRADIX A HEX sets the data radix for signal A to hexadecimal 3 103 Commands SIGNAL DRADIX returns the data radix for signal CIK SIGNal TYPE SIGNal TYPE Signal Type specifies the type of output for the specified channel This performs the same function as the Signal Type item in the Signal and Pulse menus Related Commands PGEN x CH n TYPE Syntax SIGNal TYPE lt signal gt NRZ RZ R1 PULSe DC TRANSDucer SIGNal TYPE signal space signal TRANSDucer space Arguments NRZ sets the signal type to Non Return to Zero RZ sets the signal type to Return to Zero R1 sets the signal type to Return to One PULSe sets the signal type to Pulse DC sets the signal type to DC TRANSDucer sets the signal type to transducer Examples SIGNAL TYPE A NRZ sets the signal type of bus A to non return to zero SIGNal TYPE CLK PULSE sets the signal type of channel CLK to pulse SIGNAL TYPE returns the signal type of channel 0 3 104 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands SRE Related Commands Syntax Arguments Examples STB Query Only Related Commands Syntax HFS 9000 User Manual The SRE Service Request Enable command sets and queries the bits in the Service Request Enable Register SRER For a complete discussio
46. lt count gt lt block gt SIGNal BDATA lt pin gt lt address gt lt count gt space 4 lt gt e e address gt m m scout 7 Gm OM uer eL spaces gt G lt gt count Arguments lt pin gt identifies the signal to be filled with data address specifies the start address for the data count specifies the number of data bits that follow or that should be returned block represents a block of binary bytes NOTE Each byte in block contains eight data bits Examples SIGNAL BDATA G1 0 16 12G8 enters 16 bits of data into signal G1 starting at address 0 Where is the block start character lis the number of digits in the length field 2 is the length field it specifies the number of data bytes eight bits per byte The sixteen bits of data are represented by G8 where 01000111 8 00111000 The following table illustrates how the data in the above example would be read into the channel memory Note how each byte is read in from right to left In other words the least significant bit of each byte is read in first 3 98 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Signals Address A0 DO 000 0003 0005 0008 X 0 X 0009 X 0 X 0010 X 0 X 0011 X 1 X 0012 X 1 X 0015 SIGNAL BDATA WE 0 12 returns the first 12 bits of data starting from address 0 from signal WE SIGNal BDATA F
47. used as an alternate to NR3 For example this numeric type would let you use 10ns as an alternate to 10E 9 The 9000 has up to nine pulse generator cards depending on the mainframe Most commands specify the card to address as a part of the first mnemonic in the header Which channel to address is the second mnemonic in the header Symbol Meaning x A card specifier either A B C D E F G H orl CH lt n gt A channel specifier lt n gt is either 1 2 3 or 4 The lt Header gt can be a simple command name or a command name with a card designator m lt Header gt lt Command Name gt lt Command Name gt lt Card gt Similarly all Sub Headers that begin with CH specify the channel For example in the command PGENB CH1 WIDTH 20ms the header PGENB specifies the B pulse generator card and the sub header CH1 specifies channel 1 on that card The HFS 9000 has up to nine pulse generator cards depending on the mainframe Pulse Generator cards have two output channels Data Time Generator cards have four output channels When you use the front panel to control the HFS 9000 use a unique channel name to identify each channel A few program ming commands that deal with the front panel specify output channels according to their front panel channel name Symbol Meaning A channel specifierfor example A1 A2 B1 B2 B3 B4 F1 or F2 Channel HFS 9000 User Manual Command Syntax Channel
48. 2 62 Count Up 2 22 Index 3 Index D Data Copy menu 1 4 Data Edit menu 1 4 Data Fill menu 1 4 Data Radix menu item 2 20 Data time generator 2 13 On off 2 14 Output 2 14 Output 2 14 DCL C 1 Debug Indicator ATN C 4 LADS C 4 LLO C 4 REM C 4 RS232 Error C 4 TADS C 4 gt XOFF C 5 XOFF gt C 5 mode C 4 Debug menu item 2 33 2 56 3 5 3 6 Delay Channel 2 25 Delay menu item 2 56 3 6 deleting a single vector 2 23 DESE command 3 32 3 131 DESER register 3 32 3 86 3 131 Deskew 2 25 Channel 2 25 Trigger out 2 27 Device Clear 3 9 C 1 Device command List 3 22 Diagnostics Calibration memory failure 2 8 Diagram Level 2 36 Syntax 3 19 3 20 Timing 2 1 Voltage 2 36 Dialog 1 5 Documentation A 1 Duty Cycle menu item 2 48 Duty cycle view 2 48 3 82 E E in Data Edit menu 2 18 Echo menu item 2 56 3 5 Edge Placement Checks F 27 EIA Std RS 232 C interface 3 1 End vector indicator 2 18 ENTER button 1 8 Index 4 EOI end or identify 3 13 EOL menu item 2 56 3 6 Error message Programming interface 3 135 ESE command 3 33 3 132 ESER register 3 33 3 86 3 131 ESR command 3 34 ESR query 3 129 Event handling 3 134 3 141 Event query 3 34 Event queue 3 34 3 133 EVENT command 3 34 EVMSG command 3 34 External clock 2 39 F FACTORY command 3 35 Factory menu item 2 51 2 58
49. 2 36 2 37 3 74 Offset 2 46 3 76 PHASE LOCK IN connector 2 39 HFS 9000 User Manual TRANSDUCER IN connector 2 49 W WAJ command 3 126 Wait for operation complete 3 126 Width menu item 2 48 Width view 2 48 3 82 Window Pulse 2 1 2 62 X gt debug indicator 5 XOFF gt debug indicator C 5 2 55 3 5 Index 11 Index Index 12 HFS 9000 User Manual
50. 3 2 10 2 49 Impedance 2 49 Voltage 2 49 Transducer menu item 2 49 Transition menu item 2 48 TRG command 3 116 Trig Level menu item 2 64 2 68 Trig Slope menu item 2 64 2 68 Trig Auto Time base mode 1 7 2 63 Trig Auto Time base mode 2 20 Trigger 2 67 Burst mode 2 41 Frame sync 2 39 In 2 25 2 39 3 112 Level 2 64 2 68 3 113 Diagram 2 36 Out 2 27 2 65 2 68 3 115 Deskew 2 27 Out period 2 65 2 68 3 115 Phase lock 2 39 2 43 2 64 2 68 3 110 Pretrigger 2 27 2 65 2 68 3 116 Slope 2 64 2 68 3 113 Trigger command 3 116 TRIGGER IN connector 2 2 2 3 2 25 2 62 2 64 2 67 Trigger In menu item 2 41 2 64 2 67 TRIGGER OUT connector 1 11 2 2 2 3 2 7 2 27 2 65 2 68 TST query 3 117 Typical specifications B 11 U UNDO button 1 9 2 2 2 3 UNL C 1 Unlisten C 1 UNT C 1 Untalk C 1 V VAR RATE pulse generator card 2 35 2 47 Vec Radix menu item 2 20 2 24 VECTOR commands BDATA 3 118 BlOFormat 3 121 DATA 3 121 END 3 123 IOFormat 3 124 LOOP 3 125 HFS 9000 User Manual Index STARt 3 125 VECTor 3 118 Vector menu 1 4 VERBOSE command 3 126 Verification Sequence F 11 Version number 2 43 View Config menu item 2 43 View menu item 2 16 2 21 Voltage Amplitude 2 46 3 59 Diagram 2 36 FRAME SYNC IN connector 2 41 High 2 36 2 37 2 46 3 69 Limits 2 37 3 70 3 73 Low
51. 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only Front Panel Displayed Setting FrontPanel Display Signal FPAN DVECtor FPAN FSCale FPAN KEY FPAN KRESolution FrontPanel Display Vector HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only FrontPanel Fill Scale HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only FrontPanel Key FrontPanel Knob Resolution FPAN MESSage FPAN METHod FPAN SORDer Front Panel Message FrontPanel Fill Method HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only FrontPanel Signal Display Order 3 23 Commands Table 3 5 HFS 9000 Device Commands and Parameters Cont Header FPAN VRADix Full Command Name Front Panel Vector Radix HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only PGEN x CH n i tude Pulse Generator Amplitude PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA Pulse Generator Binary Data Input Output PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA FILL Pulse Generator Binary Data Fill PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt CDELay Pulse Generator Channel Delay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt COUTput Pulse Generator Complement Output PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt CVIew Pulse Generator Channel View PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA Pulse Generator Data Input Output Binary TD and HFS 9062 cards only PGEN x lt gt DATA COPY Pulse Generator Data Copy HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 cards only PGEN x CH n DATA SWAP Pulse Generator Data Swap HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DCYCle Pulse Generator Duty Cycle
52. Aen B 10 Table B 26 Typical Characteristics Time Base B 11 Table B 27 Typical Characteristics HFS 9PG1 Output Performance ee eR hee Ree we wwe ees hens B 11 Table B 28 Typical Characteristics HFS 9PG2 Output Performance sers e hr RR e E oe eR E res B 12 Table B 29 Typical Characteristics HFS 9DG1 Output Performance secs siss RR oa Rr n Ree p ren hr B 12 Table 30 Typical Characteristics HFS 9DG2 Output Performance Rh he n e x rm B 12 Table 31 Typical Characteristics Performance to External Frequency Reference B 13 Table 32 Typical Characteristics Transducer In Performance B 13 Table B 33 Typical Characteristics Trigger In Performance B 13 Table B 34 Typical Characteristics Trigger Out Performance B 14 Table B 35 Typical Characteristics Power Requirements B 14 Table C 1 HFS 9000 Standard Interface Messages C 1 Table C22 The ASCII Character Set 2 Table 3 Serial Port DB 9 Pin Assignments C 6 Table 4 Standard Accessory Cable Connections C 7 Table 5 Converter Wiring for 25 pin PCs C 7 HES 9000 User Manual Table of Contents HFS 9000 User Manual Table 6 Converter Cable for 9 pin PCs1 C 8 Table D 1 Displayed Error Messages
53. C C 25 3 Channel 1 ChannelA2 Channel B4 Channel B2 Channel B3 Figure 2 2 Channel Locations HFS 9000 User Manual 2 9 Channels Channel Controls On HFS 9PGI HFS 9PG2 and HFS 9DGI cards each channel has both normal OUTPUT and inverted OUTPUT connectors The HFS 9DG2 card has only one connector per channel OUTPUT Each output connector of each channel has a button to turn on or off that output and a light telling whether or not that output is on In addition each channel on HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9PG2 cards have a TRANSDUCER IN connector For more information on the Transducer mode see page 2 49 Figures 2 3 2 4 and 2 5 show the layout of controls for the different pulse and data time generator cards O O O Q O O y LM O O 22 ANN TRANSDUCER TRANSDUCER OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT CH 1 CH2 Figure 2 3 Channel Controls on an HFS 9PG2 Card O O O O O O O O9 O O O 0 OQ0 0 OUTPUT Ure OUTPUT OUTPUT outeur OUTPUT CH 1 CH2 CH 3 CH4 Figure 2 4 Channel Controls on an HFS 9DG1 Card Figure 2 5 Channel Controls on an HFS 9DG2 Card You can also turn off normal and inverted output for any channel with th
54. Commands Examples TBAS MODE Syntax Arguments Examples 3 108 TBAS FREQ 100 6 sets the time base frequency to 100 MHz TBAS FREQ might return the string 450E 6 showing that the time base frequency is set to 450 MHz TBAS MODE sets and queries the time base mode This performs the same function as the Mode item in the front panel Time Base menu TBAS MODE AUTO ABURst BURSt TAUTo TBAS MODE Q AUTO sets the time base to auto mode ABURst sets the time base to auto burst mode BURSt sets the time base to burst mode TAUTo sets the time base to auto mode but not until a trigger is received TBAS MODE AUTO sets the time base mode to auto TBAS MODE TAUTO sets the time base mode to triggered auto TBAS MODE ABUR sets the time base mode to auto burst TBAS MODE might return the string BURS showing that the time base is set to burst mode HFS 9000 User Manual Commands TBAS PERiod Related Commands Syntax Arguments Examples TBAS PVlew HFS 9000 User Manual TBAS PERiod sets and queries the time base period This performs the same function as the Period item in the front panel Time Base menu or Pulse menu PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DCYCle PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LDELay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt THOLd PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt WIDTh TBAS FREQuency TBAS PVIew TBAS PERiod MIN MAX lt NRf gt TBAS PERiod MIN
55. LVI AMPL sets the view for channel A1 to AMPLitude OFFSet PGENB CH2 LVI returns the level display view for channel B2 PGEN x CH n OFFSet PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OFFSet sets and queries the offset of the selected channel This performs the same function as the Offset item in the front panel Pulse menu and Levels menu Related Commands PGEN x CH n AMPLitude PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HIGH PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LOW PGEN x CH n LVlew Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OFFSet MIN MAX lt NRf gt PGEN x CH n OFFSet MIN b MAX i space Arguments MIN sets the offset as follows m If LIMit is ON the offset is LLIMit AMPLitude 2 m If LIMit is OFF the offset is minimum level AMPLitude 2 3 76 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands MAX sets the offset as follows m If LIMit is ON the offset is AMPLitude 2 m If LIMit is OFF the offset is maximum level AMPLitude 2 lt NRf gt sets the offset to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the offset to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning HIGH and LOW are coupled with AMPLitude and OFFSet as follows m HIGH OFFSet AMPLitude 2 m LOW OFFSet AMPLitude 2 Examples PGENB CH1 0FFS 2 5 sets the offset for channel
56. MHz 433 MHz 428 7 MHz 437 3 MHz 466 MHz 461 3 MHz 470 7 MHz 500 MHz 495 0 MHz 505 0 MHz 533 MHz 527 7 MHz 538 3 MHz 566 MHz 560 3 MHz 571 7 MHz 600 MHz 594 0 MHz 606 0 MHz 630 MHz 623 7 MHz 636 3 MHz Table F 33 Frequency Limits HFS 9PG2 HFS 9000 Pulse Menu DSO FREQUENCY 2 DSO FREQUENCY 2 Frequency Setting Minimum Maximum 100 kHz 49 5 kHz 50 5 kHz 324 MHz 160 4 MHz 163 6 MHz 326 MHz 161 4 MHz 164 6 MHz 400 MHz 198 MHz 202 MHz 433 MHz 214 3 MHz 218 7 MHz HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification HFS 9000 User Manual Table F 33 Frequency Limits HFS 9PG2 Cont HFS 9000 Pulse Menu DSO FREQUENCY 2 DSO FREQUENCY 2 Frequency Setting Minimum Maximum 466 MHz 230 7 MHz 235 3 MHz 500 MHz 247 5 MHz 252 5 MHz 533 MHz 263 8 MHz 269 2 MHz 566 MHz 280 2 MHz 285 8 MHz 600 MHz 297 0 MHz 303 0 MHz Table F 34 Frequency Limits HFS 9DG2 HFS 9000 Pulse Menu DSO FREQUENCY DSO FREQUENCY Frequency Setting Minimum Maximum 50 kHz 49 5 kHz 50 5 kHz 162 MHz 160 4 MHz 163 6 MHz 163 MHz 161 4 MHz 164 6 MHz 200 MHz 198 0 MHz 202 0 MHz 216 5 MHz 214 3 MHz 218 7 MHz 233 MHz 230 7 MHz 235 3 MHz 250 MHz 241 5 MHz 252 5 MHz 266 5 MHz 263 8 MHz 269 2 MHz 283 MHz 280 2 MHz 285 8 MHz 300 MHz 297 0 MHz 303 0 MHz F 33 Appendix Performance Verification F 34 Phase Lock Check Equipment Generator Leveled Sine Wav
57. NAME No Query Form The ALIas DELEte NAME command removes a selected alias Related Commands ALIas CATalog ALIas DEFine FACTORY Syntax ALIas DELEte NAME lt QString gt COELEt 7 C WWE e e Strings Arguments lt QString gt is the name of the alias you want to remove Using ALIas DELEte NAME without specifying an alias causes an execution error 3 28 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Examples ALIAS STATE Related Commands Syntax Arguments Examples ALLEV Query Only Related Commands HFS 9000 User Manual ALIas DELEte NAME SETUP3 removes the alias called SETUP3 The ALIAS STATE command turns aliases on or off This command 1 identical to the ALIAS command ALIAS FACTORY ALIAS STATE OFF ON NRI ALIAS STATE space OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns alias expansion off If a defined alias is sent when ALIAS STATE is OFF a command error will be generated ON or lt NR1 gt 1 turns alias expansion on When a defined alias is received the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed ALIAS STATE OFF turns the command alias feature off ALIAS STATE returns 0 when alias mode is off Causes the HFS 9000 to return all events and their messages and removes the returned events from the Event Queue The messages are separated by commas Use the ESR query to enable the events to be returned For a complete discussion of th
58. Operating Basics Reference HFS 9000 User Manual General Safety Summary xi Preface 2 Product Descriptions 1 1 A Briel 1 2 Part 1 Reset the HFS 9000 1 2 Part 2 Set the Time Base o Re 1 6 Part 3 Turn On Pulse Output 20 0 eee eee ene 1 10 Part 4 Setting Up a Data Time Generator 1 11 An Operator Overview 2 1 Calibration voe n s Eee OR eR ES es EA RR Re 2 7 Chann ls 5 pere reed ra D oie dacs saath EE Ri E siege 2 9 Data Time 2 13 D skew 2 25 GPIB cinta hens ERE EE ER e a d Ra Mee Nea TEE LEE 2 29 L ev ls 4 2 ope S SHE Bie n wae e e ep E TUE 2 35 Phase Lock isse rmt nme a epee eg 2 39 Power On seene eisa RUF E 2 43 Pulse Generators e eran oo tine an ue 2 45 Ab theo casas a thee Ol 2 51 RS 232 C 2 53 Saved Settings esp US Ie pF rex E sess 2 57 Self Test i EE Bae EES CE AE ER RE e PEE 2 59 Tine evel ep tet oU m ODE ES TUR e pop qe 2 61 T iggeb i 2m 9 ete ener Wola apes 2 67 Setting Up the Instrument 3 1 Controllers 1 EUER beue pese ER EE Ee b Sa 3 1 Using the GPIB Interface
59. Order If you wish to return the display order to the default order A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 etc select the Reset Order menu item and press SELECT A dialog box Data Time Generators Entering Vector Data Editing Vectors Start Vector Indicator Vectors Loop Vector Indicator will appear asking you to confirm that you wish to reset the channel order The default answer is Yes To select Cancel use either the knob or the up down arrow keys to change the selection When the correct response is highlighted press SELECT Data can be entered in three ways One way is to enter data one bit at a time using the Data Edit menu Another way is to use the Data Fill and Data Copy menus The third method is used if you have generated test vectors with a CAD system or Tektronix BitWriter Software With this method you transfer your vector data into the HFS 9000 via the programming interface For more information on entering data via the programming interface please refer to page 3 121 You view and edit the contents of vectors from the Data Edit menu There are no menu items in the Data Edit menu To display the Data Edit menu select Data Edit Menu from the main menu see Figure 2 17 Press Select to view other Vectors gt naar Ci T7 C OL IT d d Signals 3 000001 000002 000003 000004 000005 J 900005 o00o0DO0 L 0 a This line indicates the direction the cursor will move
60. RUN STOP 2 2 2 3 SELECT 1 3 2 2 2 3 2 4 SRQ 2 2 2 3 2 31 UNDO 1 9 2 2 2 3 C CAL command CAL CID 3 30 CAL CONStant 3 30 Cal Deskew menu 1 4 2 7 2 25 2 43 2 59 2 61 2 67 Calibrate menu item 2 7 Calibration 2 7 F 12 Constant 3 30 Interval 2 7 Memory 2 7 2 51 Settings 2 7 Card ID 2 44 3 30 Card channel Command mnemonic 3 16 Chan Delay menu item 2 25 Channel Address 2 9 Channel View 3 65 3 68 Command argument 3 16 Connectors 2 10 Data Copy 3 66 Data Fill Binary 3 63 Data Input Output 3 65 Data Input Output Binary 3 61 Data Swap 3 67 Delay 2 25 Deskew 2 25 Location 2 9 Naming 2 14 2 24 Output Amplitude 2 46 3 59 Channel delay 2 25 3 63 Duty cycle 2 48 3 67 Fall time 2 48 3 83 Index 1 Index High 2 36 2 37 2 46 3 69 Lead delay 2 47 3 71 Limits 2 37 3 70 3 73 Low 2 36 2 37 3 74 Offset 2 46 3 76 On off 2 2 2 3 2 10 2 14 2 43 2 46 3 64 3 77 Phase 2 48 3 78 Polarity 2 46 2 49 3 79 Pulse rate 2 49 3 79 Pulse width 2 48 3 85 Rise time 2 48 3 83 Trail delay 2 48 3 81 Transducer input 2 49 3 83 Transition 2 48 3 83 Voltages 2 36 2 46 3 69 3 74 Width 2 48 3 85 Selecting 2 11 Signal 3 80 Signal Channel View 3 100 Signal Data 3 101 Signal Data Copy 3 102 Signal Type 3 84 3 104 Channel menu item 2 25 2 36 2 46 Channel menu item 2 21
61. Send 9 RNG Ring Indicator The easiest way to connect to an IBM PC or PC clone is to create a null modem or converter This connects to the IBM PC serial port and the standard accessory cable connects to the null modem The converter is non polarized it can be connected either way between the standard accessory cable and the IBM PC serial port The wiring for the null modem is shown in Table C 5 Table C 5 Converter Wiring for 25 pin PCs DB 25 Female 25 Pin DB 25 Female 25 Pin Connector Pin Number Connector Pin Number 1 1 2 3 3 2 4 8 5 and 6 20 8 4 20 5 and 6 C 7 Appendix C Interface Specifications C 8 Connection to IBM PC DB 9 Ports To connect the HFS 9000 to an IBM PC or compatible having DB 9 9 pin serial ports do not use the standard accessory cable at all Instead obtain a DB 9 to DB 9 cable with the wiring shown in Table C 6 Either end of this cable may be connected to either the HFS 9000 or the IBM PC Table C 6 Converter Cable for 9 pin PCs DB 9 Female 9 Pin Connector Pin Number DB 9 Female 9 Pin Connector Pin Number and 8 4 oO BS Ww N Neither connector uses 9 HFS 9000 User Manual 1 Appendix D Error Messages HFS 9000 User Manual Table D 1 shows all the error messages that can be displayed on the screen of the HFS 9000 Included are explanations of the cause of each message a
62. TBAS PLIN INPut enables disables or queries the state of phase lock This performs the same function as the PhaseLockIn item in the front panel Time Base menu HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Related Commands Syntax Arguments Examples TBAS RUN Syntax Arguments HFS 9000 User Manual TBAS TBAS TIN TBAS TOUT TBAS PLIN INPut ON OFF NRf TBAS PLIN INPut fag OFF ees space ON or lt NRf gt 0 enables phase lock OFF or lt NRf gt 0 disables phase lock TBAS PLIN INP ON enables phase lock TBAS PLIN INP might return the value 0 showing that phase lock is disabled TBAS TRUN starts and stops the timebase This performs the same function as the RUN STOP button on the front panel TBAS RUN ON OFF TBAS RUN Ta OFF O Q ON starts the timebase running OFF stops the timebase 3 111 Commands Examples TBAS TIN Related Commands Syntax Examples TBAS TIN INPut Syntax 3 112 TBAS RUN ON starts the timebase TBAS RUN OFF stops the timebase TBAS RUN returns the state of the timebase The TBAS TIN Time Base Trigger In command sets and queries the time base Trigger In parameters TBAS TIN queries all Trigger In parameters TBAS TBAS PLIN TBAS TOUT TBAS TIN TBAS TIN might return the string TBAS TIN INP 1 SLOP POS LEV 1 300000 00 TBAS TIN INPut enables disables
63. Type Data Radix Addr C HRZ Hex Figure 2 14 Viewing a Bus by Group A Signal on an HFS 9DG1 or HFS 9DG2 can be of five different types Pulse NRZ Non Return to Zero RZ Return to Zero R1 Return to One and DC The signal type is assigned with the Signal Type menu item see Figure 2 15 HFS 9000 User Manual Data Time Generators HEZ Hex Ad NRZ Hex a3 HEZ Hex a2 NRE Signal Menu press SELECT PulsekHRZ RZ R1 DC Transducer Channel Howe Signal Hane COata Radix View WE Hex Channel Figure 2 15 Assigning Signal Type To set the signal type select the channel using the Channel menu item Select the Signal Type menu item Turn the knob to select the correct signal type the Transducer signal type appears in the menu but it cannot be assigned to data time generator channels Changing Display Order HES 9000 User Manual You can change the order in which signals are displayed using the Move Up Down and Reset Order menu items in the Signal menu To change the display order of signals select the channel you want to move with the Channel menu item After selecting the channel you want to move select the Move Up Down menu item see Figure 2 16 To move the channel to a different position in the display order turn the knob gt ADOR2 NRZ Hex ADORI NRZ Hex A2 ADORO NRZ Hex A1 Channel ADORS Signal Hame View ADORS Channel Figure 2 16 Changing the Display
64. User Manual Commands MIN I s MAX Ue at space Arguments MIN sets the low level as follows m If LIMit is ON the low level is set to LLIMit m If LIMit is OFF the low level is set to the minimum level MAX sets the low level to HIGH minimum AMPLitude lt NRf gt sets the low level to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the low level to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning AMPLitude and OFFSet are coupled with HIGH and LOW as follows m AMPLitude HIGH LOW m OFFSet HIGH LOW 2 Examples PGENB CH1 LOW 3 2 sets the low level of channel B1 to 3 2 V CH1 LOW returns the low level for channel A1 PGEN x CH n LVlew PGEN x CH n LVIew Level View sets and queries the level display view This performs the same functions as Select from the High Level Low Level Amplitude or Offset items from the front panel Pulse menu and Levels menu Related Commands PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt AMPLitude PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HIGH PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LOW PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OFFSet Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LVIew AMPLitude OFFSet LOW HIGH PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LVIew HFS 9000 User Manual 3 75 Commands space Arguments AMPLitude or OFFSet sets the level display view to AMPLitude OFFSet HIGH or LOW sets the level display view to HIGH LOW Examples PGENA CH1
65. a bit by turning the knob and enter a new value from the numeric keypad HFS 9000 User Manual 1 13 Getting Started 15 Turn the knob to highlight vector 7 16 Press 0 on the numeric keypad Observe that the 1 in vector address 7 is replaced by a 0 and the cursor moves down to the next vector This completes your brief tour of the HFS 9000 Stimulus System Refer to the Operating Basics and Reference sections in this manual for more details on operating your HFS 9000 1 14 9000 User Manual Operator Overview The Operating Basics section is arranged as an alphabetic list of topics Each topic covers one aspect of the operation of the HFS 9000 The topics that follow this operator overview are Calibration Channels Data Time Generators Deskew GPIB Levels Phase Lock Power On Pulse Generators Reset RS 232 C Saved Settings Self Test Time Base Trigger Timing and Pulses Burst and Auto Burst Modes The Frequency or Period setting determines the frequency or duration of the pulse windows See page 2 62 The Count setting determines the number of pulse windows in a burst see page 2 62 Pulses may occur at any time and be any width within the pulse window Each channel may independently Set such pulse parameters as width phase lead delay and trailing delay See page 2 45 The OutPeriod setting determines which pulse window the output trigger is associated with i
66. address VECTOR LOOP 8 sets the vector loop address to 8 VECTOR LOOP returns the vector loop address The VECTor STARt Vector Start Address sets the vector start address This performs the same function as the Start item in the Vector menu VECTor STARt address VECTor STARt puc er o 3 125 Commands Arguments Examples VERBOSE Related Commands Syntax Arguments Examples WAI No Query Form 3 126 address sets the start address VECTOR START 0 sets the vector start address to O VECTOR START returns the vector start address The VERBOSE command sets and queries the Verbose Header State that controls the length of headers on query responses This command does not affect IEEE 488 2 Common Commands those starting with an asterisk HEADER LRN VERBOSE ON OFF NRf VERBOSE OFF e space ON or lt NRf gt 0 sets the Verbose Header State TRUE which returns full length headers for applicable setting queries OFF or lt NRf gt 0 sets the Verbose Header State FALSE which returns mini mum length headers for applicable setting queries VERBOSE ON sets the Verbose Header State TRUE VERBOSE might return the value 1 showing that the Verbose Header State is TRUE The WAI Wait command prevents the HFS 9000 from executing further commandis or queries until all pending operations finish HFS 9000 User Manual Comma
67. also be used in an RS 232 C system to control the HFS 9000 Table 3 4 lists the Common Commands supported by the HFS 9000 Complete descriptions of these commands appear in an alphabetical listing of commands later in this section Table 3 4 Commands Common to All GPIB Devices Header Full Command Name ALLEV All Events CLS Clear Status DESE Device Event Status Enable ESE Standard Event Status Enable ESR Standard Event Status Register EVENT Event EVMSG Event Message FACTORY Factory Reset HEADER Header 3 21 Commands Table 3 4 Commands Common to All GPIB Devices Cont Header IDN LRN OPC OPT PSC PURGE RCL RST SAV SRE STB TRG TST VERBOSE WAT Device Commands and Queries Full Command Name Identification Learn Device Setup Operation Complete Optional Identification Power On Status Clear Purge Recall Reset Save Service Request Enable Read Status Byte Trigger Self Test Verbose Wait To Continue Device commands and queries are specific to the HFS 9000 and are defined in this manual These commands and queries may be used by GPIB and RS 232 C systems to control the HFS 9000 Table 3 5 lists the device commands and command parameters supported by the HFS 9000 Complete descriptions of these commands appear in the alphabetical listing of commands that immediately follows this table Table 3 5 HFS 9000 Device Commands and Parameters Header ALIAS C
68. and 1 910 V Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Complement The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 1 070 V and 0 930 V Move the feedthrough termination assembly to the channel complemented OUTPUT if available HFS 9PG2 The DVM is now set to monitor the complement output F 17 Appendix Performance Verification 10 Set the HFS 9000 according to Table F 13 Table F 13 HFS 9PG2 Output Level Checks Third Settings Control Pulse menu Output Setting Off Pulse menu Output On Normal 5 5 Pulse menu Low Level 0v Pulse menu Polarity Pulse menu High Level The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 5 340 V and 5 660 V 11 Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Complement The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 0 270 V and 30 270 V 12 Set the HFS 9000 according to Table F 14 Table F 14 HFS 9PG2 Output Level Checks Fourth Settings Control Setting 1 0V 20V Pulse menu High Level Pulse menu Low Level The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 2 090 V and 1 910 V 13 Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Normal The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 1 07 V and 0 93 V 14 Repeat steps 1 through 13 for each of the HFS 9PG2 and HFS 9DG2 channels in the system 15 Disconnect test setup F 18 HFS 9000 User Manual Appen
69. and 5 150 V Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Complement The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 1 790 V and 2 210 V Set the HFS 9000 according to Table F 10 Table F 10 HFS 9DG1 Output Level Checks Fourth Settings Control Setting Pulse menu High Level 15V Pulse menu Low Level 25V 13 The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 2 680 V and 2 320 V Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Normal The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 1 580 V and 1 420 V F 15 Appendix Performance Verification 14 Repeat steps 1 through 13 for each of the HFS 9DGI channels in the system 15 Disconnect test setup Output Level Checks These tests check the output level in volts DC of each pulse or data generator HFS 9DG2 and HFS 9PG2 channel You will need to repeat these checks for each output channel the Cards Only number of times you repeat a check depends on the configuration of your HFS 9000 A reference to channel is a reference to the particular channel being checked Equipment One DVM digital voltmeter item 1 Required One BNC female to dual banana connector item 2 One precision coaxial cable item 3 One feedthrough termination item 4 One threaded SMA female to SMA male slip on connector item 11 1 Resetthe HFS 9000 2 Setthe Digital Voltmeter to measure DC volts on Auto Range 3 Constr
70. and eliminate its beginning colon For example the commands TBAS MODE BURST and TBAS COUNT 100 could be concatenated into a single command TBAS MODE BURST COUNT 100 the longer version works equally well TBAS MODE BURST TBAS COUNT 100 3 Never precede a star command with a colon TBAS MODE BURST COUNT 100 TRG 4 When you concatenate queries the responses to all of the queries are concatenated into a single response message For example if the time base mode is burst and count is set to 100 the concatenated query TBAS MODE COUNT will return either MODE BURST TBAS COUNT 100 if header is on or BURST 100 if header is off 5 Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message For example TBAS MODE BURST PERIOD 10ns COUNT PGENA CH1 WIDTH HES 9000 User Manual Command Syntax Message Terminators Argument Types HFS 9000 User Manual is a valid message that sets the time base mode to burst the time base period to 10 ns and responds with the time base count setting and the width setting of channel A1 Concatenated commands and queries are executed in the order received Here are some invalid concatenations with an explanation of why they are invalid m TBAS MODE AUTO PGENA CH1 WIDTH 2 ns There is no colon before PGENA m TBAS MODE BURST COUNT 100 There is an extra colon before COUNT TBAS COUNT could be used instead m TBAS MODE BURST TRG There 15 an extra col
71. and thus the orders in which the elements can be sent Parallel paths show that one and only one of the paths must be taken A path around a group of elements shows that those elements are optional Loops show elements that can be repeated Figure 3 7 shows the structure of a few typical syntax diagrams coto Figure 3 7 Typical Syntax Diagrams HFS 9000 User Manual Commands HFS 9000 commands fall into two main groups Common Commands and Device Commands The commands follow Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats 1989 Most of these commands can be used either as set commands or queries However some commands can only be used to set these have the words No Query Form included with the command name Other commands can only be used to query these have a question mark appended to the header and include the words Query Only in the command name Headers mnemonics and arguments are usually spelled out fully in text with the minimum required spelling shown in upper case For example to use the command AMPLitude you must enter at least AMPL The examples in this manual use the abbreviated forms Common Commands and Queries HFS 9000 User Manual Several commands and queries used with the HFS 9000 are common to all devices on the GPIB bus These commands and queries are defined by IEEE Std 488 2 1987 and Tek Standard Codes and Formats 1989 as useful across all instruments in a GPIB system These commands and queries may
72. base burst count This performs same function as the Count item in the front panel Time Base menu TBAS COUNt MIN MAX lt NRf gt TBAS COUNt space MAX eps MIN sets the time base burst count to 1 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Examples TBAS FREQuency Related Commands Syntax Arguments HFS 9000 User Manual MAX sets the time base burst count to the maximum count lt NRf gt sets the time base count to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the time base count to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning TBAS COUN MIN sets the time base burst count to 1 TBAS COUN 30 sets the time base burst count to 30 TBAS COUN might return the value 15 showing that the time base burst count is set at 15 TBAS FREQ sets and queries the time base frequency This performs the same functions as the Frequency item in the front panel Time Base menu or Pulse menu TBAS PERiod TBAS PVIew TBAS FREQuency MIN MAX lt NRf gt TBAS FREQuency FREQuency MIN sets the time base frequency to the minimum MAX sets the time base frequency to the maximum lt NRf gt sets the time base frequency to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the time base frequency to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning FREQuency is the inverse of PERiod FREQuency 1 PERiod 3 107
73. can turn on Debug from either the GPIB or RS 232 menu The purpose of debug mode is to let you observe command operation as commands are sent to the HFS 9000 Debug is especially useful when you are trying to debug a program and you have the controller set to single step through the commands When debug mode is on the debug window see Figure C 1 is displayed above the menu This window is present regardless of which menu is displayed Se Error DCL factory lt E0I gt cls4E0I gt tbas mode bursts cou nt 212 255 ezse 25 3S2zEUIPDZSREUP I Figure C 1 The Debug Window The bottom three rows of the debug window show the most recent commands received by the HFS 9000 regardless of which interface received them GPIB or RS 232 The row of the debug window shows several indicators which appear only when appropriate The indicators and their meanings are m REM The HES 9000 is in the remote state Generally remote means that the HFS 9000 expects to receive commands through the GPIB If local lockout is enabled with remote the front panel is rendered inactive except for the SRQ button and the pulse generator channel buttons and the REMOTE light on the front panel is lit If local lockout has not been enabled then front panel commands will be entered and executed regardless of the remote or local state When you de assert the remote enab
74. command terminator is received you can use the following characters to edit the command you are entering Control R retypes the input command being typed and places the cursor at the right of the last character entered Control U deletes the input command being typed and prompts again for another input Back Space and Delete erase the last character entered Backslash V lets you place special characters such as CR LF Back Space and Backslash into the command Type followed by the desired special character The Backslash is not echoed to your terminal You can use CR to terminate commands sent to the HFS 9000 Normally only LF is recognized as a message terminator Setting Up the Instrument 3 8 HFS 9000 User Manual Command Syntax You can control the HFS 9000 through the GPIB and RS 232 C interfaces using a large group of commands and queries This section describes the syntax these commands and queries use and the conventions the HFS 9000 uses to process them The commands and queries themselves are listed in the Commands section Transmit commands to the HFS 9000 using the enhanced American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCIT character encoding Appendix C includes a chart of the ASCII character set This manual uses Backus Naur Form BNF notation and syntax diagrams to describe commands and queries The syntax diagrams follow the notations and conventions of the A
75. conflicting menu items to blink If you see a blinking menu item look at other menu item s that are also blinking You can resolve the conflict by adjusting any of the blinking menu items Sometimes the conflict is between the time base and some other channel For example if you change the period the new value may not conflict with the channel you are viewing In this case use the Channel menu item to search the other channels to find the conflict A common blinking conflict is caused by too little recovery time This occurs when there is too little time between the end of one pulse and the beginning of the next The minimum recovery time is 800 ps The pulse width adjustment range is from zero to one period less 800 ps Rising and Falling Slopes 2 48 The Transition menu item HFS9PG2 and HFS 9DG2 cards only lets you control the rise time and fall time of logic transitions Enter the desired rise fall time using the numeric keypad or adjust it with the knob The HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9 2 cards do not have variable slope rates Any attempt to change the displayed value in the Transition menu item will result in an error message HFS 9000 User Manual Pulse Generators Half Quarter and Eighth Rate Modes Transducer Mode HFS 9000 User Manual You can set any pulse generator channel to one half one quarter or one eighth of the frequency of the time base with the Pulse Rate menu item You can also turn off pulses from the cha
76. connectors for the SERIAL PORT see page 2 53 and for the GPIB bus see 2 29 HFS 9000 User Manual An Operator Overview The HFS 9009 Front Panel The REMOTE light and SRQ button The UNDO button restores the are used for operator interaction when HFS 9000 to the state it was in before MAIN MENU buttons the HFS 9000 is controlled from a your last change When you change navigate through the menus MAIN MENU computer or controller See page 2 31 menus you can no longer undo the displays the main menu The arrow buttons change which menu item is selected see page 2 4 In the main menu SELECT displays the selected menu In other menus he Knob and FINE button the MANUAL TRIGGER button SELECT may perform an action or change the tyou adjust the value of cimulates a trigger event that way an item works see page 1 7 any Selected menu item normally occurs as a signal at the i ME valle TRIGGER IN connector See ON STANDBY switch turns on the eri ia YOU 2 68 HFS 9000 or turns it off standby ae fatte 93 Even when standby some circuits FUE m uen have line power applied To remove all S i ne power disconnect the power cord from granularity mode See the HFS 9000 previous operation RUN STOP lets you start and stop the time base as necessary The RUNNING light indicates whether the time base is running or not
77. contents of the Standard Event Status Register SESR ESR also clears the SESR since reading the SESR clears it For a complete discussion of the use of these registers see page 3 129 Related Commands CLS DESE ESE EVENT EVMSG SRE STB Syntax ESR C Examples ESR might return the value 213 showing that the SESR contains binary 11010101 EVENT Query Only The EVENT query returns from the Event Queue an event code that provides information about the results of the last ESR read EVENT also removes the returned value from the Event Queue A complete discussion of event handling is on page 3 129 Related Commands CLS DESE ESE ESR EVMSG SRE STB Syntax EVENT CHET gt Examples EVENT might return the response EVENT 110 showing that there was an error in a command header EVMSG Query Only The EVMSG query removes from the Event Queue a single event code associated with the results of the last ESR read and returns the event code along with an explanatory message A complete discussion of event handling is on page 3 129 3 34 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Related Commands CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT SRE STB Syntax EVMSG Examples EVMSG might return the message EVMSG 110 Command header error FACTORY No Query Form Related Commands Syntax HES 9000 User Manual The FACTORY command resets the HFS 9000 to its factory default settin
78. device under test as WE rather than A1 Any channel on any card can be given a name this feature is not limited to the data time generator cards Assigning a name to a channel is performed by the Signal Name item in the Signal menu see Figure 2 10 HEZ Hex 4 HRZ Hex AS HRZ Hex 2 HEZ Hex Al Signal Menu press SELECT to edit this label Channel Have 1 1 Type Data Radix View HRZ Hex Channel Figure 2 10 The Signal Menu To assign a name to a channel select the channel using the Channel menu item Select the Signal Name menu item and press SELECT The dialog box appears as in Figure 2 11 HFS 9000 User Manual Data Time Generators HFS 9000 User Manual Turn the Knob to choose the character Press Select to advance Backspace tn delete or Undo to cancel Fress Enter when finished I g x amp h ilxtr l7 01234567P7898 257 amp ABCD IFGHIJIKLMHOPGRSTUVMXYZD 1 _ abcdefghijklmnopqrcestuvuxyziir Signal Menu press SELECT to edit this label Channel Have Pees Signal Type Data Radix View HRZ Hex Channel Figure 2 11 The Signal Name Dialog Box To enter a name choose a character by turning the knob or pressing the arrow keys When the character is highlighted press SELECT to signify your selection and enable selection of the next character A signal name can be up to six characters long When you are finished selecting characters
79. gt CH lt n gt DRADix 3 68 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HIGH 3 69 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HLIMit 3 70 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LDELay 3 71 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LHOLd 3 72 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LIMit 3 73 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LLIMit 3 73 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LOW 3 74 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LVIew 3 75 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OFFSet 3 76 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OUTPut 3 77 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PHASe 3 78 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt POLarity 3 79 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PRATe 3 79 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt SIGNal 3 80 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay 3 81 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt THOLd 3 82 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TINPut 3 83 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TRANsition 3 83 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TYPE 3 84 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt WIDTh 3 85 Phase lock 2 39 2 43 2 64 2 68 3 110 Period and Frequency 2 40 Phase Lock Check F 34 PHASE LOCK IN Connector 2 2 2 3 2 39 2 43 2 64 2 68 Impedance 2 39 Voltage 2 39 7 Index Lead Delay menu item 2 26 2 47 Phase menu item 2 48 Phase view 2 47 3 72 PhaseLockIn menu item 2 40 2 43 2 64 2 68 Polarity menu item 2 46 Power cord A 2 Power on 2 43 Power on status clear command 3 86 PPC C 1 PPD C 1 PPE C 1 PPU C 1 Pretrigger menu item 2 25 2 65 2 68 PREVIOUS CHANNEL button 2 2 2 3 2 11 2 25 2 36 2 46 PSC command 3 86 3 132 Pulse generator 2 45
80. has sent an XOff character to the RS 232 C controller because the HFS 9000 input buffer is nearly full The controller should acknowledge the XOff character by not sending any more characters until the HFS 9000 sends an XOn character If the controller fails to respond to the HFS 9000 XOff request within three characters the RS232 Error flag may turn on to indicate possible loss of data GPIB Function Subsets HFS 9000 User Manual The HFS 9000 supports many GPIB function subsets as listed below Some of the listings describe subsets that the HFS 9000 does not support m SH1 Source Handshake The HFS 9000 can transmit multi line messages across the GPIB m Acceptor Handshake The HFS 9000 can receive multi line messages across the GPIB m T6 Talker The HFS 9000 becomes a talker when its talk address is sent with the ATN Attention line asserted It ceases to be a talker when another device s talk address is sent with ATN asserted The HFS 9000 has no talk only capability m 14 Listener The HFS 9000 becomes a listener when its listen address is sent with the ATN Attention line asserted The HFS 9000 does not have listen only capability m SRI Service Request The HFS 9000 asserts an SRQ Service Request line to notify the controller when it requires service m RLI Remote Local The HFS 9000 responds to both the GTL Go To Local and LLO Local Lock Out interface messages m PPO Parallel Poll The HFS 9
81. immediately follows an lt 01 gt the Output Queue and MAV bit Status Byte Register bit 4 are also cleared MAV indicates informa tion is in the output queue DCL will clear the output queue and CLS does not clear the output queue or MAV A complete discussion of these registers and bits and of event handling in general is on page 3 129 The DESE Device Event Status Enable command sets and queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER The DESER prevents events from being reported to the Standard Event Status Register SESR and from being entered into the Event Queue For a complete discussion of the use of these registers see page 3 129 CLS ESE ESR EVENT EVMSG SRE STB DESE NRf DESE lt NRf gt is a value in the range from 0 to 255 The binary bits of the DESER are set according to this value For example DESE 209 sets the DESER to the binary value 11010001 that is the first bit in the register is set to 1 the second bit to 1 the third bit to 0 etc The power on default for DESER is all bits set if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the DESER maintains its value through a power cycle NOTE Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same value allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Use the ESE command to set the ESER complete discussion of event handling is on page 3 129 DESE
82. in turn adjust the Chan Delay until the time between the trigger event and the rising edge of the channel pulse matches that of the reference channel You can do this arithmetically by computing the time difference and setting Chan Delay to that value Alternately you can do this using the oscillo scope by probing each channel with the same oscilloscope probe and adjusting the Chan Delay until the pulse timing matches the reference channel HFS 9000 User Manual Deskew Trigger Out Pretrigger HFS 9000 User Manual This procedure synchronizes the channels so that they all deliver pulses to the device under test simultaneously The procedure compensates for timing differences in the electrical paths of the channels for example those caused by unequal cable lengths Once you have deskewed the channels you can introduce controlled timing variations by using the Lead Delay or Phase menu items The output trigger can be adjusted to occur before the beginning of the specified pulse window The default setting of 70 ns means that the trigger out signal appears 70 ns before the beginning of the pulse window Pretrigger can be used to compensate for the delay times incurred by cabling between the TRIGGER OUT connector and the device to be triggered Pretrigger is also useful to compensate for an oscilloscope insertion delay for example the typical insertion delay for the Tektronix CSA 803 is approximately 35 ns 2 27 Deskew
83. item 11 1 Reset the HFS 9000 then make the settings listed in Table F 22 Table F 22 Settings for Rise Time and Fall Time Checks Control Pulse menu Channel Pulse menu High Level Setting The channel under test Press SELECT to change the High Level item to an Amplitude item and the Low Level item to a Offset item Pulse menu Amplitude 10V Pulse menu Offset Pulse menu Polarity Pulse menu Transition 0v Normal 800 ps Pulse menu Period Pulse menu Frequency Pulse menu Pulse Rate Pulse menu Output Press SELECT to change the Period item to a Frequency item 100 kHz Normal On Pulse menu Output Off 2 Connect an SMA cable from the HFS 9000 TRIGGER OUT connector to the DIRECT connector located in the TRIGGER INPUTS section of the DSO Set the DSO to trigger on that signal CAUTION To avoid accidentally damaging the sampling head of the DSO place a 5X SMA attenuator on the sampling head input Voltages in excess of 3 volts may damage the input circuit F 25 Appendix Performance Verification F 26 After placing a 5X SMA attenuator on the sampling head input connect an SMA cable from the 5X SMA attenuator to the HFS 9000 normal OUTPUT connector of the channel under test To save time connecting the cable to other channels use the SMA slip on connector on the end of the cable that connects to the HFS Set the DSO to display the signal with 50 mV di
84. lt n gt HIGH sets and queries the high level of the selected channel This performs the same function as the High Level item in the front panel Pulse menu and Levels menu Related Commands PGEN x CH n AMPLitude PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LOW PGEN x CH n LVIew PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OFFSet Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HIGH MIN MAX lt NRf gt PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HIGH lt space gt Po MAX Ur a Arguments MIN sets the high level to LOW minimum AMPLitude HFS 9000 User Manual 3 69 Commands MAX sets the high level to HLIMit if LIMit is ON and to the maximum level if LIMit is OFF lt NRf gt sets the high level to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the logical high level to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning AMPLitude and OFFSet are coupled with HIGH and LOW as follows m AMPLitude LOW m OFFSet HIGH LOW 2 Examples PGENA CH2 HIGH MAX sets the high level of channel A2 to MAX PGENB CH1 HIGH 3 2 sets the high level of channel to 3 2 V PGENC CH1 HIGH returns the high level of channel C1 PGEN lt x gt CHen gt HLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HLIMit High Limit sets and queries the high limit of the selected channel This performs the same function as the High Limit item in
85. or queries the TRIGGER IN connector This performs the same function as the Trigger In item in the front panel Time Base menu TBAS TIN INPut ON OFF lt NRf gt TBAS TIN INPut OFF Mte at space HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Arguments Examples TBAS TIN LEVel Syntax Arguments Examples TBAS TIN SLOPe HES 9000 User Manual ON or lt NRf gt gt 0 enables trigger in OFF or lt NRf gt 0 disables trigger in TBAS TIN INP ON enables the trigger in TBAS TIN INP might return the value 1 showing that trigger in is enabled TBAS TIN LEVel sets and queries the Trigger In level This performs the same function as the Trig Level item in the front panel Time Base menu TBAS TIN LEVel MIN MAX NRf TBAS TIN LEVel MIN Ie MAX N lt space gt T OTO MIN sets the Trigger In level to the minimum MAX sets the Trigger In level to the maximum lt NRf gt sets the Trigger In level to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the Trigger In level to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning TBAS TIN LEV 4 sets the Trigger In level to 4 V TBAS TIN LEV might return 2 5 showing that the Trigger In level is set to 2 5 V TBAS TIN SLOPe sets and queries the Trigger In slope This performs the same function as the Trig Slope item in the front panel Time Base menu 3 113 Commands Syntax A
86. p a _________ N A 24750 252 5 588 1 599 9 HES 9000 User Manual F 3 Appendix Performance Verification Table 3 Test Record for HFS 9DG1 Card Channel Page of Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH Date of Calibration Technician Performance Test Nominal Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum Output High Level 2 of level 50 mV Level 2 of High Level 2 of amplitude 50 mV Output Complement J 0V 4850 35 150 Channel Normal j 20V 170 32 210 Normal 25V 2680 2 320 Complement 15V 1580 J 1 420 Not Output Normal 3550V HABBO 35 150 Channel Complement 20V J 1700 J 12 210 Complement _ 25V 2680 J 2 320 Normal 15V 15800 J 1 420 Rise Time Fall Time lt 250 ps for Amplitude lt 1 V Output Normal 1V Tr 250p N A Jo l ________ 250 ps Channel Complement 1V TT 250ps N A Jo fo 250 ps Not Output Normal 1V Tf 250ps N A Jo Jo 250 ps Channel Complement 1V Tr 250ps N A fo Jo 250 ps Edge Placement Pulse Delay Time 1 of Lead Delay Chan Delay 50 ps Output Normal i 100 49 151 Channel 00 pS 45 l 555 Mrd 1 060 BP Mr 5 100 MORS 10 150 50 55 101 05 Not Output Normal 100p 49 151 Chanel b50ps
87. press ENTER The dialog box will disappear and the new signal name will appear in the Signal Name and Channel menu items see Figure 2 12 HRZ Hex 4 HRZ Hex AS HRZ Hex 2 WE HRZ Hex Al Signal Menu press SELECT to edit this label Channel Have Pee Signal Type Data Radix View HRZ Hex Channel Figure 2 12 Signal Menu After Entering Signal Name 2 15 Data Time Generators Signal Type You can also name buses To do this assign the same name to two or more channels but use different numbers as the last character in the name You could create an bus named ADDRx where x represents the number of each line of the bus see Figure 2 13 ak HRZ DE ADDR HRZ Hex Az ADOR1 HRZ Hex a2 ADORG HRZ Hex press SELECT to edit this label Channel Have 1 1 Type Data Radix HRZ Hex Figure 2 13 Naming a Bus If you create a bus you can choose to view the bus by individual channel or as a single entity that represents the whole group You change the view of channels with the View item You can choose to view channels as a Channel or as a Group In this manual we will use Signal to refer to a channel that has been named Figure 2 14 below is the same display as above except that the View is set to Group Addr Cl HE Hex Al Siqnal Men Channel kGroup press SELECT Channel Move dderd bees Order Signal Hame Signal
88. provided by Break GET Yes Yes provided by TRG GTL Yes No LLO Yes No PPC No No PPD No No PPE No No PPU No No SDC Yes No SPD Yes No SPE Yes No UNL Yes No UNT Yes No Listen Addresses Yes No Talk Addresses Yes No HFS 9000 User Manual C 1 Appendix C Interface Specifications Character Set ASCII Chart Table C 2 shows the character set used for all messages to and from the HFS 9000 This is identical to standard ASCII Table C22 The ASCII Character Set N m o gt lt x oj O o N 4 EOT DC4 5 ENQ NAK 6 ACK SYN UJ m rm m UJ 8 BS CAN 9 LF SUB C FF FS D CR GS E 50 F SI US 2 w wo a a a c 66 UJ 67 lt e o x G W c A N 75 23 L 76 92 24 77 93 25 N J 78 94 10 26 0 rubout 79 95 1 27 HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix C Interface Specifications Reserved Words ABUR ABURS ABURST ALI ALIA ALIAS ALL AMPL AMPLI AMPLIT AMPLITU AMPLITUD AMPLITUDE AUTO BAUD BURS BURST CAL CAT CATA CATAL CATALO CATALOG CDEL CDELA CDELAY CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CID COAR COARS COARSE COMP COMPL COMPLE COMPLEM COMPLEME COMPLEMEN COMPLEMENT CONS CONST CONSTA CONSTAN CONSTANT COUN COUNT COUT COUTP COUTPU COUTPUT DCHANNEL DCYC DCYCL DCYCLE DEF DEFI DEF
89. s settings except for configuration information for the RS 232 C port or calibra tion values You can use this string to return the HFS 9000 to the state it was in when you made the LRN query HEADER VERBOSE LRN CRD Sending the LRN query is the equivalent of sending the FPAN TBAS and VECTOR queries and PGEN lt x gt for each pulse generator card present NOTE The LRN query always returns a string with command headers regardless of the setting of the HEADER command This is because the returned string is intended to be able to be sent back to the HFS 9000 as a command string The VERBOSE command can still be used to specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated or full length LRN might return the string FPAN DMEN Main Menu DIT Pulse Menu DCH Al DSET 1 KRES COAR TBAS MODE AUTO PVI PER PER 5 0E 09 COUN 64 TIN INP 1 SL OP POS LEV 1 3E 00 TBAS PLIN INP 0 TBAS TOUT PER 1 PRET 7 0E 08 1 NORM LHOL LDEL THOL WIDT LVI HIGH HLIM 0 0E 00 HIGH 8 0E 01 LLIM 2 0E 00 LOW 1 8E 00 LDEL 0 0 00 TRAN 2 0E 10 WIDT 2 5E 09 COUT 0 0 00 O TINP 0 POL NOR M CDEL 0 0E 00 PGENA CH2 PRAT NORM LHOL LDEL THOL WIDT HFS 9000 User Manual Commands OPC Related Commands Syntax OPT Query Only HFS 9000 User Manual LVI HIGH HLIM 0 0E 00 HIGH 8 0E 01 LLIM 2 0E 00 LOW 1 8 0 0 LDEL 0 0E 00 TRAN 2 0E 10 WIDT 2 5E 09 COUT O LIM 0 0UTP 0
90. suite of self test diagnostic routines These routines are run each time you power on the HFS 9000 They can also be run any time you wish by selecting the Cal Deskew menu Self Test item see Figure 2 40 Cal Deskew Menu press SELECT to run instrument self tests View ConfigNErS tM Ein Calibrate Pretrigger Channel Chan Delay rons Al os Figure 2 40 The Cal Deskew Menu Self test indicates the circuits being tested as the tests are performed If the tests pass successfully the HFS 9000 continues what it was doing at the time the self tests were run the power up completes or the Cal Deskew menu is displayed ready for the next selection If the self test fails at any test the HFS 9000 halts with an error indication on the display that identifies which test has failed The display also presents you with two choices Press any button other than the SELECT button to show a terse description of the failure This additional information may be of assistance to repair personnel W Press the SELECT button to continue with the next diagnostic test If you display the terse description you must then press the SELECT button to continue with the next diagnostic test Self test failure does not prevent you from continuing to use the HFS 9000 However you should not assume the HFS 9000 meets specifications or is fully operational unless it passes the self test successfully 2 59 Self Test 2 60 HFS 9000 User Manual
91. the front panel Levels menu Related Commands PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt AMPLitude PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HIGH PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LOW PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OFFSet Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HLIMit MIN MAX lt NRf gt PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HLIMit lt space gt GI S OC EOD Arguments MIN sets the high limit to LLIMit minimum AMPLitude MAX sets the high limit to the maximum 3 70 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Examples lt NRf gt sets the high limit to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the high limit to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning PGENB CH2 HLIM 3 5V sets the high limit of channel B2 to 3 5 V PGENA CH2 HLIM MAX sets the high limit of channel A2 to the maximum level PGENA CH1 HLIM returns the high limit of channel A1 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LDELay Related Commands Syntax Arguments HES 9000 User Manual PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LDELay Leading Delay sets and queries the leading delay of the selected channel This performs the same function as the Lead Delay item in the Pulse menu PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DCYCle PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LHOLd PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt WIDTh TBAS PERiod PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LDELay MIN MAX lt NRf gt PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LD
92. the limits specified in the middle and right columns You may need to adjust the DSO horizontal position to keep the rising edge on the screen Table F 25 Lead Delay Limits for HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9PG2 HFS 9000 Pulse Menu DSO CROSS DSO CROSS Lead Delay Setting Measurement Minimum Measurement Maximum 100 ps 201 ps 401 ps 500 ps 195 ps 805 ps lns 690 ps 1 31 ns 5 ns 4 65 ns 5 35 ns 10ns 9 60 ns 10 4 ns 50 ns 49 2 ns 50 8 ns 100 ns 98 7 ns 101 3 ns F 28 HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification HFS 9000 User Manual Table F 26 Lead Delay Limits for HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 HFS 9000 Pulse Menu DSO CROSS DSO CROSS Lead Delay Setting Measurement Minimum Measurement Maximum 100 ps 49 ps 151 ps 500 ps 445 ps 555 ps lns 940 ps 1 060 ns 5 ns 4 9 ns 5 1 ns 10ns 9 85 ns 10 15 ns 50 ns 49 45 ns 50 55 ns 100 ns 98 95 ns 101 05 ns 11 Set the DSO horizontal position to minimum Turn the DSO COMPARE off 12 On the HFS 9000 use the SELECT button to change the Pulse menu Duty Cycle item to a Width item Set the Lead Delay item to zero 13 Skip this step if the channel is a Variable Rate HFS 9PG2 or HFS 9DG2 channel Refer to Table F 27 or Table F 28 Adjust the DSO horizontal position to display the first rising edge at screen While observing the width measurement readout on the DSO adjust the HFS 9000 Pulse Width item with the knob in Fine mode until each reading in the le
93. the HFS 9000 that is useful when debugging sequences of remote programming commands In this mode a displayed window shows each command as it is being executed and shows several control settings Device Command A command that is unique to the HFS 9000 See also Common Command Device Under Test DUT The device that the HFS 9000 is sending pulses to Delay When using the RS 232 C interface the amount of time that the HFS 9000 waits after receiving a query command before sending the response Contrast with Lead Delay Trail Delay and Chan Delay Deskew An adjustment of the timing of an event to compensate for delays in other equipment or for cabling propagation delays See Chan Delay Deskew and Pretrigger HFS 9000 User Manual Glossary HFS 9000 User Manual DTE Data Terminal Equipment A polarity standard for RS 232 C interfaces Equipment with DTE ports connect directly to equipment with DCE Data Communication Equipment ports Special cabling or connectors are required to connect two DTE ports Duty Cycle The percentage of pulse window time that a pulse generator outputs a logical high state See also Lead Delay Phase Trail Delay and Width Echo An RS 232 C mode where the HFS 9000 sends back to the computer or terminal a copy of every data character received EOI End or Identify A signal line of the GPIB used to indicate the end of message for talker devices EOL End of Line The sequence of character
94. the TRIGGER OUT connector The HFS 9000 then prompts you to connect each channel OUTPUT connector in turn The HFS 9000 performs the calibration automatically during the time that each channel is connected The time for the calibration procedure varies by configuration A 20 inch 50 coaxial SMA cable Tektronix part number 174 1427 00 is supplied with the HFS 9000 as a standard accessory This cable is suitable for use during calibration HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification Check Procedures Instrument Setup Output Level Checks HFS 9DG1 Card Only HFS 9000 User Manual Once you have run the self test procedure and if necessary calibrated the HFS 9000 these check procedures will verify that the instrument performs as specified Select MAIN MENU and reset the HFS 9000 using the Reset item in the Save Recall menu After this reset the parameters listed below are properly set for all tests and need not be modified again However each check specifies a reset as a first step to ensure the following settings m Cal Deskew menu Pretrigger item 70 ns m Cal Deskew menu Channel Delay item 0 s all channels m Time Base menu Mode item Auto W Levels menu Limit item Off Pulse menu Signal Type item Pulse NOTE Allow the HFS 9000 to warm up for a minimum of 20 minutes The instrument must warm up in an ambient temperature within 5 C of the ambient temperature when last calibrated
95. to Dest items in the front panel Data Copy menu This command performs the same function as the Dest Chan item in the front panel Data Copy menu FPAN DNSignal pin FPAN DNSignal pin specifies the signal to which blocks of data are copied or with which they are swapped FPAN DNSIGNAL WE sets the destination signal to WE FPAN DNSignal returns the destination signal FPAN DNSTart Destination Start Address specifies the destination start address parameter of the Swap Block with Dest and Copy Block to Dest items in the front panel Data Copy menu This command performs the same function as the Dest Start item in the front panel Data Copy menu FPAN DNSTart address FPAN DNSTart HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Arguments Examples address specifies the start address to which blocks of data copied or with which they are swapped FPAN DNSTART 0 sets the destination start address to O FPAN DNSTart returns the destination start address FPAN DSETting Displayed Setting Syntax Arguments Examples FPAN DSIGnal HFS 9000 User Manual FPAN DSETting displays a selected save recall setting number or queries the displayed save recall setting number This performs the same functions as the Setting item in the front panel Save Recall menu FPAN DSETting lt NRf gt FPAN DSETting CERO DSETting lt NRf gt is an integer in the range from 1 to 30
96. to IEEE STD 488 You can stack GPIB connectors as shown in Figure 3 2 HFS 9000 User Manual 3 1 Setting Up the Instrument RA O O oo 2076 30 237167 2 C 2uC C C5 GPIB Connector GPIB Connector Fes pep Bama Figure 3 1 GPIB Connector Location 3 2 HFS 9000 User Manual Setting Up the Instrument Pd Figure 3 2 How to Stack GPIB Connectors GPIB Requirements Observe these rules when you use your HFS 9000 with a GPIB network Each device on the bus must be assigned a unique device address two devices can share the same device address m Do not connect more than 15 devices to any one bus m Connect one device for every 6 feet 2 meters of cable used HFS 9000 User Manual 3 3 Setting Up the Instrument 3 4 Setting the GPIB Parameters m Do not use more than 65 feet 20 meters of cable to connect devices to a bus At least two thirds of the devices the network must be turned on while the network is operating m Connect the devices on the network in a star or linear configuration as shown in Figure 3 3 Do not u
97. to turn the knob default value 1 Use negative values to turn the knob counter clockwise and positive values to turn the knob clockwise Table 3 9 FPAN KEY Front Panel Key Equivalents Second lt QString gt Front Panel Entity 0 through 9 Digit buttons 0 through 9 m or A m milli x 10 3 button or hexadecimal A G or B G giga x 109 button or hexadecimal y or C micro x 1079 button or hexadecimal C M or D M mega x 106 button or hexadecimal D n or n nano x 10 9 button or hexadecimal E K or k kilo x 102 button or hexadecimal F X or p p pico x 10712 button or logic don t care X button ee Decimal point button mn Change sign button Backspace BACKSPACE button Enter ENTER button Main Menu MAIN MENU button Select SELECT button Up Up arrow button Down Down arrow button Left Left arrow button Right Right arrow button Next Channel NEXT CHANNEL button HES 9000 User Manual Commands Examples Table 3 9 FPAN KEY Front Panel Key Equivalents Cont Second lt QString gt Front Panel Entity Prev Channel PREVIOUS CHANNEL button Undo UNDO button Manual Trigger MANUAL TRIGGER button Srq SRQ button Fine FINE button Knob The knob direction of turn and number of clicks determined by NRf argument Output On Turn on specified channel equivalent to the OUTPUT button when the channe
98. trigger event is detected Trigger events can be a signal at the TRIGGER IN connector a press of the MANUAL TRIGGER button execution of a remote TRG command or execution of a Group Execute Trigger HFS 9000 User Manual Glossary 1 Glossary Glossary 2 Calibration The act of adjusting the internal adjustments of the HFS 9000 to internal timing and voltage standards The HFS 9000 provides automation assistance for calibration Channel A pulse generator Each channel has two outputs which are true logical complements of each other Chan Delay A deskew applied to a channel to synchronize the timing of pulses relative to other channels and to the trigger When synchronized the time zero references for all channels occur simultaneously at the device under test DUT Command A directive sent to the HFS 9000 through a programming interface either GPIB or RS 232 C Commands are of two types set commands and query commands Set commands to direct the HFS9000 to perform some action Query commands initiate a response message from the HFS 9000 Common Command A command that is common to all GPIB devices as specified in IEEE Std 488 2 1987 See also Device Command DCE Data Communication Equipment A polarity standard for RS 232 C interfaces Equipment with DCE ports connect directly to equipment with DTE Data Terminal Equipment ports Special cabling or connectors are required to connect two DCE ports Debug Mode A mode of
99. when the knob is turned 0 0 a These represent the data stream for each Signal Each number can represent one two or four bits of data depending on the Data Radix 000012 000913 QC X XD XD XD ID ID OS O8 08 68 End Vector Indicator Figure 2 17 The Data Edit Menu HFS 9000 User Manual Data Time Generators Vector Parameters HFS 9000 User Manual To edit the contents of a vector move the cursor using the knob or the arrow keys When the appropriate datum is highlighted type the change using the keypad When you type the change the highlighted datum is changed and the cursor moves to the next datum Note that the number of bits each datum represents depends on the Data Radix setting There are several parameters related to vectors these parameters are accessed from the Vector menu From the Vector menu you can set the Start Loop and End addresses The vector radix data radix and time base mode are also set in this menu see Figure 2 18 Vector Menu press SELECT to the next channel Radix iata 1 Decimal Hex Channel Figure 2 18 The Vector Menu To set vector parameters select the channel whose parameters you wish to set using the Channel menu item Next select the parameter you wish to set and use the knob or numeric keypad as appropriate to change the value m Start sets the vector of the first data bit output Loop sets the start vector of all cycle
100. which item is highlighted each arrow button moves the highlighting to the next item in the direction indicated O em SELECT and Arrow Buttons Figure 1 3 The SELECT and Arrow Buttons Getting Started The Main menu gives you access to the twelve second level menus The Pulse menu controls the pulse generator parameters such as pulse timing and voltage levels The Time Base menu controls timing and triggering of the HFS 9000 The Levels menu sets voltage levels and limits for the pulse generators The Signal menu controls channel display order signal types signal names and channel view The Vector menu controls vector parameters The Data Edit menu lets you edit the data streams produced by data time generators The Data Fill menu lets you fill data time generator channel memory The Data Copy menu lets you copy blocks of data between data time generator channels The Save Recall menu lets you save and recall Stimulus System settings This menu also has the reset control The GPIB menu controls the GPIB parameters for remote programming The RS 232 menu controls the serial port parameters for remote programming The Cal Deskew menu provides calibration self test instrument identification and pulse channel deskew functions The goal of this first part is to reset the HFS 9000 Since the reset control is in the Save Recall menu you need to display this menu next
101. width 100 channel period where channel period is TBAS PERiod if PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PRATe is either NORMal or OFF and channel period is 2 if PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PRATe is HALF Minimum recovery width is 800 ps for both High Speed and Var Rate cards lt NRf gt sets the duty cycle to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the duty cycle to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning TDELay and WIDTh are coupled with DCYCle as follows m TDELay DCYCle TBAS PERiod 100 LDELay m WIDTh DCYCle TBAS PERiod 100 Examples PGENA CH2 DCYC 50 sets the duty cycle of channel A2 to 50 PGENB CH1 DCYC returns the duty cycle of channel PGEN x CH n DRADix PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DRADix Data Radix controls how data is displayed on the front panel This command performs the same function as the Data Radix item in the front panel Data Fill menu Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DRADix OCT DEC HEX 3 68 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Arguments signal identifies the signal whose data radix is to be set or queried OCT specifies an octal data radix DEC specifies a decimal data radix HEX specifies a hexadecimal data radix Examples PGENA CH1 DRADIX HEX sets the data radix for Channel A1 to hexadecimal PGENA CH1 DRADIX returns the data radix for Channel A2 PGEN x CH n HIGH PGEN lt x gt CH
102. window does not necessarily coincide with the leading edge of any generated pulse The Pulse menu lets you specify the timing of each pulse leading edge relative to the beginning of the pulse window HFS 9000 User Manual _ Setting Up the Instrument This section tells you how to prepare the HFS 9000 Stimulus System for use with a remote controller terminal or computer The first part of this section explains how to connect the HFS 9000 to a controller terminal or computer through the GPIB or SERIAL PORT RS 232 C interface The rest of the section describes how to use the HFS 9000 front panel settings to enable the HFS 9000 to send and receive messages to and from a remote controller Controllers You can control the HFS 9000 with a remote controller or computer that uses the IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 GPIB interface Alternately you can control the HFS 9000 with a remote terminal or computer that uses the EIA Standard RS 232 C interface If you will be using the serial port RS 232 C interface refer to RS 232 C page 2 53 If you will be controlling your HFS 9000 through the GPIB interface read the following section Using the GPIB Interface Connect your HFS 9000 to the GPIB using an IEEE STD 488 GPIB cable available as Tektronix part number 012 0991 00 The HFS 9000 has a 24 pin GPIB connector on its front panel see Figure 3 1 This connector has a D type shell and conforms
103. 0 CLS 110 PRINT HFS 90x0 Precision Pulse Generator 120 PRINT Example 2 Command Query Usage With Error Handling 130 PRINT GPIB Version 140 PRINT 150 REM 160 REM decl bas 170 REM 180 REM GURU initialization code declarations 190 REM 200 CLEAR 58900 BASICA Declarations BYTES FREE size bib m 210 IBINIT1 58900 smaller than calculated is OK in lines 1 amp 2 220 IBINIT2 IBINIT1 3 Lines 1 thru 6 MUST be included in your program 230 BLOAD bib m IBINITI 240 CALL IBINIT1 IBFIND IBTRG IBCLR IBPCT IBSIC IBLOC IBPPC IBBNA IBONL IBRSC IBSRE IBRSV IBPAD IBSAD IBIST IBDMA IBEOS IBTMO IBEOT IBRDF IBURTF IBTRAP 250 CALL IBINIT2 IBGTS IBCAC IBWAIT IBPOKE IBWRT IBWRTA IBCMD IBCMDA IBRD IBRDA IBSTOP IBRPP IBRSP IBDIAG IBXTRC IBRDI IBWRTI IBRDIA IBWRTIA IBSTA IBERR IBCNT 270 BDNAME GPIBO 280 CALL IBFIND BDNAME BRDO 290 IF BRDO lt 0 THEN PRINT IBFIND ERROR END 300 BDNAME TEKDEV1 310 CALL IBFIND BDNAME TEKDEV1 320 IF TEKDEV1 lt 0 THEN PRINT IBFIND ERROR END 330 REM 340 REM Initialize reset the pulse generator and enable error generation 350 REM 360 WRT rst header on verbose 370 CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT 380 WRT c1s dese 255 ese 255 sre 32 390 CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT 400 REM 410 REM Prompt user for a command or query 420 REM 430 PRINT 440 INPUT Command query C 445 IF C
104. 0 LDEL 0 0 00 TRAN 2 0E 10 WIDT 2 5E 09 COUT 0 LIM 0 00 O TINP 0 POL NORM CDEL 0 0E 00 PGENA CH2 PRATNORM LHOL LDEL THOL WIDT LVI HIGH HLIM 0 0E 00 HIGH 8 0E 01 LLIM 2 0 00 LOW 1 8E 00 LDEL 0 0 00 TRAN 2 0E 10 WIDT 2 5E 09 COUT 0 LI M 0 0UTP 0 TINP 0 POL NORM CDEL 0 0 00 The PGEN lt x gt Pulse Generator command sets and queries the parameters of a selected pulse channel PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt returns all parameters for the selected channel n is 1 or 2 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt CE OCOD PGENA CH1 returns all parameters for channel Al For example it might return PGENA CH1 PRAT NORM LHOL LDEL THOL WIDT LVI HIGH HLIM 0 0E 00 HIGH 8 0E 01 LLIM 2 0E 00 LOW 1 8 00 LDEL 0 0E 00 TRAN 2 0E 10 WIDT 2 5E 09 COUT O LIM 0 0UTP 0 TINP 0 POL NORM CDEL 0 0 00 PGEN x CH n AMPLitude Related Commands HFS 9000 User Manual PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt AMPLitude sets and queries the amplitude of a selected channel This performs the same function as the Amplitude item in the front panel Pulse menu or Levels menu PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HIGH PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LOW PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LVlew PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OFFSet 3 59 Commands Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt AMPLitude MIN MAX lt NRf gt PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt AMPLi tude MIN Ls MAX
105. 000 has no parallel poll capability It does not respond to the following interface messages PPC PPD PPE and PPU The HFS 9000 does not send out a status message when the ATN Attention and EOI End of Instruction lines are asserted simultaneously C 5 Appendix C Interface Specifications m DCL Device Clear When acting as a listener the HFS 9000 responds to the DCL Device Clear and SDC Selected Device Clear interface messages m DTI Device Trigger The HFS 9000 responds to the GET Group Execute Trigger interface message m CO0 Controller The HFS 9000 cannot control other devices m 2 Electrical The HFS 9000 uses tri state buffers to provide optimal high speed data transfer Wiring for Alternate RS 232 C Configurations Serial Port DB 9 Pin Assignments Standard Accessory Serial C 6 Cable The RS 232 C cable included with the HFS 9000 connects the HFS 9000 to a standard RS 232 C serial port with a DB 25 female connector configured as DCE Data Communications Equipment If your controller is configured differently you will need to obtain or build a different cable or adapter The information below will assist a qualified service person to identify or build the necessary custom cable The 9000 serial port is a 9 pin male connector with the following pin assignments listed in Table C 3 This port configuration is equivalent to the Compaq personal computer 9 pin serial port Table 3 Se
106. 0014 00 HFS 9003 Type 3AG Fuse 4 A 250 V fast blow Tektronix part number 159 0017 00 HFS 9009 Type 3AG Fuse 15 A 250 V fast blow Tektronix part number 159 0256 00 Appendix Accessories Optional Accessories Power Cord Options A 2 Rackmount adapter kit Tektronix part number 020 1828 00 BitWriter programming tool and Windows interface for the HFS 9000 Data Time Generator BitWriter includes software and user manual and requires at least a 386 PC Windows 3 1 and GPIB card The HFS 9003 Module Service Manual Tektronix part number 070 8564 00 gives service information for maintenance and repair of the HFS 9003 to the replaceable module level OR The HFS 9009 Module Service Manual Tektronix part number 070 8366 01 gives service information for maintenance and repair of the HFS 9009 to the replaceable module level HFS 9003 Option A1 universal European 220 V 6 A 50 Hz Tektronix part number 161 0066 09 HFS 9003 Option A2 United Kingdom 240 V 6 A 50 Hz Tektronix part number 161 0066 10 HFS 9003 Option A3 Australian 240 V 6 A 50 Hz Tektronix part number 161 0066 11 HFS 9003 Option A4 North American 250 V 10 A 60 Hz Tektronix part number 161 0066 12 HFS 9003 Option A5 Switzerland 240 V 6 A 50 Hz Tektronix part number 161 0154 00 HFS 9009 Option A1 universal European 220 V 10 A 50 Hz Tektronix part number 161 0209 00 HFS 9009 Option A2 United Kingdom 240 V 10 A 50 H
107. 0E 9 sets the Trigger Out pretrigger to 50 ns TBAS TOUT PRET might return the value 29 9 showing that the Trigger Out pretrigger is set to 29 ns TRG No Query Form The TRG Trigger command executes a TBAS TIN TRIGger command The Group Execute Trigger GET interface message has the same effect as the TRG command 3 116 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Syntax X TRG TST Query Only The TST Self Test query runs the HFS 9000 internal self test and reports the results The self test does not require operator interaction and does not create bus conditions that violate IEEE 488 1 488 2 standards When complete the HFS 9000 returns to the state it was in just prior to the self test This performs the same function as the Self Test item in the front panel Cal Deskew menu The test response is a value lt NR1 gt as described in Table 3 10 Syntax TST Cost gt NOTE The TST query can take 30 seconds or more to respond Table 3 10 Results from TST lt NR1 gt Meaning 0 test completed with no errors detected SSCC system which slot and card produced the first detected error SS slotnumber 01 slot 02 time base slot 03 slotA 04 slot B card type 10 2 CPU card 20 time base card 31 HFS 9PG1 card 32 HFS 9PG2 card 33 HFS 9061 card 34 9062 card 9900 system configuration is not valid NOTE If an error is detected TST stops and returns an error c
108. 1 Nominal Traits B 1 Warranted Characteristics B 8 Typical Characteristics RII B 11 Appendix C Interface Specifications ee C 1 Interface Messages ceo SOUCI Eu wu T ES TER S C 1 Character Set ASCII Chart 2 0 0 0 0 0c ccc eee ee C2 Reserved Words oss p eg eL pL RR CR RO S COUR ob haa C 3 Using Debus Mode C 4 GPIB Function Subsets E eee 5 Wiring for Alternate RS 232 C Configurations C 6 Appendix D Error Messages D 1 Appendix E Packing for E 1 Appendix Performance Verification eee F 1 Required Test F 1 lest Record eoe b eeu eal as REA IA eS RE RAS F 2 Verification Sequence F 11 NIAI ais es nde nia we nda PEDE F 11 Calibration sss daa ela bad ea aah REA RAS ode ae waa REA 12 Check Procedures F 13 HFS 9000 User Manual Table of Contents Glossary Index HFS 9000 User Manual Instrument Setup Output Level Checks HFS 9DG1 Card Only Output Level Checks HFS 9DG2 and HFS 9PG2 Cards Only Output Level Checks HFS 9 Card Only Trigger Output Level sc
109. 15 in 629 mm 24 75 in 629 mm Depth behind rack flange 22 0 in 559 mm Cooling Method Construction Material Chassis parts are constructed of aluminum alloy bezel is glass filled polycarbonate with Lexan plastic inserts cabinet is aluminum with textured epoxy paint Forced air circulation with no air filter maximum 318 cfm Table B 15 Nominal Traits HFS 9009 Mechanical Name Description Weight in 36 channel configura Rackmount tion Shipping weight includes all Net weight 8115 33 7 kg standard accessories Shipping weight 10015 45 3 kg Overall Dimensions Rackmount Width 16 75 in 425 79 mm Height 14 00 in 355 89 mm Depth 24 00 in 610 11 mm Cooling Method mainframe Forced air circulation with air filter maximum 318 cfm Cooling Method power supply Forced air circulation maximum 106 cfm Construction Material Chassis parts are constructed of aluminum alloy with Lexan plastic inserts cabinet is aluminum with textured epoxy paint HFS 9000 User Manual B 7 Appendix B Specifications Warranted Characteristics Warranted characteristics are described in terms of quantifiable performance limits which are warranted Names of characteristics that appear in boldface type have checks for verifying the specifications in the Check Procedures section Table B 16 Warranted Characteristics HFS 9PG1 Output Performance Name Description High level accuracy amplitude 296 o
110. 2 4287 ________ 431 3 466 MHz 4613 foo fo 410 7 500 4950 ______ 505 0 533MHz 15217 ______ 538 3 566 5603 ______ 571 7 600MHz j5940 ______ 606 0 630 637 636 3 F 8 HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification Table F 6 Test Record for HFS 9PG2 Card Channel Page of Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH Date of Calibration Technician Performance Test Nominal Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum Output High Level 2 of level 50 mV Level 2 of High Level 2 of amplitude 50 mV Output Complement J 5V 5340 35 660 Channel Nomad 0V 02700 __________ 30 270 Normal 2V 200 _________ 1 910 Complement IV 1070 fo 0 930 Not Output Normal 40 35 660 Channel Complement OV 0270 10 270 Complement 2V 2090 1 910 Normal 1V 10 0 930 Rise Time Fall Time 10 of setting 300 ps for Amplitude 1 V Output Normal TV T 08ns 0420 Joo 1 180 Channel Complement 1V Tf 08ns 04220 1 180 Normal 1V Tr 5n 420 5 800 Complement 1V TT 5ns 4200 Joo Jo 5 800 Not Output Normal 1V Tf 0 805 0420 Jo 1 180 Channel Complement V Tr 08ns 0420 _________ 1 180 Norma
111. 20 HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification 12 Set the HFS 9000 according to Table F 18 Table F 18 HFS 9PG1 Output Level Checks Fourth Settings Control Setting Pulse menu High Level 10V Pulse menu Low Level 2 0V The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 2 090 V and 1 910 V 13 Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Normal The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 1 07 V and 0 93 V 14 Repeat steps 1 through 13 for each of the HFS 9PGI channels in the system 15 Disconnect test setup Trigger Output Level This check verifies the level of the HFS 9000 trigger output Equipment Required One Tektronix 11801B Digital Sampling Oscilloscope or CSA803A Communication Signal Analyzer item 5 with sampling head item 6 Two SMA coaxial cables item 8 1 Connect an SMA cable from the HFS 9000 TRIGGER OUTPUT to the Channel 1 input of the DSO sampling head 2 Connect an SMA cable from the DSO trigger input to the HFS 9000 Channel 1 output 3 Resetthe HFS 9000 4 Initialize the DSO and select the Channel 1 sampling head input HFS 9000 User Manual 21 Appendix Performance Verification 5 Press AUTOSET and set the HFS 9000 and DSO according to Table F 19 Table F 19 Settings for Trigger Output Check Control Setting HFS 9000 Pulse menu Period Press SELECT to change the Period item to a Frequency item Pu
112. 209 sets the DESER to binary 11010001 which enables the PON URQ EXE and OPC bits HFS 9000 User Manual Commands ESE Related Commands Syntax Arguments Examples HFS 9000 User Manual DESE might return the string DESE 186 showing that the DESER contains the binary value 10111010 The ESE Event Status Enable command sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register ESER The ESER prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte Register SBR For a complete discussion of the use of these registers see page 3 129 CLS DESE ESR EVENT EVMSG SRE STB ESE lt NRf gt ESE mn n lt NRf gt is a value in the range from 0 through 255 The binary bits of the ESER are set according to this value The power on default for ESER is 0 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the ESER maintains its value through a power cycle NOTE Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same value allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Use the DESE command to set the DESER A complete discussion of event handling is on page 3 129 ESE 209 sets the ESER to binary 11010001 which enables the PON URQ EXE and OPC bits ESE might return the string ESE 186 showing that the ESER contains the binary value 10111010 3 33 Commands ESR Query Only The ESR Event Status Register query returns the
113. 55 3 5 Period 1 7 2 40 2 47 2 62 Lead Delay 2 26 2 47 Phase 2 48 PhaseLockIn 2 40 2 43 2 64 2 68 Polarity 2 46 Pretrigger 2 25 2 65 2 68 Pulse Rate 2 49 Purge 2 58 Recall 2 57 Reset 2 51 Save 2 58 Self Test 2 59 Setting 2 57 Stop Bits 2 55 3 5 Trail Delay 2 48 Transducer 2 49 Transition 2 48 Trig Level 2 64 2 68 Trig Slope 2 64 2 68 Trigger In 2 41 2 64 2 67 View Config 2 43 Width 2 48 Menu map 2 5 2 6 Message Command 3 10 Command terminator 3 13 Dialog 1 5 Table of program messages 3 135 Method menu item 2 21 2 22 Mnemonic Command 3 10 Mode menu item 1 6 2 61 2 68 Mode menu item 2 20 Move Up Order menu item 2 17 Naming channels 2 14 2 24 HFS 9000 User Manual Index Navigation Menu 2 4 NEXT CHANNEL button 2 2 2 3 2 11 2 25 2 36 2 46 Nominal specifications B 1 Numeric Command argument 3 16 Keypad 1 8 2 2 2 3 O Offset menu item 2 36 2 46 Offset view 2 36 2 46 3 75 On Bus menu item 2 33 3 4 ON STANDBY button 2 2 2 3 OPC command 3 57 Operation complete command 3 57 Operation complete wait 3 126 OPT query 3 57 Optional identification query 3 57 Out Period menu item 2 65 2 68 Output Amplitude 2 46 3 59 Channel delay 2 25 3 63 Duty cycle 2 48 3 67 Fall time 2 48 3 83 High 2 36 2 37 2 46 3 69 Lead delay 2 47
114. ATA 3 101 SIGNal DATA COPY 3 102 SIGNal DRADix 3 103 SIGNal TYPE 3 104 SRE 3 105 3 132 STB 3 105 3 130 Syntax BNF Backus Naur form 3 9 Table Common command 3 21 Device command 3 22 TBAS 3 106 TBAS COUNt 3 106 TBAS FREQuency 3 107 TBAS MODE 3 108 TBAS PERiod 3 109 HFS 9000 User Manual TBAS PLIN 3 110 TBAS PLIN INPut 3 110 TBAS PVIew 3 109 TBAS RUN 3 111 TBAS TIN 3 112 TBAS TIN INPut 3 112 TBAS TIN LEVel 3 113 TBAS TIN SLOPe 3 113 TBAS TIN TRIGger 3 114 TBAS TOUT 3 115 TBAS TOUT PERiod 3 115 TBAS TOUT PRETrigger 3 116 TRG 3 116 TST 3 117 VECTor 3 118 VECTor BDATA 3 118 VECTor BIOFormat 3 121 VECTor DATA 3 121 VECTor END 3 123 VECTor IOFormat 3 124 VECTor LOOP 3 125 VECTor STARt 3 125 VERBOSE 3 126 WAI 3 126 Command syntax BNF Backus Naur form 3 9 Common command List 3 21 Concatenating Command 3 12 Configuration 2 43 Command query 3 55 Conflicts 3 134 Connector FRAME SYNC IN 2 2 2 3 2 39 2 64 2 67 2 68 GPIB 2 29 3 1 OUTPUT 1 11 2 2 23 2 7 2 10 PHASE LOCK IN 2 2 2 3 2 39 2 43 2 64 2 68 SERIAL PORT 2 53 SKEW CAL IN 2 2 2 3 2 7 TRANSDUCER 2 2 2 3 TRANSDUCER IN 2 10 2 49 TRIGGER IN 2 2 2 3 2 25 2 62 2 64 2 67 TRIGGER OUT 1 11 2 2 2 3 2 7 2 27 2 65 2 68 Constant menu item 2 21 2 22 Controller GPIB 3 1 Copy Channel menu item 2 50 Count Down 2 22 Count menu item 1 6 1 7 2 49
115. ATALOG ALIAS DEFINE ALIAS DELETE ALL Full Command Name Alias Catalog Alias Define Delete All Aliases ALIAS DELETE NAME ALIAS STATE CAL 3 22 Delete Named Alias Turn the alias state on and off Card ID HFS 9000 User Manual Commands HFS 9000 User Manual Table 3 5 HFS 9000 Device Commands and Parameters Cont Header CAL CONStant Full Command Name Calibration Constant FPAN ADVance Front Panel Auto Advance Direction HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 cards only FPAN BEND FPAN BHOLd FPAN BSIZe FrontPanel Block End Address HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only a Front Panel Block Hold HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only B a Front Panel Block Size HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 cards only FPAN BSTart Front Panel Block Start Address HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only FPAN CONStant FPAN COPies FPAN CORDer Front Panel Constant Value HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only FrontPanel Copies Value HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only FrontPanel Channel Display Order FPAN DCHannel FrontPanel Displayed Channel FPAN DITem FPAN DMENu FPAN DNCHannel Front Panel Displayed Item Front Panel Displayed Menu Front Panel Destination Channel HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 cards only FPAN DNSignal FPAN DNSTart FPAN DSETting FPAN DSIGnal FrontPanel Destination Signal HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only Front Panel Destination Start Address HFS
116. ELay MIN I MAX ar ut space MIN sets the leading delay to the minimum MAX depends on the values of PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt THOLd and PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay If THOLd equals TDELay then MAX sets LDELay as follows m LDELay TDELay If THOLd does not equal TDELay then MAX sets LDELay as follows m LDELay channel period 3 71 Commands where channel period is TBAS PERiod if PGEN x CH n PRATe is either NORMal or OFF and channel period is 2 if PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PRATe is HALF lt NRf gt sets the leading delay to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the leading delay to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning PHASe is coupled with LDELay as follows m PHASe LDELay 100 TBAS PERiod Examples PGENA CH1 LDEL 115 sets the leading delay of channel A1 to 1 ns PGENA CH2 LDEL returns the leading delay of channel A2 PGEN x CH n LHOLd PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LHOLd Leading Hold sets the leading edge hold of the selected channel and sets the display view or queries the leading edge hold of the selected channel This performs the same function as Select from the Lead Delay or Phase items in the front panel Pulse menu Related Commands PGEN x CH n LDELay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PHASe Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LHOLd LDELay PHASe PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LHOLd eo lt sp
117. ESB Event Status Bit Shows that status is enabled and presentin the SESR 4 MAV Message Available Shows that output is available in the Output Queue 3 0 Notused The DESER ESER and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a Status Register the DESER also acts as a filter to the Event Queue and can prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it controls In order for an event to be reported to its bit in the Status Register the corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to one If the bit in the Enable Register is set to zero the event is not recorded The bits in the Enable Registers are set using various commands The Enable Registers and the commands used to set them are described in the following sections The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER The DESER see Figure 3 13 controls which types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event Queue The bits in the DESER correspond to those in the SESR as described earlier Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER Use the DESE query to read the DESER 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Figure 3 13 The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER The Event Status Enable Regist
118. Expression block unit syntax error 263 Expression block unit execution error 210 Macro error 271 Macro syntax error 272 Macro execution error 273 Illegal macro label 274 Macro parameter error 275 Oversized block in macro definition 276 Macro recursion error 277 Macro redefinition not allowed 278 Macro header not found Table 3 16 lists the device errors that can occur during operation of the HFS 9000 These errors may indicate that the HFS 9000 needs repair Table 3 16 Device Error Messages DDE Bit 3 Code Message 300 Internal error 310 System error 313 Calibration memory lost 314 Save recall memory lost 3 137 Status and Events Table 3 16 Device Error Messages DDE Bit 3 Cont Code Message 315 Configuration memory lost 350 Too many events does not set DDE bit Table 3 17 lists the system event messages These messages are generated whenever certain system conditions occur Table 3 17 System Event Messages QYE Bit 2 Code Message 401 Poweron PON Bit7 402 Operation complete OPC Bit 0 403 User request Bit6 410 Query INTERRUPTED 420 Query UNTERMINATED 430 Query DEADLOCKED 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response Table 3 18 lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of command execution These notify you that you may get unexpected results Table 3 18 Execution Warning Messages EXE Bit 4 Code Message 500 Exe
119. FPAN METHod CONSTANT FPAN KRESolution COARSE FPAN DCHannel 1 FPAN DSETting 1 FPAN MESSAGE ns FPAN VRADi x DEC HFS 9000 User Manual Commands HFS 9000 User Manual Sets the time base as shown in Table 3 7 Table 3 7 FACTORY Time Base Settings Time Base Parameter Setting TBAS MODE AUTO TBAS PERiod 5ns TBAS COUNt 64 TBAS PVIew PERIOD RUN ON TBAS TIN INPut ON TBAS TIN SLOPe POSITIVE TBAS TIN LEVel 1 3V TBAS PLIN INPut OFF TOUT PERiod 1 TBAS TOUT PRETrigger 70 ns W Sets each pulse generator channel as shown in Table 3 8 Table 3 8 FACTORY Pulse and Data Time Generator Settings Pulse Card Parameter Setting PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HIGH All Cards 800mV PGEN x CH n LOW All Cards 1 8V PGEN x lt gt HLIMi t All Cards oV PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LLIMit All Cards 2V PGEN x CH n LDELay All Cards 0s PGEN x CH n DCYCLE All Cards 50 PGEN x lt gt 9PG1 200ps TRANsition 9PG2 800ps 9DG1 200ps 9DG2 800ps PGEN x CH n OUTPut All Cards OFF PGEN x lt gt COUTput All Cards OFF PGEN x lt gt LIMit All Cards OFF PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PRATe All Cards NORMAL PGEN x CH n LHOLd All Cards LDELay 3 37 Commands FPAN Syntax Examples FPAN ADVance 3 38 Table 3 8 FACTORY Pulse and Data Time Generator Settings Cont Puls
120. FS 9DG1 HFS 9000 Pulse Menu DSO WIDTH DSO WIDTH Width Setting Measurement Minimum Measurement Maximum 5ns 4 875 ns 51ns 10 ns 9 825 ns 10 15 ns 50 ns 49 45 ns 50 55 ns 100 ns 98 95 ns 101 05 ns 500 ns 494 95 ns 505 05 ns 1 us 990 ns 1 01 us HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification Frequency Accuracy Check HFS 9000 User Manual Table F 31 Width Limits for HFS 9002 1 HFS 9000 Pulse Menu DSO WIDTH DSO WIDTH Width Setting Measurement Minimum Measurement Maximum 5ns 4 500 ns 5 1 ns 10 ns 9 450 ns 10 15 ns 50 ns 49 25 ns 50 55 ns 100 ns 98 75 ns 101 05 ns 500 ns 494 8 ns 505 1 ns 1 us 990 ns 1 01 us 15 Repeat steps 1 through 14 for each of the channels in the system For Not Output channels set Output off and Output on 16 Disconnect test setup Equipment Required One Tektronix 11801B Digital Sampling Oscilloscope or CSA803A Communication Signal Analyzer item 5 with sampling head item 6 One SMA coaxial cable item 8 One threaded SMA female to SMA male slip on connector item 11 1 Resetthe HFS 9000 then use the SELECT button to change the Pulse menu Period item to a Frequency item 2 Connect an SMA cable from the HFS 9000 TRIGGER OUT connector to the DIRECT connector located in the TRIGGER INPUTS section of the DSO Set the DSO to trigger on that signal 3 Connect an SMA cable from the normal OUTPUT connector of any High Speed HFS 9000
121. Figure 2 30 HFS 9000 User Manual 2 39 Phase Lock TRIGGER OUT TRIGGER IN FRAME SYNC IN PHASE LOCK IN SKEW CAL IN O00 0 5V MAX 12 MAX 500 2V MIN 500 2V MIN 500 TO 2V 500 TO 2V TIME BASE Figure 2 30 The Time Base Card Connectors 2 Use the PhaseLockIn item in the Time Base menu to set phase lock to On Figure 2 31 shows the Time Base menu with the detected phase lock frequency above the menu NOTE If the HFS 9000 cannot determine the phase lock frequency an error message is displayed This will happen if the phase lock signal is not stable and continuous or if the phase lock signal is outside the allowed frequency range or if the HFS 9000 needs calibrating FhazelockIn 250 000MHz Time Base Menu press SELECT off k n Frequency Count Out Period 64 1 Trig S5lope Trig Level Positive 1 3M Figure 2 31 The Time Base Menu with the PhaseLockln Menu Item Trigger In n NOTE If you need to change the frequency of the phase lock signal after phase lock mode is established turn phase lock mode off then establish the new stable frequency before turning on phase lock mode again Setting Period or Frequency During Phase Lock 2 40 When phase lock is first established the setting of the Period or Frequency menu items changes to reflect the period or frequency of the phase lock signal HFS 9000 User Manual Phase Lock You ca
122. Figure 2 6 Pulse Menu Showing Channel Selection Channels Selected Channe press SELECT to the next channel Channel High Level Low Level 500m 1 854 High Limit Low Limit View ou 24 Channel Figure 2 7 Levels Menu Showing Channel Selection Fulse Hex Ad Fulze Hex AS Fulse Hex nz Sed Hex Signal Menu press SELECT to the next channel Howe Signal Data Radix Fulse Hex Figure 2 8 Signal Menu Showing Channel Selection Channel B1 Signal Hame View Channel HES 9000 User Manual SS A u M1 Data Time Generators The HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 Data Time Generators combine the capabilities of a data time generator pulse generator and switch matrix in a single instru ment As part of the HFS 9000 Stimulus System the data time generator can deliver complete data and timing signals to the circuit under test Within the data time generator every output is capable of producing any type of data and formatting not just data and pulses Complete control over rise and fall times widths and voltage levels on all data is provided Because of their unique digital architecture the data time generators can place an edge anywhere even delaying waveforms across cycle boundaries Controls for the data time generators are accessed in several menus Controls that affect the pulse parameters of the data time generators
123. Fill Block with Method menu item 2 21 2 23 FINE button 1 7 2 2 2 3 FINE light 1 8 2 2 2 3 Flagging menu item 2 55 3 5 FPAN command FPAN 3 38 FPAN ADVance 3 38 FPAN BEND 3 39 FPAN BSIZe 3 40 FPAN BSTart 3 41 FPAN CONStant 3 41 FPAN COPies 3 42 FPAN CORDer 3 43 FPAN DCHannel 3 40 3 43 FPAN DITem 3 44 FPAN DMENu 3 45 FPAN DNCHannel 3 45 FPAN DNSignal 3 46 FPAN DNSTart 3 46 FPAN DSETting 3 47 FPAN DSIGnal 3 47 FPAN DVECtor 3 48 FPAN FSCale 3 49 FPAN KEY 3 49 FPAN KRESolution 3 51 FPAN MESSage 3 52 FPAN METHod 3 52 FPAN SORDer 3 53 FPAN VRADix 3 54 FRAME SYNC IN Connector 2 2 2 3 2 39 2 64 2 67 2 68 Impedance 2 41 Voltage 2 41 Frequency 1 8 2 47 2 62 3 107 3 109 HFS 9000 User Manual Index Phase lock 2 40 Frequency Accuracy Check 31 Frequency menu item 1 7 2 40 2 47 2 62 Front panel control from programming interface Auto Advance 3 38 Block End Size 3 39 Block size 3 40 Block start 3 41 Copies 3 42 Destination channel 3 45 Destination signal 3 46 Destination start address 3 46 Display channel 3 40 3 43 Display vector 3 8 Displayed item 3 44 Displayed menu 3 45 Displayed setting 3 47 Displayed signal 3 47 Fill method 3 52 Fill scale 3 49 Front panel channel order 3 43 Front panel constant 3 41 Key press 3 49 Knob resolution 3 51 Message 3 52 Query 3 38 Signal
124. H lt n gt WIDTh Pulse Generator Width 5232 BAUD RS 232 C Baud Rate RS232 DELay RS 232 C Delay RS232 ECHO RS 232 C Echo RS232 EO0L RS 232 C End Of Line RS232 FLAGging RS 232 C Flagging RS232 PARity RS 232 C Parity RS232 SBITs RS 232 C Stop Bits SIGnal parameter Signal Parameter SIGnal BDATA Signal Binary Data Input Out HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 cards only SIGnal BDATA FILL Signal Binary Data Fill HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only SIGnal CVIew Signal Channel View SIGnal DATA Signal Data Input O ut HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 cards only SIGnal DATA COPY Signal Data Copy HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 cards only 1 1 DATA SWAP Signal Data Swap HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 cards only SIGnal DRADix Signal Data Radix HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only SIGnal TYPE Signal Type TBAS COUNt Time Base Count TBAS FREQuency Time Base Frequency TBAS MODE Time Base Mode TBAS PERiod Time Base Period TBAS PLIN INPut Time Base Phase Lock In Input TBAS PVIew Time Base Period View TBAS RUN Time Base Trigger Run TIN INPut Time Base Trigger In Input TBAS TIN LEVel Time Base Trigger In Level 3 25 Commands Table 3 5 HFS 9000 Device Commands and Parameters Cont Header Full Command Name TBAS TIN SLOPe Time Base Trigger In Slope TBAS TIN TRIGger Time Base Trigger Generation TBAS TOUT PERiod Time Base Trigger Out Period TBAS TOUT PRETrigge
125. Hz for 10 seconds without breakdown 0 1 maximum from chassis ground and protective earth ground Table B 25 Warranted Characteristics Environmental and Safety Name Temperature HFS 9003 Description Operating 0 C to 50 C 32 F to 122 F Non operating storage 40 C to 475 C 40 F to 167 F HFS 9009 Description Operating 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F Non operating storage 40 C to 475 C 40 F to 167 F Altitude Humidity Shock non operating Operating 4 hours at 3 048 m 10 000 feet Derate maximum operating temperature by 1 C 1 8 for each 304 8 m 1 000 feet above 1 524 m 5 000 feet Non operating 2 hours at 12 192 m 40 000 feet Operating 95 RH non condensing from 0 C to 30 C 32 F to 86 75 RH non condensing from 31 C to 40 C 88 F to 104 F MIL T 28800E para 4 5 5 1 2 2 Type Class 5 MIL T 28800E para 4 5 5 4 1 Type Ill Class 5 Resistance to mishandling during bench use operating Resistance to packaged trans portation vibration sinusoidal in shipping package Resistance to packaged trans portation vibration sinusoidal in shipping package Resistance to packaged trans portation random vibration MIL T 28800E para 4 5 5 4 3 Type Class 5 Drops of 36 inches on all edges faces and corners National Safe Transit Association test procedure 1A B 2 Packaged sinusoidal vibratio
126. ILL SIGNal BDATA FILL Binary Data Fill provides a method of filling a signal with binary data Related Commands PGEN x CH n BDATA VECTor BIOFormat VECTor BDATA Syntax SIGNal BDATA FILL lt pin gt lt address gt lt count gt lt binary byte cupe OL Can gt L zbinary bytes Arguments pin identifies the signal to be filled with data HFS 9000 User Manual 3 99 Commands Examples SIGNal CVlew Related Commands Syntax Arguments 3 100 address sets the start address binary byte represents the data used to fill the channel count specifies the number of number of addresses to be filled If count is less than eight the rightmost count bits are used from the binary byte If count is greater than eight the binary byte is repeated the required number of time to satisfy count Note that the byte is read from right to left that is the least significant bit is read first SIGNAL BDATA FILL Addr0 0 1024 0 fills the first 1024 addresses of signal AddrO with all zeros SIGNAL BDATA FILL WE 0 1024 HFF fills the first 1024 addresses of signal WE with all ones SIGNAL BDATA FILL Data7 0 512 55 fills the first 512 addresses of signal Data7 with alternating ones and zeros that is 10101010101010 SIGNAL BDATA FILL Data7 0 512 fills the first 512 addresses of signal Data7 with alternating zeros and ones that
127. IN DEFINE DISPLAY DIT DITE DITEM DMEN DMENU DSET DSETT HFS 9000 User Manual DSETTI DSETTIN DSETTING ECHO EOL EVEN EVENT EVMSG FACTORY FINE FLAG FLAGG FLAGGI FLAGGIN FLAGGING FPAN FREQ FREQU FREQUE FREQUEN FREQUENC FREQUENCY HALF HARD HEADER HIGH HLIM HLIMI HLIMIT INP INPU INPUT KEY KRES KRESO KRESOL KRESOLU KRESOLUT KRESOLUT KRESOLUTIO KRESOLUTION LDEL LDELA LDELAY LEV LEVE LEVEL LF LFCR LHOL LHOLD LIM LIMI LIMIT LLIM LLIMI LLIMIT LOW LV LVIE LVIEW MAX MESS MESSA MESSAG MESSAGE MIN MODE NAME NEG NEGA NEGAT NEGAT NEGATIV NEGATIVE NONE NORM NORMA NORMAL ODD OFF OFFS OFFSE OFFSET ON ONE OUTP OUTPU OUTPUT PAR PARI PARIT PARITY PER PERI PERIO PERIOD PGENA PGENB PGENC PGEND PGENE PGENF PGENG PGENH PGENI PGENJ PGENK PHAS PHASE PLIN POL POLA POLAR POLARI POLARIT POLARITY POS POSI POSIT POSITI POSITIV POSITIVE PRAT PRATE PRET The following is a list of the reserved words of the HFS 9000 You cannot use these words as names of aliases PRETR PRETRI PRETRIG PRETRIGG PRETRIGGE PRETRIGGER PURGE PV PVIE PVIEW RS232 SBIT SBITS SLOP SLOPE SOFT TBAS TDEL TDELA TDELAY THOL THOLD TIN TINP TINPU TINPUT TOUT TRAN TRANS TRANSI TRANSIT TRANSITI TRANSITIO TRANSITION TRIG TRIGG TRIGGE TRIGGER VERBOSE WIDT WIDTH ZERO C 3 Appendix C Interface Specifications Using Debug Mode C44 You
128. IN and FRAME SYNC IN connectors For complete information about using phase lock see the Phase Lock section on page 2 39 When the HFS 9000 is in Burst or Trig Auto mode set using the Time Base menu Mode item you can use the MANUAL TRIGGER button to trigger the generation of pulse bursts If you have a trigger signal connected to the TRIGGER IN connector you do not have to disconnect it to use manual triggering Instead turn off the trigger in signal by setting the Time Base menu Trigger In item to off You can set the HFS 9000 to produce an external trigger signal at the TRIG GER OUT connector Use this output signal to trigger an external detection device such as an oscilloscope The Time Base menu Out Period menu item lets you specify which pulse window in the burst will generate the output trigger For example an out period setting of 16 will generate an output trigger at the beginning of the sixteenth pulse window Also the trigger out signal tracks the slowest channel If you engage the Half Quarter or Eighth Rate modes set with the Pulse Rate menu item be aware of the effect this will have on the trigger out signal Trigger Out timing is modified by the Cal Deskew menu Pretrigger item The default pretrigger setting of 70 ns means that the trigger out signal appears 70 ns before the beginning of the pulse window In auto mode the frequency of the trigger out tracks the slowest channel NOTE The beginning of the pulse
129. LAG SOFT ECHO 1 EOL CRLF DEL 0 000000E 00 3 98 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands RS232 BAUD Syntax Arguments Examples RS232 DELay HFS 9000 User Manual RS 232 BAUD sets and queries the RS 232 C transmit and receive baud rates This performs the same function as the Baud Rate item in the front panel RS 232 menu RS232 BAUD 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 RS232 BAUD space 110 sets the RS 232 C transmit and receive baud rates to 110 150 sets the baud rates to 150 etc NOTE Set the baud rate on the HFS 9000 before setting the baud rate on the controller RS232 BAUD 19200 sets the RS 232 C baud rate to 19 200 RS232 BAUD might return the value 4800 showing that the RS 232 C baud rate is set to 4800 RS232 DELay sets and queries the time that the HFS 9000 waits between receiving a query and sending the response This performs the same function as the Delay item in the front panel RS 232 menu 3 89 Commands Syntax Arguments Examples RS232 ECHO Syntax Arguments 3 90 RS232 DELay MIN MAX NRf RS232 DELay MIN B MAX e me space MIN sets the RS 232 C delay to O s MAX sets the RS 232 C delay to 60 s lt NRf gt is a value in the range from 0 to 60 in 50 ms increments lt NRf gt sets the RS 232 C delay to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the delay to the nearest legal v
130. LECT to view the configuration eee Self Test Calibrate Pretrigger Channel Chan Delay rons Al os Figure 2 33 The Cal Deskew Menu Instrument Configuration Firmware 2 0 vec po dodddddd CPU 035002 1 1 CPU Slot 0 TE 1 2 Time Base A niens 1 3 High Speed Pulse Figure 2 34 A Typical Configuration Display 2 43 Power On The configuration display shows the firmware version installed in the HFS 9000 and the cards that are installed Each card also shows the card ID in quotes You can change the card ID of any card through a programming interface by using the CAL CID command 2 44 HFS 9000 User Manual E Pulse Generators HFS 9000 User Manual Pulse generators are the circuitry that generates the pulse signals specified by the time base The HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9PG2 pulse generator cards each have two pulse generator channels The HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 data time generator cards in addition to their capabilities as data generators have similar pulse generator capabilities as the HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9PG2 cards respectively The HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 have four pulse generator channels Thus your HFS 9000 can have up to 36 pulse generator channels depending on the mainframe and number of cards installed The controls for the pulse parameters are in the Pulse Menu see Figure 2 35 The display above the Pulse Menu shows a representative timing diagram for each channel installed in the HFS 9000 As
131. NSI IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 section 7 2 This manual uses the following BNF symbols Table 3 1 BNF Symbols and Meanings Symbols Meaning lt gt Defined element Is Defined As Exclusive OR Group one elementis required L Optional Previous element s may be repeated Comment Clearing the HFS 9000 You can stop any query or process by using the Device Clear DCL GPIB command The HFS 9000 RS 232 C interface emulates the GPIB device clear function by responding to a break signal from your terminal s Break key This will also stop any query or process Command and Query Structure Commands consist of set commands and query commands usually called commands and queries Commands modify instrument settings or tell the HFS 9000 User Manual 3 9 Command Syntax HFS 9000 to take a specific action Queries cause the HFS 9000 to return information about its status Most commands have both a set and query forms The query form of the command is the same as the set form but with a question mark on the end For example the set command PGENA CH1 HIGH has a query form PGENA CH1 HIGH Not all commands have both a set and query form some commands are set only and some are query only A command message is a command or query name followed by any information the HFS 9000 needs to execute the command or query Command messages consist of three different element types defined in Table 3 2 and
132. OUNt 3 106 TBAS FREQuency 3 107 TBAS MODE 3 108 TBAS PERiod 3 109 TBAS PLIN 3 110 TBAS PLIN INPut 3 110 TBAS PVIew 3 109 TBAS RUN 3 111 TBAS TIN 3 112 TBAS TIN INPut 3 112 TBAS TIN LEVel 3 113 TBAS TIN SLOPe 3 113 TBAS TIN TRIGger 3 114 TBAS TOUT 3 115 TBAS TOUT PERiod 3 115 TBAS TOUT PRETrigger 3 116 Tek Std Codes and Formats 1989 3 21 Terminal RS 232 C 3 6 Terminator Command message 3 13 Time base 2 61 Count 1 6 1 7 2 49 2 62 3 106 Frequency 1 7 2 40 2 47 2 62 3 107 Frequency view 1 8 2 47 2 62 3 109 Manual trigger simulation 3 114 3 116 Mode 1 7 2 61 Auto 1 7 2 63 3 108 Auto burst 1 7 2 63 3 108 Burst 1 7 2 1 2 62 3 108 Trig Auto 1 7 Trig Auto 2 63 Period 1 7 2 40 2 47 2 62 3 109 Period view 1 8 2 47 2 62 3 109 Phase lock 2 39 2 43 2 64 2 68 3 110 Phase lock query 3 110 Pretrigger 2 27 2 65 2 68 3 116 Query 3 106 Run 3 111 Run Stop 2 63 Startup delay 2 62 Time zero reference 2 1 2 62 Trigger in 2 25 2 62 3 112 Trigger in query 3 112 Trigger level 2 64 2 68 3 113 Trigger out 2 27 2 65 2 68 Trigger out period 2 65 2 68 3 115 Trigger out query 3 115 Trigger slope 2 64 2 68 3 113 Time Base menu 1 4 2 40 2 61 2 67 Time zero reference 2 1 2 62 Timing Diagram 2 1 Trail Delay menu item 2 48 Index 10 Trail delay view 2 48 3 82 TRANSDUCER IN Connector 2 2 2
133. Once a Block is appropriately specified you either fill the block with data or clear the block of data A Block is filled using the Fill Block with Method menu item The three parameters for Fill Block with Method are Constant Method and Fill Scale Invert a block of Addr Data Fill Menu press SELECT to the next channel Channel Block Start Block End Constant Method Fill Scale Fill Block 1 Invert 1 with Method Radix Data Radix Decimal Hex Figure 2 19 The Data Fill Menu m Channel selects the Signal named channel or bus on which the Fill Block with Method and Clear Block commands operate m Block Start sets the vector where fill or clear operations begin Turn the knob or use the numeric keypad to change the Block Start vector m Block End sets the last vector in the Block Turn the knob or use the numeric keypad to change the Block End vector Pressing SELECT while Block End is highlighted changes the menu item to Block Size Block Size provides a second method of defining a block Block Size sets the size of the block regardless of the Block Start vector m Clear Block sets all the bits in the Block to zero Note that if View is set to channel only the selected channel is cleared If View is set to Group all channels in the specified bus are cleared Constant is a number used by the Method menu item Depending on the fill method selected the constant 15 the number used to fill a Block or a
134. PGEN lt x gt CH n DRADi x Pulse Generator Data Radix HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 cards only PGEN x CH n HIGH Pulse Generator Level High PGEN x CH n HLIMi t Pulse Generator High Limit PGEN x CH n LDELay Pulse Generator Leading Delay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LHOLd Pulse Generator Leading Hold PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LIMit Pulse Generator Limit State PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LLIMit Pulse Generator Low Limit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LOW Pulse Generator Level Low PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LVIew Pulse Generator Level View PGEN lt x gt lt gt OFFSet Pulse Generator Offset PGEN x CH n OUTPut Pulse Generator Output PGEN lt x gt lt gt PHASe Pulse Generator Phase PGEN x lt gt POLar ity Pulse Generator P olarity PGEN x lt gt PRATe Pulse Generator Pulse Rate PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt SIGNal Pulse Generator Signal Name PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay Pulse Generator Trailing Delay PGEN x CH n THOLd Pulse Generator Trailing Hold PGEN x lt gt TINPut Pulse Generator Transducer Input 3 24 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands HFS 9000 User Manual Table 3 5 HFS 9000 Device Commands and Parameters Cont Header PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TRANsition Full Command Name Pulse Generator Transition HFS 9PG2 and HFS 9DG2 cards only PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TYPE Pulse Generator Signal Type PGEN lt x gt C
135. RS 232 Menu HFS 9000 User Manual RB 232 Menu Baud Fate Flagging Saft Parity Stop Bits Hone 1 EOL Delay CR LF Os Figure 2 38 The RS 232 Menu NOTE The settings of the RS 232 C parameters are not changed when you reset or factory reset the HFS 9000 or when you recall settings m Baud Rate sets the speed of the RS 232 C interface see Figure 2 38 Use the knob or keypad to enter the desired baud rate Set this to the same setting as the terminal or computer you are using Parity sets an error checking communication parameter Use the SELECT button to set the desired parity You can set parity to even odd zero one or none Set parity to the same setting as the terminal or computer you are using m Stop Bits sets the number of synchronizing bits used for each transmitted data byte Use the SELECT button to set the desired value You can specify 1 1 5 or 2 stop bits Set the stop bits to the same setting as the terminal or computer you are using m Flagging is a semaphoring parameter Use the SELECT button to specify the desired setting You can set flagging to hard soft sometimes known as XOn XOff or none Set flagging to the same setting as the terminal or computer you are using Flagging is a method of preventing data overflow of buffers Shortly before it can handle no more data the receiving device flags the sending device to stop sending data until the flag is removed With hard fl
136. Rise Fall Time Checks F 24 Table F 22 Settings for Rise Time and Fall Time Checks 25 Table 23 DSO Settings for Rise Fall Time Checks 26 Table 24 Settings for Edge Placement Checks F 27 Table 25 Lead Delay Limits for HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9PG2 F 28 Table F 26 Lead Delay Limits for HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 F 29 Table F 27 Width Variance Limits for HFS 9PG1 F 29 Table F 28 Width Variance Limits for HFS 9DG1 F 30 Table F 29 Width Limits for HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9PG2 F 30 Table F 30 Width Limits for HFS 9DG1 F 30 Table F 31 Width Limits for HFS 9DG2 F 31 Table 32 Frequency Limits HFS 9PG1 amp HFS 9DG1 F 32 Table F 33 Frequency Limits HFS 9PG2 32 Table 34 Frequency Limits HFS 9G2 33 ix Table of Contents X HFS 9000 User Manual General Safety Summary Injury Precautions Use Proper Power Cord Avoid Electric Overload Ground the Product Do Not Operate Without Covers Use Proper Fuse Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures To avoid fire hazard u
137. S TOUT PERiod sets and queries the Trigger Out period This performs the same function as the Out Period item in the front panel Time Base menu TBAS TOUT PERiod MIN MAX lt NRf gt TBAS TOUT PERiod MIN es MAX es space CBSO CT OCR MIN sets the Trigger In level to 1 MAX sets the Trigger In level to the value of TBAS COUNt lt NRf gt outputs a Trigger Out signal on the specified pulse window in the burst TBAS TOUT PER 9 outputs Trigger Out on the ninth pulse window in the burst TBAS TOUT PER might return the value 3 showing that the Trigger Out signal is output on the third pulse window in the burst 3 115 Commands TBAS TOUT PRETrigger TBAS TOUT PRETrigger sets and queries the Trigger Out pretrigger time This performs the same function as the Pretrigger item in the front panel Cal Deskew menu Syntax TBAS TOUT PRETrigger MIN MAX lt NRf gt TBAS TOUT PRETrigger MIN I MAX ee space ToL OL CUT gt gt PRET Egger Arguments MIN sets the Trigger Out pretrigger to the minimum MAX sets the Trigger Out pretrigger to the maximum lt NRf gt sets the Trigger Out pretrigger to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the Trigger Out pretrigger to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning Examples TBAS TOUT PRET MIN sets the Trigger Out pretrigger to the minimum TBAS TOUT PRET 5
138. TINP 0 POL NORM CDEL 0 0E 00 PGENB CH1 PRAT NORM LHOL LDEL T HOL WIDT LVI HIGH HLIM 0 0E 00 HIGH 8 0E 01 LLIM 2 0E 00 LO 1 8E 00 DEL 0 0E 00 TRAN 2 0E 10 WIDT 2 5E 09 COUT 0 LIM 0 0UTP 0 TINP 0 POL NORM CDEL 0 0 00 2 NORM LH OL LDEL THOL WIDT LVI HIGH HLIM 0 0E 00 HIGH 8 0E 01 LLIM 2 0 00 LOW 1 8E 00 LDEL 0 0E 00 TRAN 2 0E 10 WIDT 2 5 09 0 UT 0 LIM 0 00 0 POL NORM CDEL 0 0E 00 PGENC CH1 PRA T NORM LHOL LDEL THOL WIDT LVI HIGH HLIM 0 0E 00 HIGH 8 0E 0 1 LLIM 2 0E 00 LOW 1 8E 00 LDEL 0 0E 00 TRAN 2 0E 10 WIDT 2 5E 09 COUT 0 LIM 0 0UTP 0O TINP 0 POL NORM CDEL 0 0E 00 PGEN C CH2 PRAT NORM LHOL LDEL THOL WIDT LVI HIGH HLIM 0 0E 00 HIG 8 0E 01 LLIM 2 0E 00 LOW 1 8E 00 LDEL 0 0E 00 TRAN 2 0E 10 WIDT 2 5E 09 COUT O LIM 0 0UTP O TINP 0 POL NORM CDEL O OE 00 The OPC Operation Complete command generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register SESR when all pending operations finish The OPC query places the ASCII character 1 into the Output Queue when all pending operations are finished The OPC response is not available to read until all pending operations finish For a complete discussion of the use of these registers and the output queue see page 3 129 WAI PC 0 9 The OPT Optional Identification query determines which cards are installed in the HFS 9000 Information for all 13 slots 1s returned th
139. TORY Front Panel Settings 3 36 Table 3 7 FACTORY Time Base Settings 3 37 Table 3 8 FACTORY Pulse and Data Time Generator Settings 3 37 Table 3 9 FPAN KEY Front Panel Key Equivalents 3 50 Table 3 10 Results from TST 3 117 Table 3 11 SESR Bit Functions 3 130 Table 3 12 SBR Bit Functions 3 131 Table 3 13 No Event Messages 3 135 Table 3 14 Command Error Messages CME Bit 5 3 135 Table 3 15 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 3 137 Table 3 16 Device Error Messages DDE 3 137 Table 3 17 System Event Messages QYE Bit2 3 138 Table 3 18 Execution Warning Messages EXE Bit4 3 138 Table B 1 Nominal Traits HFS 9PG1 Output Performance B 1 Table B 2 Nominal Traits HFS 9PG2 Output Performance B 2 Table 3 Nominal Traits HFS 9DG1 Output Performance B 3 Table B 4 Nominal Traits HFS 9DG2 Output Performance B 3 Table 5 Nominal Traits Time Base B 4 Table B 6 Nominal Traits Performance to External Frequency Reference 2 B 4 Table 7 Nominal Traits Output Edge Placement Performance B 5 Table 8 Nominal Traits Transducer In Performance B 5 Table B 9 Nominal Traits
140. Table F 4 Test Record for HFS 9DG2 Card Channel Page of Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH Date of Calibration Technician Performance Test Nominal Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum Output High Level 296 of level 50 mV Level 2 of High Level 2 of amplitude 50 mV Output Complement J 5V 45340 Jo 35 660 Channel Normal 00V 0270 30 270 Nomad 20V J 20090 1 910 Complement J 10V 1070 Jo 0 930 Rise Time Fall Time 10 of setting 300 ps for Amplitude x 1 V Output Normal 1V Tr 08n RO 1 180 Channel Complement 1V Tf 08ns 0420 gri o 1 180 Noma 1V Tr 5ns 420 ________ _____ 5 800 Complement 1V TT 5ns 4200 5 800 Edge Placement Pulse Delay Time 1 of Lead Delay Chan Delay 50 ps Output Normal 100p 49 ________ 151 Chanel b50ps 4M5 555 LLL 1 060 5 100 10 150 acm 50 55 Hed 101 05 Edge Placement Pulse Width Limits 1 50 ps 450 ps for widths lt 20 ns 1 50 ps 250 ps for widths 20 ns Output 5 450 5 100 Chanel 8450 l ________ 10 150 50 55 101 05 505 1 PAM 1 010 Frequency Accuracy 1 Output 50 kHz 4950 ________ 50 50 Channel 162 MHz 1004 Jo 163 6 163 MHz 16147 o
141. Th are coupled with TDELay as follows m DCYCle TDELay LDELay 100 TBAS PERiod m WIDTh TDELay LDELay PGENA CH2 TDEL 3 5E 9 sets the trailing delay of channel A2 to 3 5 ns PGENB CH1 TDEL returns the trailing delay setting for channel B1 PGEN x CH n THOLd 3 82 Related Commands Syntax Arguments PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt THOLd Trailing Hold sets and queries the selected channel s trailing edge hold and sets the front panel display view This performs the same function as Select from the Trail Delay Duty Cycle or Width items in the front panel Pulse menu PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DCYCle PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt WIDTh TBAS PERiod PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt THOLd TDELay DCYCle WIDTh PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt THOLd Gaim lt space gt TDELay sets the trailing edge hold and the front panel display view to TDELay In this mode TDELay remains constant while TBAS PERiod PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LDELay and PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PHASe are varied sets the trailing edge hold and the front panel display view to DCYCle In this mode DCYCle remains constant while TBAS PERiod PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LDELay and PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PHASe are varied WIDTh sets the trailing edge hold and the front panel display view to WIDTh In this mode WIDTh remains constant while TBAS PERiod PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LDEL
142. This integer specifies the save re call setting to display FPAN DSET 5 sets the displayed save recall setting to 5 FPAN DSET returns the displayed save recall setting number FPAN DSIGnal Display Signal displays a signal This command performs the same function as the Channel item in the front panel Pulse Levels Signal Vector Data Fill Data Copy or Cal Deskew menus 3 47 Commands Syntax Arguments Examples FPAN DVECtor Syntax Arguments Examples 3 48 FPAN DSIGnal pin FPAN DNSIGnal cm J pin specifies the signal to display FPAN DSIGNAL WE sets the display signal to WE FPAN DSIGNAL returns the displayed signal FPAN DVECtor Display Vector controls the currently displayed vector address This command performs the same function as pressing SELECT when in the Data Edit menu FPAN DVECtor lt address gt FPAN DVECtor lt address gt specifies the vector address to display FPAN DVECTOR 1000 sets the displayed vector to 1000 FPAN DVECTOR returns the displayed vector address HES 9000 User Manual Commands FPAN FSCale Syntax Arguments Examples FPAN KEY Syntax HFS 9000 User Manual FPAN FSCale Fill Scale sets the fill scale This command performs the same function as the Fill Scale item in the front panel Data Fill menus FPAN FSCale NR1 FPAN FSCale lt NR1 gt specifies the fill scale The rang
143. User Manual Tektronix HFS 9000 Stimulus System 070 8365 03 Please check for change information at the rear of this manual Copyright Tektronix Inc 1994 rights reserved Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Printed in the U S A Tektronix Inc Box 1000 Wilsonville OR 97070 1000 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If any such product proves defective during this warranty period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is
144. a different generator such as a square wave generator which meets to 20 to 80 risetime requirement of 10 ns or less for the PHASE LOCK IN input Disconnect test setup HFS 9000 User Manual Glossary Address An identifier for devices on a GPIB bus No two devices on a bus may have the same address Alias A user defined programming command that is an abbreviation for a sequence of other programming commands Argument A quantity quality restriction or limit that is part of a programming command ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange An encoding of the alphabet and other characters into a binary coding system Amplitude The voltage difference between logic low and logic high See also Levels Auto Mode A time base mode where the HFS 9000 produces a continuous series of pulse windows without waiting for any trigger events and without any startup delays in the series of pulses Auto Burst Mode A time base mode where the HFS 9000 produces bursts of pulses continu ously The HFS 9000 creates its own trigger events There is a delay between pulse bursts Baud Rate The transmission speed used with an RS 232 C interface Break In RS 232 C communications a temporary disconnection of the signal path used to communicate status Burst A group of generated pulse windows initiated by a single trigger event Burst Mode A time base mode where the HFS 9000 produces a burst of pulses whenever a
145. ace NOTE The HFS 9000 must use the same baud rate parity and stop bit settings as the controller Also the controller s RS 232 C port must be set for 8 bit characters Use the arrow buttons to highlight the Baud Rate item and the knob or keypad to set the desired speed of the RS 232 C interface Set this to the same baud rate setting as the terminal or computer you are using Use the arrow buttons to highlight the Parity item and the Select button to set the desired parity Parity 15 an error detecting communication parameter You can set parity to even odd or none Set parity to the same setting as the terminal or computer you are using Use the arrow buttons to highlight the Stop Bits item and the SELECT button to set the number of synchronizing bits per transmitted data byte You can specify 1 1 5 or 2 stop bits Set the stop bits to the same setting as the terminal or computer you are using Use the arrow buttons to highlight the Flagging item and the SELECT button to specify the desired setting You can set flagging to hard soft sometimes known as XOn XOff or none Set flagging to the same setting as the terminal or computer you are using Flagging is a method to prevent data overflow of buffers Shortly before it can handle no more data the receiving device flags the sending device to stop sending data until the flag is removed With hard flagging one of the cable wires is used to signal flagging With soft flaggi
146. ace gt Arguments LDELay sets the leading edge hold and the front panel display view to LDELay In this mode LDELay remains constant while TBAS PERiod varies PHASe sets the leading edge hold and the front panel display view to PHASe In this mode PHASe remains constant while TBAS PERiod varies Examples PGENA CH1 LHOL LDEL sets the leading edge hold of channel Al to LDELay 3 72 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands PGENB CH2 LHOL returns the leading edge hold of channel B2 PGEN x CH n LIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LIMit Limit State sets and queries limiting This performs the same function as the Limit item in the front panel Levels menu Related Commands PGEN x CH n AMPLitude PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HIGH PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LOW PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OFFSet Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LIMit ON OFF lt NRf gt PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LIMit i OFF 3 Mtr at space Arguments ON or NRf 0 turns limiting ON OFF or NRf 0 turns limiting OFF Examples PGENA CH1 LIM ON turns limiting on for channel A1 PGENC CH1 LIM returns the current setting of the limit function for channel PGEN lt x gt CHen gt LLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LLIMit Low Limit sets and queries the low limit of the selected channel This performs the same function as the Low Limit ite
147. ader gt lt Space gt lt Argument gt lt Separator gt lt Argument gt Queries cause the HFS 9000 to return information about its status or settings Queries have the structure m Header m Header Space Argument Separator Argument If you use only a partial header in a query command the HFS 9000 returns information about all the possible mnemonics that you have left unspecified For example TBAS TIN SLOPE returns the slope setting for the time base Trigger In connector while TBAS TIN returns the settings for the time base Trigger In connector input level and slope and TBAS returns all the settings for the entire time base You can control whether or not headers are returned by the HFS 9000 as part of the query response Use the HEADER command to control this feature If header is on command headers are returned as part of the query and the query response is formatted as a valid set command When header is off only the values are sent back in the response which may be easier to parse and extract information Table 3 3 shows the difference in responses Table 3 3 Comparison of Header On and Off Responses Query Header Off Response Header On Response TBAS MODE AUTO TBAS MODE AUTO TBAS COUNT 100 TBAS COUNT 100 W You can enter commands in upper or lower case W You can precede any command with blank characters Blank characters include any combination of the ASCII control chara
148. age lt QString gt CEPR 2 spaces gt tring lt QString gt is the message to display on the front panel Use an embedded line feed to create a message having two lines Lines longer than the display width wrap onto the next line NOTE To erase a message send FPAN MESS FPAN MESS Attach pulse channel A1 to test point 7 FPAN METHod sets the fill method Note that this command does not fill a block with data this command only specifies the method used to fill a block The fill method is a parameter of the Fill Block with Method item in the Data Fill menu This command performs the same function as the Method item in the front panel Data Fill menus HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Syntax FPAN METHod CONStant INVert CUP CDOWn RANDom FPAN METHod space Arguments lt CONStant gt specifies that the block be filled with a constant specified by the Constant menu item or FPAN CONSTant Invert inverts the values in each vector CUP counts up by starting with the constant value and then increment ing by 1 lt CDOWn gt counts down by starting with the constant value and then decrementing by 1 lt RANDom gt fills the block with random data Examples FPAN METHOD RANDOM sets the fill method to Random FPAN METHOD returns the current fill method FPAN SORDer FPAN SORDer Signal Display Order specifies the order in which signals channels na
149. agging one of the cable wires is used to signal flagging With soft flagging a specific pair of characters DC3 and are used to stop and restart transmission NOTE Do not use soft flagging when transferring binary data since the data may contain and 1 characters Use hard flagging when transferring binary data 2 55 RS 232 C 2 56 Echo determines whether or not the HFS 9000 sends back a copy of each character immediately upon receipt Use the SELECT button to specify an off or on setting For most systems echo will be off You can use a terminal to send commands to the HFS 9000 and interactively observe the results In this mode you will want echo on For more detail see Interactive Command Entry on page 3 6 EOL specifies the type of message terminator that the HFS 9000 puts at the end of every query response Use the SELECT button to specify the desired setting CR LF LF CR CR or LF A common selection is a carriage return followed by line feed CR LF Delay sets the amount of time that the HFS 9000 waits after receiving a query before sending the response Use the knob or keypad to set the desired value Some systems require some setup time to begin receiving a message and the delay setting lets you ensure that the HFS 9000 does not respond before the terminal or computer is ready Delay can be set from 0 to 60 seconds in 50 ms increments Debug specifies whether commands and control settings
150. ain it is running correctly and run the calibration procedure before operating the instrument If the instrument configuration has been changed since last power on for example boards have been changed or firmware memory has been updated the power on diagnostics will detect this as a failure of calibration memory integrity Run the calibration procedure before operating the instrument NOTE Some features will not function if the HFS 9000 is in an uncalibrated state 2 8 HFS 9000 User Manual Sa Channels You have from 2 to 36 channels of output depending on the type and number of cards you have installed in your HFS 9000 system The HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9 2 pulse generator cards provide two output channels while the HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 data time generator cards provide four output channels Channel Names Each pulse generator card is assigned the letter designation A B C D E H or I depending on its physical position in the Stimulus System mainframe The channels on HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9PG2 cards are numbered and 2 The channels on HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 cards are numbered 1 2 3 and 4 The full designation for a channel is a letter and a number for example A1 C2 H4 etc Figure 2 2 shows the locations of the channels in a typical instrument Channel C2 Channel C4 Channel C1 Channel TID C 2 C D
151. alue and gives an execution warning RS232 DEL 2 5 sets the RS 232 C delay to 2 5 s RS232 DEL might return the value 5 showing that the RS 232 C delay is set to 5 s RS232 ECHO sets and queries the ECHO mode of the RS 232 C port This performs the same function as the Echo item in the front panel RS 232 menu RS232 ECHO ON OFF NRf RS232 ECHO Mp OFF cepa space ON or lt NRf gt 0 turns on the echo of characters to the RS 232 C port OFF or NRf 0 turns off the echo HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Examples RS232 EOL HFS 9000 User Manual You cannot send binary data to the HFS 9000 when ECHO mode is ON ECHO should be OFF if you use a computer program to transmit commands to the 9000 ECHO should be set to ON if you send commands interactively to the HFS 9000 using a CRT terminal a hardcopy terminal or a computer that is running terminal emulation software When ECHO is ON it has the following effects on command input m Whenever HFS 9000 is ready for the next command it sends gt prompt to the controller When this prompt appears on an RS 232 C device enter a valid command or query and a terminator CR or LF m All command input is buffered Therefore commands are not analyzed executed or displayed on the debug window until a terminator is received at the RS 232 C port When ECHO is OFF input is processed as it is received m Until the comman
152. ameter lt signal gt lt value gt SIGNal lt parameter gt signal O O O Arguments parameter identifies the pulse parameter to be set or queried signal identifies the signal whose pulse parameter is to be set or queried 3 96 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Examples HFS 9000 User Manual value specifies the value of the specified pulse parameter SIGNAL AMPLITUDE A 2 sets the amplitude for bus A to 2V SIGNAL LDELAY A 3 7 Ins sets the lead delay for pins 3 7 in A to 1 ns SIGNAL LDELAY A returns the lead delay for bus Af SIGNAL DCYCLE C1k 50 sets the duty cycle for signal Clk to 50 SIGNAL OUTPUT WE ON turns on the output for signal WE SIGNAL LOW Gl returns the low voltage level for signal GI NOTE Querying a signal which is a single pin will return the value for that pin Querying a signal which is a bus will return the value associated with the earliest bit in that bus s channel order This is the same value displayed by the front panel If more than one value exists for the bus being queried an execution warning will also be generated 3 97 Commands SIGNal BDATA SIGNal BDATA Signal Binary Data Input Output provides binary encoded data input output for a single pin Related Commands PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA VECTor BIOFormat VECTor BDATA Syntax SIGNal BDATA lt pin gt lt address gt
153. an the new vector For example if you need to insert a new vector at 000010 copy the vectors from 000010 through the end of the Block to a Dest Start address of 000011 1 higher than 000010 Then edit the new vector in the Data Edit menu You can delete single vectors using the same method set the Dest Start vector to one less than the vector to be removed HFS 9000 User Manual 2 23 Data Time Generators 2 24 Copy will affect Addrd vectors 13 through 29 press SELECT t Block Start Block End Dest Start Swap Block 13 with Dest Figure 2 22 The Data Copy Menu Channel Addra Dest Chan Addra Radix Decimal Copy Block to Dest View Channel m Channel selects the Signal named channel or bus on which the Copy Block to Dest and Swap Block with Dest commands operate m Block Start sets the vector where copy or swap operations begin Turn the knob or use the numeric keypad to change the Block Start vector m Block End sets the last vector in the Block Turn the knob or use the numeric keypad to change the Block End vector Pressing SELECT while Block End is highlighted changes the menu item to Block Size Block Size provides a second method of defining a block Block Size sets the size of the block regardless of the Block Start vector Copies sets the number of times the Block is copied m Dest Chan specifies the channel that will receive the copied Block m Dest Start
154. appear in the HFS 9000 display When debug is on a display window appears showing the most recent commands sent to the HFS 9000 and the status of several control settings Appendix C Interface Specifications gives complete information about using debug mode HES 9000 User Manual Saved Settings HFS 9000 User Manual You can save the state of the HFS 9000 as a saved setting Later you can recall the HFS 9000 to exactly those settings You can save up to 30 different settings This feature lets you rapidly establish the conditions of a specific test setup and to rapidly sequence through saved settings for a suite of tests Use the Save Recall menu to store and recall settings The associated display shows the 30 storage locations for settings and indicates which ones currently have settings stored in them In Figure 2 39 storage locations 2 8 and 10 have settings stored in them 1 i 4 5 6 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 a space for a stored setting 1 stored setting Save Fecall Menu Factory Figure 2 39 The Save Recall Menu The top row of menu items relate to saving and recalling settings m Setting lets you select which storage location you want the Recall Save and Purge items to use m Recall changes all settings of the HFS 9000 to those in the specified storage location If no setting is stored in that location you will see an error message Before th
155. are in the Pulse menu as shown in Figure 2 9 For more information on pulse parameter controls see page 2 45 Pulse Menu press SELECT Go to the next channel Channel High Level Low Level Polarity 20 14 Hormal Lead Delay Duty Cycle Transition ins gx Pulse Rate Output Half Copy Paste Signal Type Channel Channel Pulse Figure 2 9 The Pulse Menu Menus that control data generation parameters are the Signal menu the Data Fill menu the Data Copy menu and the Data Edit menu HFS 9000 User Manual 2 13 Data Time Generators Turning Channels On and Off Naming a Channel The HFS 9DG1l provides two output connectors for each channel Channels are identified by number they are labeled CH 1 through CH 4 Each channel provides both normal and logically inverted output and are labeled OUTPUT and OUTPUT The HFS 9DG2 provides one output connector for each channel labeled CH 1 through CH 4 Each output connector has a button to turn that output on or off and a light showing whether or not that output is on You can also turn on or off the normal or inverted output of any channel using the Pulse menu items Output and Output Generally a channel is referred to by its slot and channel number for example you would refer to channel 1 of the card in slot A as channel A1 Additionally you can identify a channel with a name This would enable you to identify the signal going to the Write Enable pin of the DUT
156. arguments are made up of a letter that specifies the card A B C D E F G H or I and a channel number 1 2 3 or 4 For example output channel 1 of the second card is identified as channel So to specify the card channel 2 in such a command it would be written as FPAN DCHannel B2 For another example output channel 4 of the eighth card is identified as channel H4 So to specify the H card channel 4 in such a command it would be written as FPAN DCHannel H4 Signal Arguments For commands that change channel parameters there are two methods to identify the channel whose parameters are to be changed The first method described previously is physical in nature a signal is specified by identifying the card and channel whose parameter is to be set The second method views channels in a logical manner Using this logical view a name is given to a channel for example a channel could be named CLK Thereafter the channel would be referred to as CLK rather than A1 Signal names are used to indirectly access a channel s parameters and data A signal can be either a pin or a bus A bus is composed of two or more pins A pin maps directly to a single channel while a bus maps to two or more channels A pin is mapped onto a channel using the PGENX CHn SIGNAL pin command bus is defined as all pins that have a common name with different numerical suffixes For example Addr0 Addr1 Addr2 and A
157. ations do not apply when terminating to a high impedance load Because of the larger voltage swings associated with doubled level range output transition time specifications do not apply when driving a high impedance load Operation when terminated to high impedance loads Transition time accuracy 20 to 80 Output aberrations 10 of setting 300 ps Overshoot 15 20 mV Undershoot 10 20 mV Table B 29 Typical Characteristics HFS 9DG1 Output Performance Name Transition time 20 to 80 Description Amplitude lt 1 V lt 250 ps 250 ps 1V lt Amplitude lt 2 V 250 ps 2 V lt Amplitude lt 3 V 260 ps Overshoot 15 20 mV Undershoot 10 20 mV Output aberrations Table B 30 Typical Characteristics HFS 9DG2 Output Performance Name Description Operation when terminated to high impedance loads Output level range will double until certain internal limits are achieved Since the programmed specified and displayed output levels do not match the actual output levels level accuracy specifications do not apply when terminating to a high impedance load Because of the larger voltage swings associated with doubled level range output transition time specifications do not apply when driving a high impedance load Transition time accuracy 20 to 80 10 of setting 300 ps Overshoot 15 20 mV Undershoot 10 20 mV Output aberrations 12 HFS 9000 Us
158. ator The operator then performs the necessary action after which he or she presses the SRQ button The program recognizes the button press locks out the front panel and continues to the next automated test HFS 9000 User Manual GPIB The GPIB Menu HFS 9000 User Manual GPIB Menu 3 Figure 2 27 The GPIB Menu NOTE The settings of the GPIB parameters are not changed when you reset or factory reset the HFS 9000 or when you recall settings Address lets you set the device address of the HFS 9000 see Fig ure 2 27 Valid device addresses 0 through 30 Once the device address is set all other devices will communicate with the HFS 9000 using its device address Every device on a GPIB bus must have a unique device address On Bus lets you turn off or turn on the GPIB interface When set to Off the HFS 9000 GPIB interface is disabled and the remaining devices on the bus operate as if the HFS 9000 were not connected to the bus m Debug specifies whether commands and control settings appear in the HFS 9000 display When debug is on a display window appears showing the most recent commands sent to the HFS 9000 and the status of several control settings Appendix C Interface Specifications gives complete information about using debug mode 2 33 GPIB 2 34 HFS 9000 User Manual Levels You can set the voltage levels that the HFS 9000 uses for logical high and logical low You can also limit
159. atus flag that controls the automatic power on handling of the DESER SRER and ESER registers When PSC is TRUE the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at power on When PSC is FALSE the current values in the DESER SRER and ESER registers are preserved in non volatile memory when power is shut off and restored at power on For a complete discussion of the use of these registers see page 3 129 DESE ESE FACTORY RST SRE PSC NRf PSC HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Arguments lt NRf gt is a value in the range from 32767 to 32767 lt NRf gt 0 sets the power on status clear flag to FALSE and disables the power on clear and allows the HFS 9000 to assert SRQ after power on lt NRf gt 0 sets the power on status clear flag TRUE Sending PSC 1 therefore enables the power on clear and prevents any SRQ assertion after power on Using an out of range value causes an execution error Examples PSC 0 sets the power on status clear flag to FALSE PSC might return the value 1 showing that the power on status clear flag is set to TRUE PURGE No Query Form The PURGE command purges the contents of the selected save recall register This removes the settings stored using the SAV command This performs the same function as the Purge item in the front panel Save Recall menu Related Commands SAV RCL Syntax PURGE lt NRf gt Arguments lt NRf gt is a va
160. ay and PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PHASe are varied HES 9000 User Manual Commands Examples PGENA CH1 THOL DCYC sets the trailing edge hold for channel A1 to DCYCle PGENB CH2 THOL returns the trailing edge hold setting for channel B2 PGEN x CH n TINPut PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TINPut Transducer Input enables disables or queries the selected Transducer In connector This performs the same function as the Transducer item in the front panel Pulse menu Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TINPut ON OFF lt NRf gt PGEN x lt gt TINPut f e OFF Ur at space Arguments ON or NRf 0 enables the Transducer In channel OFF or NRf 0 disables the Transducer In channel Examples PGENA CH1 TINP ON enables the Transducer In connector for channel A1 PGENB CH2 TINP returns the state of the Transducer In connector for channel B2 PGEN lt x gt CHe lt n gt TRANsition HFS 9PG2 and HFS 9DG2 Only PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TRANsition sets and queries the transition of the selected channel This performs the same function as the Transition item in the front panel Pulse menu Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TRANsition MIN MAX lt NRf gt PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TRANsition HFS 9000 User Manual 3 83 Commands MIN ME MAX 4 tr space TRANsition Arguments MIN sets the transition to the minimum MAX sets the transition to th
161. ble F 1 Required Test Equipment Minimum Requirements Example Purpose Item Number and Description 1 Digital Volt Meter 2 BNC female to dual banana plug DC volt accuracy 0 1 from 0 40 V to 5 5 V Tektronix DM 511 Output level and amplitude checks Tektronix part number 103 0090 00 Output level and amplitude checks 3 Precision Coaxial BNC 36 inch 50 O Tektronix part number 012 0482 00 Output level and amplitude checks 4 Precision Feed through Terminator 50 0 1 atDC Tektronix part number 011 0129 00 Output level and amplitude checks 5 Digital Sampling Oscilloscope 6 Sampling Head 7 Attenuator 5X SMA 8 Cable Coaxial SMA two required 9 Generator Leveled Sine Wave A time accuracy 0 25 10 ps from 100 ps to 1 us Freq Measurement accuracy 0 10 from 50 kHz to 630 MHz Rise time lt 60 ps 10 to 90 50 Q gt 12 GHz bandwidth 20 inch 50 O Capable of producing 0 8 Vp p amplitude up to 600 MHz into 500 HFS 9000 User Manual Tektronix 11801B Digital Sampling Trigger Output Check Oscilloscope or CSA803A Com Rise and fall time checks munication Signal Analyzer Edge placement checks Frequency accuracy check Tektronix 50 22 SD 24 or SD 26 Used with Tektronix Digital Sam pling Oscilloscope item 5 Tektronix part number Rise and fall time checks 015 1002 00 Tektronix part numbe
162. by the Fill Block with Method and Clear Block items in the Data Fill and Data Copy menus FPAN BSIZe lt NR1 gt FPAN BSIZe lt NR1 gt specifies the block size Valid values for this parameter are 1 to 65536 The block size value is displayed in the argument field of the Block Size item in the front panel Data Fill and Data Copy menus HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Examples FPAN BSTart Syntax Arguments Examples FPAN CONStant Syntax HES 9000 User Manual FPAN BSIZE 128 sets the block size to 128 FPAN BSIZE returns the block size FPAN BSTart Block Start Address sets the block start address The block start address is a parameter that is used by the Fill Block with Method and Clear Block items in the Data Fill and Data Copy menus FPAN BSTart lt address gt FPAN BSTart mo lt address gt specifies the start address of the block Valid values for this parameter are 0 to 65535 The current value is displayed in the argument field of the Block Start item in the front panel Data Fill menu FPAN BSTART 0 sets the block start address to 0 FPAN BSTART returns the block start address FPAN CONStant Constant Value sets the fill constant This performs the same function as the Constant item in the front panel Data Fill menu FPAN CONStant lt constant gt CONStant 3 41 Commands a e Arguments constant specifies the value assigned to the fill constant T
163. channel to the sampling head input of the DSO To save time connecting the cable to other channels use the SMA slip on connector on the end of the cable that connects to the HFS NOTE If you have any HFS 9PG2 channels set the Pulse menu Pulse Rate item to Half for those channels If you have Variable Rate or HFS 9DG2 channels use one of them for this test 4 Turn on the output of the HFS 9000 channel you are using F 31 Appendix Performance Verification F 32 5 Setthe DSO to display the signal with 200 mV div vertically and a vertical offset of 1 3 V Set the DSO time base to 500 ps div horizontally Set the DSO MAIN POSITION to minimum Display the DSO measurement menu and turn on the FREQUENCY measurement On the DSO turn TRACKING on and turn on AVERAGING with AVGN set to 32 Refer to Tables F 32 F 33 or 34 as appropriate and adjust for each of the specified Pulse menu Frequency settings listed in the left column For each Frequency value verify that the DSO FREQUENCY measurement falls within the limits specified in the middle and right columns Adjust the horizontal size and position to make the display of a single cycle fill the DSO screen Table F 32 Frequency Limits HFS 9PG1 amp HFS 9DG1 HFS 9000 Pulse Menu DSO FREQUENCY DSO FREQUENCY Frequency Setting Minimum Maximum 50 kHz 49 5 kHz 50 5 kHz 324 MHz 320 8 MHz 327 2 MHz 326 MHz 322 7 MHz 329 3 MHz 400 MHz 396 0 MHz 404 0
164. connector to the DIRECT connector located in the TRIGGER INPUTS section of the DSO 4 Connect an SMA cable from the normal OUTPUT connector of the HFS 9000 channel under test to the sampling head input of the DSO To save HFS 9000 User Manual F 27 Appendix Performance Verification 10 time connecting the cable to other channels use the SMA slip on connector on the end of the cable that connects to the HFS Initialize the DSO then set the DSO to display a triggered signal with 200 mV div 5 divisions vertically at zero offset Set the DSO time base to 1 us div horizontally Set the DSO MAIN POSITION to minimum Display the DSO measurement menu and turn on WIDTH and CROSS measurements On the DSO touch the WIDTH selector at the bottom of the DSO screen to display the width measurement parameters Set the DSO width LEVEL MODE parameter to RELATIVE Turn the DSO tracking on On the DSO turn tracking off when the high and low levels have been acquired Set the DSO sweep speed to 500 ps div Position the rising edge of the displayed waveform at the center of the DSO screen On the DSO save the cross measurement as the reference in the Compare amp References pop up menu On the DSO turn COMPARE on Refer to Table F 25 or F 26 as appropriate and adjust for each of the specified Pulse menu Lead Delay settings listed in the left column For each Lead Delay value verify that the DSO CROSS measurement falls within
165. cters 00 through 09 and OB through 20 hexadecimal 0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal m The HFS 9000 ignores commands consisting of any combination of blank characters carriage returns and line feeds Command Syntax Abbreviating Commands Concatenating Commands 3 12 Many HFS 9000 commands can be abbreviated These abbreviations are shown in capital letters for each command in the Commands section For example the command TBAS PERiod can be entered simply TBAS PER tbas per If you use the HEADER command to include command headers in query responses you can further control whether the returned headers are abbreviated or are full length The VERBOSE command lets you control this You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a semicolon The HFS 9000 executes concatenated commands in the order received Concatenating commands is useful when you want to avoid events generated by conflicting settings see Conflicts on page 3 134 When concatenating commands and queries you must follow these rules 1 Completely different headers must be separated by a semicolon and the beginning colon on all commands but the first For example the commands TBAS MODE AUTO and PGENA CH1 WIDTH 2ns would be concatenated into a single command TBAS MODE AUTO PGENA CHI WIDTH 2ns 2 If concatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemon ic you can abbreviate the second command
166. cution warning 510 Value too small increased to minimum 511 Value too large decreased to maximum 512 Value rounded to nearest legal setting 513 Level adjusted to new limit 514 This channel s transition time is not variable 515 Settings conflict 540 Phase Lock failed Set TBAS P LIN INPUT ON to reattempt 3 138 HFS 9000 User Manual E Programming Examples This section contains three example programs that illustrate the methods you can use to control the HFS 9000 from the GPIB interface These programs are written in GWBASIC The programs run on a PC compatible system equipped with a Tektronix GURU GPIB card Example 1 Setting Up a Pulse Channel The first example illustrates the way to send commands to the HFS 9000 to set it to a desired state The program performs these operations Lines 100 140 print the title of the program Lines 150 320 are standard GURU card initializations Lines 330 370 initialize the HFS 9000 Lines 380 440 set up the time base Lines 450 550 set up two pulse channels Lines 560 620 wait for all the above operations to complete OPC puts a 1 in the output queue when all pending operations are complete The read in line 620 waits for this 1 to be set Lines 630 670 trigger the burst of pulses set up above IBTRG in line 670 sends GET Group Execute Trigger which executes a TBAS TIN TRIG command This program produces one burst of pulses unless a trigge
167. d is terminated it may be edited with any of the following special characters CONTROL retypes the current input command and places the cursor to the right of the last character of the command CONTROL U deletes the current command and reprompts for another input BACKSPACE and DELETE erase the last character entered BACKSLASH Y places special editing characters CR LF BACKSPACE DELETE CONTROL R CONTROL U and BACKSLASH into the input buffer To place a special character into the input buffer enter followed by the special character The Vis not echoed RS232 ECHO ON turns the RS 232 C echo on RS232 ECHO might return the string OFF showing that the RS 232 C echo mode is turned off RS232 EOL end of line selects or queries the RS 232 C end of line output message terminator The RS 232 C end of line input message terminator is a line feed This performs the same function as the EOL item in the front panel RS 232 menu 3 91 Commands Syntax RS232 E0L CR CRLF LF LFCR Arguments Examples RS232 FLAGging Syntax 3 92 RS232 E0L space CR selects a carriage return as the output message terminator CRLF selects a carriage return followed by line feed LF selects a line feed LFCR selects a line feed followed by carriage return RS232 EOL CR selects a carriage return as the RS 232 C end of line terminator RS232 EOL LFCR selects a line feed followed by carriage retu
168. d to start fresh with known default settings Without resetting the HFS 9000 could be left with one or more parameters set to values that interfere with the job you are trying to accomplish Screen Menus The HFS 9000 implements controls as menus that are displayed on the front panel screen Figure 1 1 shows the location of the MAIN MENU button which displays the top level menu mA GB uC MD ee nE C D X ENTER MAIN MENU Button Figure 1 1 MAIN MENU Button Location 1 2 HFS 9000 User Manual Getting Started HFS 9000 User Manual 1 Press the MAIN MENU button Figure 1 2 shows the appearance of the Main menu Each item in this menu leads to a second level menu The menu you see may have a different menu item highlighted that is black type on an amber background Main Menu press SELECT to show the Pulse Menu Fulse Time Base Levels Menu Menu Menu Data Edit Data Fill Data Copy Menu Menu Menu Save Recall GFIEB 5 232 Cal Deskew Menu Menu Menu Menu Figure 1 2 Main Menu Display All menus have a name bar across the top and several rectangular menu items beneath Some menus have a prompt line between the name bar and the menu items At all times one and only one of the menu items is highlighted The SELECT button Figure 1 3 will operate this highlighted item The arrow keys surrounding the SELECT button let you change
169. d to pause while you perform some manual setup You then indicate that the setup is complete by pressing the HFS 9000 SRQ button This program detects the SRQ button press and responds by unlocking the front panel and continuing the program NOTE If you interrupt this program before it completes the HFS 9000 may be left in local lockout mode where front panel button presses are ignored Execute program lines 550 through 570 to restore normal operation m Lines 100 140 print the title of the program Lines 150 320 are standard GURU card initializations Lines 330 370 initialize the HFS 9000 m Lines 380 390 enable event generation The SRE 32 command enables the ESB bit but not the MAV bit m Lines 400 440 lock out the front panel The hex 11 value in line 430 is used for the Local Lock Out command m Lines 450 460 display a message on the HFS 9000 screen m Lines 470 520 wait for the HFS 9000 SRQ button to be pressed The SBR register is polled until the RQS bit is set RQS is set from the URQ bit in the DESER register and the ESB bit in the SBR register m Lines 530 540 erase the front panel message m Line 550 sends a GTL Go To Local command to enable the front panel Local Lock Out is still active after this command is sent Lines 560 570 release REN which clears Local Lock Out 3 144 HFS 9000 User Manual Programming Examples 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170
170. data radix 3 103 Signal display order 3 53 Vector radix 3 54 G GET C 1 Go to local C 1 GPIB 2 29 Address 2 33 3 4 Configurations 3 3 Connection rules 3 3 Debug 2 33 3 5 EOI end or identify 3 13 Function subsets C 5 Interactive operation 2 31 Menu 1 4 3 4 On bus 2 33 3 4 Parameter Setting 3 4 Using a controller 3 1 GPIB connector 2 29 3 1 Group execute trigger C 1 GTL C 1 HFS 9000 User Manual H Header Command 3 10 3 54 Included in query response 3 54 3 126 HEADER command 3 54 High Level menu item 2 36 2 37 2 46 High level view 2 36 2 46 3 75 High Limit menu item 2 37 HIGH SPEED pulse generator card 2 47 IDN query 3 55 IEEE Std 488 2 1987 3 1 3 9 321 Impedance FRAME SYNC IN connector 2 41 PHASE LOCK IN connector 2 39 TRANSDUCER IN connector 2 49 inserting a single vector 2 23 Instrument Setup F 13 Interface message C 1 Invert 2 22 K Keypad 1 8 2 2 2 3 Knob 2 2 2 3 L L in Data Edit menu 2 18 LADS debug indicator C 4 Lead delay view 2 47 3 72 Level and Amplitude Tests F 19 HFS 9DG1 F 13 HFS 9DG2 and HFS 9PG2 F 16 Levels menu 1 4 2 36 Voltage diagram 2 36 Light FINE 1 8 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 31 RUNNING 2 2 2 3 Limit menu item 2 37 List Common command 3 21 Device command 3 22 LLO C 1 Index 5 Index LLO debug indicator C 4 Local lock out 3 144 C 1 Loop vector ind
171. ddr3 are pin names with the common name Addr Together these four pins create a bus named Addr 0 3 Signals can be accessed using either pin names bus names or both A signal is defined as follows m lt signal gt lt pin gt lt bus gt A pin can be specified in the following ways pin lt name gt a single non bus pin lt name gt lt bi t gt one bit of a bus name bit one bit of a bus Some examples are Clk AddrO Addr 0 A bus can can be specified in the following ways lt bus gt lt name gt an entire bus name msb 1sb bus with bit order name msb 1sb bus with bit order HFS 9000 User Manual 3 17 Command Syntax Some examples are Addr Addr 0 3 Addr 0 3 Addr 3 0 Addr 3 0 The symbols used above are defined in the following table Symbol name bit msb sb Vector Data Meaning Qstring that cannot be terminated by a decimal The maximum length is six characters including bi t Bit number in lt NR1 gt form Most significant bit in lt NR1 gt form Most significant bit in lt NR1 gt form Vector data can be input or output using either the physical view or the logical view of the HFS 9000 Using the physical view CHn DATA and PGENx CHn BDATA are the commands used to download and upload data If you use the logical view the SIGNAL DATA SIGNAL
172. dix Performance Verification Output Level Checks HFS 9PG1 Card Only HFS 9000 User Manual These tests check the output level in volts DC of each pulse generator channel You will need to repeat these checks for each output channel the number of times you repeat a check depends on the configuration of your HFS 9000 A reference to the channel is a reference to the particular channel being checked Equipment Required One DVM digital voltmeter item 1 One BNC female to dual banana connector item 2 One precision coaxial cable item 3 One feedthrough termination item 4 One threaded SMA female to SMA male slip on connector item 11 Reset the HFS 9000 Set the Digital Voltmeter to measure DC volts on Auto Range Construct the termination assembly by connecting the following items in the order listed a one BNC female to dual banana connector item 2 b one precision coaxial cable item 3 c one feedthrough termination item 4 d one BNC female to SMA male adapter item 10 e one threaded SMA female to SMA male slip on connector item 11 Connect the banana plug end of the termination assembly to the input of the DVM and connect the other end to the channel normal OUTPUT connector Set the HFS 9000 according to Table F 15 Table F 15 HFS 9PG1 Output Level Checks First Settings Control Setting Pulse menu Channel The channel under test Pulse menu Output On Pulse menu
173. e item 9 Required BNC female to SMA male adapter item 10 This check verifies that the phase lock system is capable of detecting accurately measuring and holding an input signal NOTE If the HFS 9009 cannot determine the phase lock frequency an error message is displayed This will happen if the phase lock signal is not stable and continuous or if the phase lock signal is outside the allowed frequency range or if the HFS 9009 needs calibrating Reset the HFS 9000 Set the signal generator for an amplitude of 0 8 Vp p and a frequency of 250 MHz Connect the signal to the HFS 9000 PHASE LOCK IN connector If your generator does not have better than 1 frequency accuracy use the FREQUENCY measurement capability of the DSO to set the generator frequency to within 1 Set the Time Base menu PhaseLocklIn item to On Check that the input frequency is correctly displayed on the HFS 9000 screen immediately above the menu area Wait at least five seconds and make sure that the HFS 9000 retains phase lock If phase lock is lost you will see an error message Set the Time Base menu PhaseLockIn item to Off Repeat steps 3 through 6 with the signal generator set to 594 MHz If your generator does not have better than 1 frequency accuracy use the FREQUENCY measurement capability of the DSO to set the generator frequency to within 1 You may optionally check other frequencies as well Low frequency checks will require
174. e Card Parameter Setting PGEN lt x gt lt gt THOLd All Cards DCYCLE PGEN lt x gt lt gt LVIew All Cards HIGH PGEN x CH n POLarity All Cards NORMAL PGEN x CH n CDELay All Cards 0s PGEN x CH n SIGNa1 All Cards n PGEN x lt gt TYPE All Cards PULSE PGEN x lt gt CVIEW All Cards CHANNEL PGEN lt x gt lt gt DRADi x All Cards HEX The FACTORY command does not alter the following m The state of the RS 232 C or GPIB IEEE 488 1 interfaces m The selected GPIB address m Calibration data that affects device specifications The FPAN Front Panel command operates or queries the front panel display and controls from the remote controller The query FPAN returns the values of all front panel parameters FPAN CN FPAN might return the string FPAN DMEN Main Menu DIT Pulse Menu DCH Al DSET 1 KRES FPAN ADVance Auto Advance Direction controls the direction of the auto advance function in the Data Edit menu The cursor in the Data Edit menu can move either left and right or up and down HES 9000 User Manual Commands Syntax Arguments Examples FPAN BEND Syntax Arguments Examples HFS 9000 User Manual FPAN ADVance DOWN RIGHt j FPAN ADVance diee DOWN RIGHt specifies the direction the cursor moves This is implemented on the front panel by pressing the up down arrow keys or the le
175. e Pulse menu items Output and Output When an output is off the channel is internally tri state Off does not drive an output to ground HFS 9000 User Manual Channels Selecting Channels Selected Channel HFS 9000 User Manual Several menus provide controls that apply to individual channels In these menus the upper left menu item lets you set which channel the other menu items control You use the SELECT button or the knob to select the desired channel Once you have set the desired channel you can use the other menu items to control the parameters for that channel An alternate method of selecting channels is to use the NEXT CHANNEL and PREVIOUS CHANNEL buttons at the left of the display The Pulse menu the Levels menu and the Signal menu have associated channel displays above the menu In these displays each channel is labeled with its channel name A1 C2 etc The name of the channel that is selected to be controlled by the other menu items is highlighted that is displayed in black lettering on an amber background Figures 2 6 2 7 and 2 8 show these three menus and indicate the highlighting on the associated displays AZ E 1 HM l Pulse Menu press SELECT to the next channel Channel High Level Low Level Polarity BS8 g mWV 1 8M Hormal Lead Delay Width Transition s 2 108 200 Pulse Rate Transducer Output Hormal Copy Paste Channel Channel
176. e Pulse Generator Card IEEE 488 2 1987 A bus standard that allows instruments to be connected in a network and programmed with a controller Also known as GPIB Lead Delay The delay between the beginning of a pulse window and the first edge of the pulse associated with that pulse window See also Duty Cycle Phase Trail Delay and Width Levels The voltages used by a channel for logic high and logic low Levels can be specified in terms of amplitude and offset or in terms of high level and low level See also Limiting Limiting Gives the ability to protect devices under test by applying voltage limits simultaneously to the levels settings of all pulse generator channels Listener A device on GPIB bus that receives messages See also Talker Manual Trigger Using the press of a button as the trigger event Mnemonic A name element of a header Several mnemonics may be joined by colon characters to form a complete command header Offset The center voltage half way between the logic high and logic low levels Amplitude is centered on the offset Out Period The particular pulse window within a pulse burst with which the trigger out signal is synchronized Parity An error checking communication parameter used with the RS 232 C interface Period A specification of the duration of pulse windows the inverse of frequency HFS 9000 User Manual Glossary HFS 9000 User Manual Phase The time between the beginnin
177. e for fill scale is 1 to 65535 FPAN FSCALE 4 sets the fill scale to 4 FSCALE returns the current fill scale FPAN KEY simulates front panel button presses These simulated button presses go into the same input queue as button presses coming from the front panel NOTE Simulated button presses are NOT executed sequentially with other remote commands but are executed sequentially with front panel button presses Front panel button execution and remote command execution are asynchronous All front panel button presses and remote FPAN KEY simulated presses go into an FIFO queue that holds the last 20 executed button presses FPAN KEY queries the oldest button press out of this FIFO queue FPAN KEY lt QString gt lt Separator gt lt QString gt lt Separator gt lt NRf gt FPAN KEY 3 49 Commands 3 50 KEY Arguments space lt QString gt tring aia The first lt QString gt selects the section of the HFS 9000 that contains the button Valid strings are FP 1 2 B1 etc The second lt QString gt specifies the button to press Valid strings are the labels of the buttons Some exceptions are noted in Table 3 9 particularly the operation of the equivalents for the channel card OUTPUT and OUTPUT buttons Upper or lower case letters may be used The capitalization shown in Table 3 9 shows what is returned by query commands lt NRf gt selects the number of clicks
178. e maximum lt NRf gt sets the transition to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the transition to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning NOTE Because High Speed pulse generator cards have a fixed transition rate you cannot use the PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TRAN command with them Examples PGENB CH1 TRAN 1ns sets the transition of channel B1 to 1 ns PGENA CH1 TRAN MAX sets the transition of channel A1 to the maximum transition PGENC CH2 TRAN returns the transition setting of channel C2 PGEN x CH n TYPE PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TYPE Signal Type specifies the type of output for the specified channel This performs the same function as the Signal Type item in the Signal and Pulse menus Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TYPE NRZ RZ R1 PULSe DC TRANSDucer PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TYPE 3 84 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Arguments Examples TRANSDucer NRZ sets the signal type to Non Return to Zero RZ sets the signal type to Return to Zero R1 sets the signal type to Return to One PULSe sets the signal type to Pulse DC sets the signal type to DC TRANSDucer sets the signal type to transducer PGENA CHI TYPE NRZ sets the signal type of channel A1 to non return to zero PGENF CH1 TYPE PULSE sets the signal type of channel F1 to pulse PGENC SIGNAL returns the signal type of channel C4
179. e order of the slots information for slot 1 first followed by slot 2 slot 3 etc 3 57 Commands Related Commands PGEN x 3 58 Syntax Examples Syntax IDN OPT OPT returns a string of 13 values of type lt NR1 gt 1 for each slot Each value will be one of the following m card is in the slot m 1 if an unrecognized card is in the slot m 221 if a CPU card is in the slot m 4061 if a CPU card is in the slot m 4075 if an HFS 9DG2 card is in the slot m 4076 if an HFS 9DGI card is in the slot m 4077 if an HFS 9PG2 card is in the slot m 4078 if an HFS 9PGI card is in the slot m 4079 if a Time Base card is in the slot might return the string 221 4079 4078 4077 4076 4076 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 This shows there is a CPU card in slot 1 a Time Base card in slot 2 an HFS 9PGI card in slot 3 an HFS 9PG2 card in slot 4 and HFS 9DGI cards in slots 5 and 6 Slots 7 through 13 are empty The PGEN lt x gt Pulse Generator command sets and queries the parameters of a selected pulse channel PGEN lt x gt returns all parameters for the selected card lt x gt is F G H or I PGEN lt x gt HES 9000 User Manual Commands Examples PGEN x CH n Syntax Examples PGENA returns all parameters for both A channels For example it might return PGENA CH1 PRAT NORM LHOL LDEL THOL WIDT LVI HIGH HLIM 0 0E 00 HIGH 8 0E 01 LLIM 2 0E 00 LOW 1 8E 0
180. e output levels including level limits the transition time control HFS 9PG2 card only and the output on off controls can be used Timing and polarity controls for the channel are bypassed The TRANSDUCER IN signal must have a voltage between 1 0 V and 1 5 V peak to peak The input circuitry removes the DC component by passing the signal through a blocking capacitor after which the signal is terminated by 50 Q to ground 2 49 Pulse Generators Copying Pulse Channel Setups Once you have set up a channel you can use the Copy Channel and Paste Channel menu items to transfer the channel setup to another channel This simplifies setting up several channels with identical settings and reduces the chance for errors when setting up several channels with identical settings To copy a channel setup first select the channel you wish to copy from using the Channel menu item Select the Copy Channel menu item Then use the Channel menu item or the NEXT CHANNEL and PREVIOUS CHANNEL buttons to select the channel you to which you wish to copy the setup Select the Paste Channel menu item of the channel parameters except Channel Delay will be copied to the selected channel 2 50 HFS 9000 User Manual Reset Total Instrument Reset HFS 9000 User Manual You can reset all of the HFS 9000 settings to a known predefined state This is useful when you begin using the HFS 9000 after someone else has left it in an unknown state The tw
181. e settings are recalled the HFS 9000 displays a verifica tion dialog to prevent current settings from being replaced accidentally 2 57 Saved Settings NOTE Recall does not restore phase lock mode After a recall phase lock mode is always off because phase lock requires an external signal to be attached at the time phase lock is turned on If your setting uses phase lock mode recall the setting connect the phase lock signal to the PHASE LOCK IN connector then turn on phase lock using the Time Base menu PhaseLockIn item Save stores a copy of all current settings into the specified storage location If settings are already stored in that location the HFS 9000 displays a dialog asking if you want them replaced by the current settings m Purge removes the stored settings from a storage location leaving it empty The HFS 9000 always displays a verification dialog to prevent inadvertent loss of stored settings Purging All Saved Settings If you want to remove all the saved settings you can select them one by one and purge them with the Purge menu item faster method is to perform a Factory reset However this has the side effect of changing all current settings Both factory reset and regular reset are items in the Save Recall menu The Reset section on page 2 51 has more information about both types of reset 2 58 HFS 9000 User Manual Self Test HFS 9000 User Manual The HFS 9000 is equipped with an extensive
182. e the DESE and ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and ESER and use the SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER Subsequent power on cycles will generate a Service Request HFS 9000 User Manual Status and Events Queues The Output Queue The Event Queue The HFS 9030 status and event reporting system contains two queues the Output Queue and the Event Queue The Output Queue stores up to 1024 bytes of a query response while it is waiting to be output The Output Queue is emptied each time a new command or query message is received Any query response must be read before the next command or query is sent or responses to earlier queries will be lost and an error may result The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 20 events If more than 20 events stack up in the Event Queue the 20th event is replaced by event code 350 Too many events Read the Event Queue with either the EVENT query which returns only the event number or with the EVMSG query which returns the event number and a text description of the event Reading an event removes it from the queue Before reading an event from the Event Queue you must use the ESR query to read the summary of that event from the SESR This makes the events summa rized by the ESR available to the EVENT and EVMSG queries and empties the SESR Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by a previous ESR but not read from the Event Queue Eve
183. e use of the Event Queue registers see page 3 129 This command is similar to repeatedly sending EVMsg queries to the instrument CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB 3 29 Commands Syntax ALLEv O Examples ALLEV might return the string ALLEV 520 Value too large decreased to maximum PERiod 5 0e 02 420 Query UNTERMINATED CAL CONStant Query Only The CAL CONStant query returns selected calibration constants for a desig nated board Syntax CAL CONStant lt QString gt lt Separator gt lt NRf gt C CAL 9 CCoNStant 9 9 lt gt Strings L Separator lt gt _ Arguments lt QString gt specifies the card to be queried Valid strings are CPU TB A B C p E G and I These query the CPU card Time Base card and Pulse Generator cards A through I respectively lt NRf gt specifies the calibration constant to be queried Calibration constant zero contains the number of calibration constants used by the specified card Examples CAL CONS CPU 0 returns the number of calibration constants including calibration constant 0 available for the CPU card CAL CONS A 12 returns the current value of calibration constant 12 for pulse generator card A CAL CONS TB 8 returns the current value of calibration constant 8 for the Time Base card CAL CID CAL CID card ID sets and queries the ID of a
184. ecks First Settings Control Setting Pulse menu Channel The channel under test Pulse menu Output On Pulse menu Output Off Pulse menu Pulse Rate off Pulse menu Polarity Complement Pulse menu High Level 5 0 V Pulse menu Low Level 2 0V The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 4 850 V and 5 150 V 6 Change Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Normal The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 1 790 V and 2 210 V 7 Setthe HFS 9000 according to Table F 8 Table F 8 HFS 9DG1 Output Level Checks Second Settings Control Setting Pulse menu High Level 15V Pulse menu Low Level 25V F 14 HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification HFS 9000 User Manual The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 2 680 V and 2 320 V Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Complement The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 1 580 V and 1 420 V Move the feedthrough termination assembly to the channel complemented OUTPUT The DVM is now set to monitor the complement output 10 Set the HFS 9000 according to Table 9 Table F 9 HFS 9DG1 Output Level Checks Third Settings Control Setting Pulse menu Output Off Pulse menu Output On Pulse menu Polarity Normal Pulse menu High Level 5 0V Pulse menu Low Level 2 0V 11 12 The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 4 850 V
185. ed for logical high and low These can be set by knob or entered by keypad If limiting is on you will not be able to extend the voltages beyond the limits You can use the SELECT button to change High Level and Low Level into Amplitude and Offset Amplitude is the voltage difference between the levels Offset is the voltage level assigned to the midpoint between the levels The controls for level limits are located in the Levels Menu see Figure 2 29 Controls for voltage levels are also provided here The associated display graphically shows the levels and limits for each channel HFS 9000 User Manual Levels Voltage Bar HFS 9000 User Manual 1 mE ne Limit Brackets 2 Channel High Level Low Level B mWV 1 84 High Limit Low Limit au 2M View Channel Figure 2 29 The Levels Menu and Associated Display The Levels menu has these controls m Channel lets you set the channel that the other menu items control Use the SELECT button the knob or the PREVIOUS CHANNEL and NEXT CHANNEL buttons to select channels The currently selected channel is indicated in the associated level display by having a denser level bar and having a highlighted channel name The currently selected channel is also shown in the Channel menu item m High Level and Low Level are the voltage levels used for logical high and low These are the same controls provid
186. ed in the Pulse menu They can be set by knob or entered by keypad As you change these values the voltage bar in the associated display changes to match If limiting is on you will not be able to extend the voltage bar beyond the limit brackets You can use the SELECT button to change High Level and Low Level into Amplitude and Offset Amplitude is the voltage difference between the levels Offset is the voltage level assigned to the midpoint of the amplitude range m High Limit and Low Limit are the voltage limits to use when limiting is on These can be set by knob or entered by keypad As you change these values the limit brackets in the associated display change to match If limiting is on moving a bracket into the voltage bar will cause the bar to shrink 2 37 Levels m Limit sets limiting on or off When limiting is on any voltage levels that are outside the limits are reset to their respective limits Limiting also adjusts voltage levels values as you change the limits Turning limiting off does not restore the channel voltage levels to their previous unlimited values 2 38 HFS 9000 User Manual E d l Rr Phase Lock You can synchronize and lock the HFS 9000 to an external timing source connected to the PHASE LOCK IN connector This timing source then replaces the HFS 9000 internal clock You can run the HFS 9000 at frequencies that are power of two harmonics or sub harmonics of the phase lock
187. eeds to have some indication from the operator that the operator action has been completed and the program can continue the suite of tests The HFS 9000 supports this environment in two ways The front panel interface of the HFS 9000 can be locked out disabled and unlocked using commands sent from a remote controller or computer When the front panel is locked out the REMOTE light at the left of the display is lit However the SRQ button and the channel buttons on the pulse generator cards cannot be locked out These buttons are always operational regardless of the state of lockout m The operator can send a trigger to the controlling program by pressing the SRQ button just below the REMOTE light see Figure 2 26 HFS 9000 User Manual 2 31 GPIB REMOTE Light SRQ Button gt rewore en CD BE Oy _ REMOTE SRQ Button Light Figure 2 26 SRQ Button REMOTE Light Locations 2 32 When the program expects the operator to perform some action before it can continue it unlocks the front panel interface and displays a message to prompt the oper
188. el Channel An Operator Overview Menu Map Cont press SELECT to show the Pulse Menu Fulse Time Base Levels Menu Menu Menu Menu Vector Data Edit Data Fill Data Copy Menu Menu Menu Menu Cal Deskew Menu Save Recall Menu Cal Deskew Menu press SELECT to view the configuration On Bus Debug 1 on rf Self Test Calibrate Pretrigger fons Channel Chan Delay DATAG os R5 2328 Menu Parity Stop Bits Hone 1 EOL Delay Save Recall Menu Baud Rate Flagging Soft 2 6 HES 9000 User Manual Calibration The 9000 is shipped in a calibrated state with the outputs deskewed to the front panel Calibration settings are saved in a special non volatile memory which is separate from any other memory in the instrument Calibration adjusts the instrument to its internal voltage and timing references Calibrating the HFS 9000 HFS 9000 User Manual It is important to calibrate the HFS 9000 after the instrument has been repaired or after the instrument has been reconfigured by adding or changing cards It is also necessary to calibrate the HFS 9000 if you operate the instrument in an environment where the ambient temperature differs by more than 5 C from the temperature of the last calibration As a matter of routine you should calibrate the HFS 9000 every six months To calibrate the HFS 9000 use the Calib
189. el controls REM CMD CHR amp H11 CALL IBCMD BRDO CMD WRT fpan message The front panel controls are locked out CHR 10 press SRQ to continue CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT REM REM Wait for SRQ button to be pressed then unlock front panel controls REM CALL IBRSP TEKDEV1 SPR RQS amp H40 ReQuest Service bit IF SPR AND RQS lt gt RQS THEN 500 WRT fpan message CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT CALL IBLOC TEKDEV1 V 0 CALL IBSRE BRDO V END HFS 9000 User Manual 3 145 Programming Examples 3 146 HFS 9000 User Manual rr i Appendix A Accessories Standard Accessories HFS 9000 User Manual Some accessories are included with the HFS 9000 If you wish to purchase optional accessories or purchase additional standard accessories see a Tektronix products catalog or contact your local Tektronix field representative The HFS 9000 Stimulus System User Manual Tektronix part number 070 8365 01 is this manual HFS 9003 Power cord North American 120 V Tektronix part number 161 0066 00 HFS 9009 Power cord North American 120 V Tektronix part number 161 0213 00 SMA 50 Q coaxial cable 20 inches Tektronix part number 174 1427 00 SMA BNC Adapter Tektronix part number 015 0572 00 DB 9 to DB 25 cable Tektronix part number 012 1241 00 Zip lock pouch Tektronix part number 016 0537 00 HFS 9003 Type 3AG Fuse 5 A 250 V Tektronix part number 159
190. elected channel This performs the same functions as the Pulse Rate item in the front panel Pulse menu Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PRATe HALF NORMal QUARter EIGHth OFF PGEN x lt gt PRATe HFS 9000 User Manual 3 79 Commands Arguments Examples HALF NORMal Coane lt space gt Space QUARter sets the pulse rate to one quarter of normal HALF sets the pulse rate to half rate NORMal sets the pulse rate to normal EIGHth sets the pulse rate to one eighth of normal OFF turns the pulse rate off When the pulse rate is off the output voltage level is defined by PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LOW unless PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt POLarity is set to COMP in which case the output voltage is defined by PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HIGH PGENC CH1 PRAT HALF sets channel C1 s half mode on PGENA CH2 PRAT returns the frequency scale mode for channel A2 PGEN x CH n SIGNal 3 80 Related Commands Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt SIGNal Signal Name assigns a name to a channel The signal name is used for both display purposes and to link SIGNAL commands to a channel This performs the same function as the Signal Name item in the Signal menu SIGNal lt parameter gt SIGNal TYPE SIGNal SIGNal BDATA SIGNal BDATA FILL SIGNal DATA SIGNal DATA COPY SIGNal DATA SWAP SIGNAL DRADi x PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt SIGNal pin PGEN x
191. els 2 46 The channel boards provide two output connectors for each channel These provide both normal and logically inverted output and are labeled OUTPUT and OUTPUT Each output connector has a button to turn on or off its output and a light indicating whether or not its output is on You can also turn on or off the normal or inverted output of any channel using the Pulse menu items Output and Output Though the HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9PG2 can only generate pulses an HFS 9DG1 or HFS 9DG2 can generate five different types of signals Pulse NRZ Non Re turn to Zero RZ Return to Zero R1 Return to One and DC The signal type is assigned with the Signal Type menu item To set an HFS 9DGI or HFS 9DG2 to generate pulses select the channel using the Channel menu item select the Signal Type menu item then turn the knob to select the Pulse signal type The High Level and Low Level menu items give you control over the voltages to be used for logical high and logical low The Polarity item lets you invert the logical polarity of any channel You can use the SELECT button to change High Level and Low Level into Amplitude and Offset Amplitude is the voltage difference between the levels offset 15 the voltage level assigned to the midpoint between the levels HFS 9000 User Manual Pulse Generators The voltage range for HFS 9 pulse generator cards is 2 V to 2 6 V and 2 V to 5 5 V for HFS 9PG2 cards If limiting i
192. ency to 150 MHz If you left the Fine knob control on from Step 4 turn it off to set the frequency quickly You have now set up the HFS 9000 to enable the output of pulses You will see the results in the next part but first check to make sure your Time Base menu appears as shown in Figure 1 9 press SELECT FeriodbkFrequency Mode Frequency Count Qut Feriod nuto Burzst 5 1 Trigger In Trig Slope Trig Level PhaseLockIn Fositive 1 34 ort On Run Stop x Running Figure 1 9 The Time Base Menu After Adjustment HES 9000 User Manual Getting Started HFS 9000 User Manual The other settings do not require adjustment for this tutorial example Since the HFS 9000 is in Auto Burst mode no input trigger is needed to generate pulses The UNDO Button Whenever you change a setting the HFS 9000 remembers the old setting as well Should you then change your mind you can press the UNDO button The UNDO button is located to the right of the display panel Pressing the UNDO button twice cancels the undo 10 Press the UNDO button Note that the original frequency setting of 160 MHz is restored 11 Press the UNDO button again Note that your changed value 150 MHz is returned Getting Started Part 3 Turn On Pulse pulse and data time generators all synchronized by the time base but Output currently none of the pulse or data time generator channels are switched on You can turn on any channel from the Pu
193. ent to the HFS 9000 through a programming interface either GPIB or RS 232 C Set commands direct the HFS 9000 to perform some action See also Query Commands Glossary 5 Glossary Glossary 6 Setting The state of all parameters and switches Several settings may be saved and individually recalled later Startup Delay A fixed time interval between the trigger event and the time zero reference Stop Bits In RS 232 C communications extra synchronizing bits appended to the data stream SRQ Service Request On a GPIB bus a signal that requests an asynchronous event Syntax The grammatical rules by which programming commands are constructed Tek Codes and Formats A standard implementation of programming commands that ensures similar commandis for similar functions and ensures programming command compatibility among instruments Talker A device on a GPIB bus that sends messages See also Listener Terminal Emulation Using a program on a computer to simulate a simple terminal running an RS 232 C interface Time Base The circuitry that governs all timed events in the HFS 9000 The time base defines pulse windows which are the spans of time within which pulse generators generate a single pulse Time Base Mode The way the time base interacts with trigger events and generates bursts of pulse windows See Auto Mode Auto Burst Mode and Burst Mode Time Zero Reference An imaginary time when pulse burst begins The beginn
194. entary output 3 64 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Examples PGENA CH1 COUT ON enables the OUTPUT channel of channel A1 PGENB CH2 COUT queries the OUTPUT channel of channel B2 PGEN x CH n CVlew PGEN x CH n CVIew Channel View controls whether channels are displayed individually as a channel or displayed as a signal a bus This performs the same function as the View item in the Signal Data Fill Data Copy and Vector menus Syntax X PGEN x CH n CVIew GROup CHANnel PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt CVIew lt space gt Arguments GROUP sets the channel display so that signals are viewed by their name CHANnel sets the channel display so that signals are viewed individually Examples PGENA CH1 CVIEW GROUP sets the display of channel A1 to group the group will be displayed by name rather than by card and channel number PGENA CVIEW returns the display setting for channel A1 PGEN x CH n DATA PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA Data Input Output provides ascii encoded data input output for a single channel Only binary ascii is supported by this command octal and hexadecimal data input output more appropriate for bus oriented data is supported by the VECTOR commands Related Commands VECTor IOFormat VECTor DATA HFS 9000 User Manual 3 65 Commands Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA lt address gt lt count gt lt ascii data PGEN lt x gt
195. enu Out Period menu item lets you specify which pulse window in the burst will generate the output trigger For example an out period setting of 16 will generate an output trigger at the beginning of the sixteenth pulse window Also the trigger out signal tracks the slowest channel If you engage the Half Quarter or Eighth Rate modes set with the Pulse Rate menu item be aware of the effect this will have on the trigger out signal Trigger Out timing is modified by the Cal Deskew menu Pretrigger item The default pretrigger setting of 70 ns means that the trigger out signal appears 70 ns before the beginning of the pulse window NOTE The beginning of the pulse window does not necessarily coincide with the leading edge of any generated pulse The Pulse menu lets you specify the timing of each pulse leading edge relative to the beginning of the pulse window Whenever the time base is set to Auto mode the HFS 9000 generates a trigger out signal for each pulse window 2 65 Time Base 2 66 HFS 9000 User Manual Trigger The time base of the HFS 9000 can be externally triggered and can be phase locked to an external signal The HFS 9000 can also provide an external trigger signal for other instruments Timing and Trigger Relationships Trigger In HFS 9000 User Manual The time base specifies when the pulse generator will create pulses relative to a trigger event detected at the TRIGGER IN connector The timing setting item
196. er ESER The ESER see Figure 3 14 controls which types of events are summarized by the Event Status Bit ESB in the SBR 3 131 Status and Events The Enable Registers and the PSC Command 3 132 Use the ESE command to set the bits in the ESER and the ESE query to read it 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CME EXE DDE QYE OPC Figure 3 14 The Event Status Enable Register ESER The Service Request Enable Register SRER The SRER see Figure 3 15 controls which bits in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized by the Master Status Summary MSS bit Use the SRE command to set the SRER Use the SRE query to read it The RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte Register is read with a Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes back to a zero 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ESB MAV x Figure 3 15 The Service Request Enable Register SRER The PSC command controls the contents of the Enable Registers at power on Sending PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows m DESER 255 equivalent to a DESE 255 command m FSER 0 equivalent to an ESE 0 command m SRER 0 equivalent to an SRE command Sending PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in non volatile memory through a power cycle NOTE To enable the PON Power On event to generate a Service Request send PSC 0 us
197. er Manual Appendix B Specifications HFS 9000 User Manual Table 31 Typical Characteristics Performance to External Frequency Reference Name PHASE LOCK IN amplitude range PHASE LOCK IN transition time requirement Description 0 8 V to 1 0 V peak to peak 20 to 80 in lt 10 ns FRAME SYNC IN signal level Setup time rising edge of FRAME SYNC IN signal to rising edge of PHASE LOCK IN Hold time high level of FRAME SYNC IN after rising edge of PHASE LOCK IN 1 810 V lt Vow 1 475 V 1 165 V lt Vhigh lt 0 810 V standard 100 K ECL levels 650 ps minimum 650 ps minimum Time from frame sync qualified phase lock clock cycle to time zero reference 70 ns minimum 130 ns Table B 32 Typical Characteristics Transducer In Performance Name TRANSDUCER IN useful fre quency range TRANSDUCER IN amplitude requirement Description HFS 9PG1 25 MHz to gt 1 GHz HFS 9PG2 5 MHz to 300 MHz 1 0 V to 1 5 V peak to peak Table B 33 Typical Characteristics Trigger In Performance Name Description Input resistance 500 Trigger level accuracy 100 mV 5 of trigger level Trigger input rise fall time re 10 ns quirement Minimum trigger input pulse lns width Trigger sensitivity lt 500 mV Time from trigger in to time zero reference 70 ns minimum 130 ns typical B 13 Appendix B Specifications Table 34 Typical Characteristics Tr
198. eral pulse or data time generation channels but they are all governed by a single time base The next several steps set up the time base to trigger itself repeatedly and to have the time base specify a predeter mined number of pulses from the pulse or data time generators The controls for the time base are found in the Time Base menu shown in Figure 1 6 1 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the Time Base menu then press the SELECT button to display the Time Base menu E Time Base Menu m press SELECT kbk uto Burst Auto Burst Trig Auta Mode Feriod Count Qut Feriod Auta ans 64 1 Trigger In Trig Slope Trig Level PhaseLockIn Fositive 1 34 Runs M Running Figure 1 6 The Time Base Menu The highlighted menu item is Mode which you need to set for this example The time base normally waits for a trigger event then specifies Count number of pulses to be generated After that the time base pauses for a re arm time and then waits for the next trigger event The display screen above the Time Base menu graphically depicts this sequence see Fig ure 1 7 Trigger In ni Trigger ut 2 2 Outputs Figure 1 7 Time Base Relationships 1 6 HFS 9000 User Manual Getting Started HFS 9000 User Manual The Mode control has four possible settings m Burst mode produces a burst of pulses whenever a trigger event is detected
199. ery vector receives a different value 000003 0011 000004 Lijoida 000005 oidd ooo 0110 0111 anonoos Hogi 1010 000011 1011 0200212 Hidd 000013 1101 Data Edit Menu 3 Figure 2 20 A Block Filled with Fill Scale Set to 1 2 22 HFS 9000 User Manual Data Time Generators Press Select to view other Vectors umar 000000 000001 000002 000003 000004 L 000005 000006 000007 000008 000009 000010 000011 000012 000013 Fill Scale was set to 3 when this block was filled Thus each group of 3 vectors receives the same value C XO X XD XD ID ID E ES OS O8 68 Bate Data Edit Menu Figure 2 21 A Block Filled with Fill Scale Set to 3 m Selecting Fill Block with Method fills the Block using the parameters set in Constant Method and Fill Scale Copying Vector Data You can also copy data in one Block to another using the Data Copy Menu see Figure 2 22 The Data Copy menu provides the capability to copy a block of data from one channel to another or to duplicate a block of data within the same channel You can also swap blocks of data between channels or within the same channel Aside from copying blocks of data the Data Copy Menu can be used to insert a new vector into a Block To insert a new vector into a Block just copy the Block to a Dest Start vector one higher th
200. escription of the messages displayed on the front panel see Appendix D Error Messages For most messages a secondary message from the HFS 9000 gives more detail about the cause of the error or the meaning of the message This message is part of the message string and is separated from the main message by a semicolon Each message is the result of an event Each type of event sets a specific bit in the SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER Thus each message is associated with a specific SESR bit In the tables that follow the associated SESR bit is specified in the table title with exceptions noted with the error message text Table 3 13 shows the messages when the system has no events or status to report These have no associated SESR bit Table 3 13 No Event Messages Code Message 0 No events to report queue empty 1 No events to report new events pending ESR Table 3 14 shows the error messages generated by improper command syntax Check that the command is properly formatted and that it follows the rules in the Command Syntax chapter starting on page 3 9 Table 3 14 Command Error Messages CME Bit 5 Code Message 100 Command error 101 Invalid character 102 Syntax error 103 Invalid message or unit separator 104 Data type error 105 GET not allowed 106 Invalid program data separator 108 Parameter not allowed 109 Missing parameter 110 Command header error 3 135 Stat
201. eset you want using the knob or arrow buttons and press the Select button to perform the reset m Purging stored settings operates identically to a Factory reset and does not perform a total instrument reset Purging calibration and stored settings performs the total instrument reset Cancel performs no reset NOTE After a total instrument reset the HFS 9000 is uncalibrated The calibration values stored in calibration memory are default values only You must Calibrate the instrument before using it 2 52 HFS 9000 User Manual RS 232 C HFS 9000 User Manual You can use the serial port see Figure 2 37 to control the HFS 9000 from a remote terminal or computer that uses an Standard RS 232 C interface The Reference section of this manual gives you step by step details of how to set up the HFS 9000 for remote operation The following information describes the settings and controls that affect RS 232 C operation 2 53 RS 232 C Qr oO oo oO oO CG SERIAL PORT Connector SERIAL PORT Connector BARS Figure 2 37 SERIAL PORT Connector Location 2 54 HFS 9000 User Manual RS 232 C The
202. eturns the instrument settings to those listed under the FACTORY command see page 3 36 The RST command does not alter the following The state of the RS 232 C or IEEE 488 1 interfaces The selected IEEE 488 1 address of the HFS 9000 Calibration data that affects device specifications The Output Queue The Standard Status Register Enable setting The Standard Event Status Enable setting The Power on status clear flag setting Alias definitions Stored settings 3 95 Commands SAV No Query Form The SAV Save command stores the state of the HFS 9000 into a selected local memory This performs the same function as the Save item in the front panel Save Recall menu You can later use the RCL command to restore the HFS 9000 to this saved state Related Commands RCL PURGE Syntax SAV lt NRf gt Arguments lt NRf gt is a value in the range from 1 to 30 Using an out of range value causes an execution error Examples SAV 2 saves the current settings into local memory 2 SIGNal lt parameter gt SIGNal lt parameter gt provides a method of setting pulse parameters by using signal names Please refer to each individual pulse parameter supported for more information on parameter arguments Supported Commands AMPLitude CDELay COUTput DCYCle HIGH HLIMit LDELay LHOLd LIMit LLIMit LOW LVIew OFFSet OUTPut PHASe POLarity PRATe TDELay THOLd TRANsition WIDTh Syntax SIGNal par
203. f data Parity NONE uses no parity and eight bits of data The number of data and parity bits per character is eight regardless of the parity setting Examples RS232 PAR ODD sets the RS 232 C parity to odd RS232 PAR might return the string EVEN showing that the RS 232 C parity is set to even RS232 SBITs RS232 SBITS Stop Bits sets and queries the RS 232 C stop bits This performs the same function as the Stop Bits item in the front panel RS 232 menu Syntax RS232 SBITs 1 1 5 2 RS232 SBITs lt space gt Arguments 1 sets the RS 232 C stop bits to 1 1 5 sets the RS 232 C stop bits to 1 5 2 sets the RS 232 C stop bits to 2 Examples RS232 SBIT 1 5 sets the RS 232 C stop bits to 1 5 RS232 SBIT might return the value 2 showing that the RS 232 C stop bits are set to 2 3 94 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands RST No Query Form Related Commands Syntax HFS 9000 User Manual The RST Reset command returns the HFS 9000 to a known set of instrument settings but does not purge any aliases or stored settings This performs the same function as the Reset item in the front panel Save Recall menu The only difference between factory FACTORY command and RST is that RST does not purge any stored settings FACTORY PSC RST RST does the following Puts the HFS 9000 into the Operation Complete Command Idle State Puts the HFS 9000 into the Operation Complete Query Idle State R
204. f level 50 mV gt 1 V or high level gt 0 V Low level accuracy amplitude gt 1 V or high level gt 0 Transition time 2096 to 8096 amplitude lt 1 V 1 If amplitude lt 1 V and high level lt 0 V accuracy typically meets the specification but is not guaranteed 2 of high level 2 of amplitude 50 mV lt 200 ps Table B 17 Warranted Characteristics HFS 9PG2 Output Performance Name Description 2 of level 50 mV 2 of high level 2 of amplitude 50 mV 10 of setting 300 ps High level accuracy Low level accuracy Transition time accuracy 2096 to 80 amplitude lt 1 V Table B 18 Warranted Characteristics HFS 9DG1 Output Performance Name Description High level accuracy amplitude 2 of level 50 mV gt 0 5 V Low level accuracy amplitude 2 of high level 2 of amplitude 50 mV 20 5 V Transition time 20 to 80 lt 250 ps amplitude lt 1 V 1 If amplitude lt 0 5 V accuracy typically meets the specification but is not guaranteed B 8 HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix B Specifications HFS 9000 User Manual Table B 19 Warranted Characteristics HFS 9DG2 Output Performance Name Description High level accuracy amplitude 296 of level 50 mV gt 0 5 V Low level accuracy amplitude gt 0 5 V 2 of high level 2 of amplitude 50 mV Transition time accuracy 20 to 80 amplitude lt 1 V If amplit
205. ft column is achieved on the DSO Then observe the Width item setting on the HFS 9000 that achieved this result Verify that the HFS 9000 value is within the limits specified in the middle and right columns You may need to adjust the DSO horizontal position to keep the pulse on the screen Table F 27 Width Variance Limits for HFS 9PG1 DSO WIDTH HFS 9000 Width HFS 9000 Width Measurement Readout Setting Minimum Setting Maximum 500 ps 195 ps 805 ps 150 ps 443 ps 1 06 ns lns 690 ps 1 31 ns F 29 Appendix Performance Verification Table F 28 Width Variance Limits for HFS 9DG1 DSO WIDTH HFS 9000 Width HFS 9000 Width Measurement Readout Setting Minimum Setting Maximum 650 ps 594 ps 132 ps 150 ps 693 ps 833 ps 1 5 940 1 085 ns 14 Refer to Tables F 29 30 and 31 as appropriate and set each of the specified Pulse menu Width settings listed in the left column For each Width setting verify that the DSO WIDTH measurement falls within the limits specified in the middle and right columns Adjust the horizontal time division as necessary to keep a full pulse displayed on screen Table F 29 Width Limits for HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9PG2 DSO WIDTH Measurement Minimum HFS 9000 Pulse Menu DSO WIDTH Width Setting Measurement Maximum 5 ns 4 65 ns 4 45 ns 5 35 ns 10 ns 9 60 ns 9 40 ns 10 4 ns 500 ns 494 7 ns 494 7 ns 505 3 ns 1 us 990 ns 990 ns 1 01 us Table F 30 Width Limits for H
206. ft right arrow keys FPAN ADVANCE RIGHT sets the auto advance direction to the right FPAN ADVANCE returns the auto advance direction FPAN BEND sets the block end address The block end address is a parameter that is used by the Fill Block with Method and Clear Block items in the Data Fill menu FPAN BEND lt address gt FPAN BEND p space address address specifies the address of the block end Valid values for this parameter are 0 to 65535 The current value is displayed in the argument field of the Block End item in the front panel Data Fill and Data Copy menus FPAN BEND 127 sets the block end address to 127 FPAN BEND returns the block end address 3 39 Commands FPAN BHOLd Syntax Arguments Examples FPAN BSIZe Syntax Arguments 3 40 FPAN BHOL4d Block Hold specifies whether the end of the block is controled by the Block End value or the Block Size value This performs the same functions as the Block Size Block End item in the front panel Data Fill and Data Copy menus FPAN BHOLd BEND BSIZe FPAN BHOLd emen BEND specifies that the block end value establishes the end of the block BSIZe specifies that the block size value establishes the end of the block FPAN BSIZE sets the block end hold to size FPAN BHOLD returns the block hold setting FPAN BSIZe Set Block Size sets the block size The block size is a parameter that is utilized
207. g of the pulse window and the beginning of the pulse in terms of percentage of the pulse window See also Duty Cycle Lead Delay Trail Delay and Width Phase Lock A means of using an external signal as the time base clock instead of using the internal HFS 9000 clock Pretrigger A deskew applied to the output trigger to make it occur before it normally would Pretrigger compensates for cabling delays and input delays in the instrument being triggered Programming Command A directive sent to the HFS 9000 through a programming interface either GPIB or RS 232 C Commands are of two types set commands and query commands Set commands direct to the HFS9000 to perform some action Query commands initiate a response message from the HFS 9000 Pulse Window A span of time defined by the time base during which the pulse generators produce a single pulse Query Commands A directive sent to the HFS 9000 through a programming interface either GPIB or RS 232 C Query commands initiate a response message from the HFS 9000 See also Set Commands Reset Restoring the HFS 9000 to a known state Contrast with Factory RS 232 C An interface that can connect the HFS 9000 to a computer or terminal so that the instrument can be remotely controlled Self Test A suite of automated tests that verify proper functioning of the HFS 9000 circuitry Serial Port The RS 232 C interface connector on the HFS 9000 front panel Set Commands A directive s
208. ground except as noted Name Description 10 ps One high limit and one low limit may be enabled or disabled together Transition time resolution Output limits Table B 5 Nominal Traits Time Base Name Description HFS 9PG1 HFS 9DG1 50 kHz to 630 MHz HFS 9PG2 HFS 9062 50 kHz to 300 MHz lt 0 1 of frequency setting half pulse rate 100 kHz quarter pulse rate 200 kHz eighth pulse rate 400 kHz User selectable from 1 to 65 536 Frequency range Frequency resolution Minimum frequency setting when using half quarter or eighth pulse rate modes Number of pulse periods in burst or auto burst modes Ifthe HFS 9PG2 or HFS 9062 is operated in half pulse rate mode frequency can be extended to 600 MHz for the HFS 9PG2 and 630 MHz for the HFS 9DG2 All pulse rate modes result in 50 kHz output frequency Table B 6 Nominal Traits Performance to External Frequency Reference Name Description PHASE LOCK IN inputcharac 0 1 uF DC blocking capacitor followed by 50 termination teristic to ground Any 2 multiple or sub multiple of the phase lock frequency that is within the allowed frequency range for the card being used Phase lock output frequency range FRAME SYNC IN Initiates a burst when using phase lock mode FRAME SYNC IN inputcharac 50 terminated to 2 V teristic B 4 HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix B Specifications HFS 9000 User Manual Table B 7
209. gs and purges all defined aliases and stored settings This performs the same function as the Factory item in the front panel Save Recall menu DESE ESE FPAN HEADER PGEN lt x gt PSC RST SRE TBAS VERBOSE FACTORY The FACTORY command does the following m Puts the HFS 9000 in the Operation Complete Command Idle State m Puts the HFS 9000 in the Operation Complete Query Idle State m Clears the Event Status Enable Register equivalent to the command ESE 0 m Clears the Service Request Enable Register equivalent to the command SRE 0 W Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to all enabled equivalent to the command DESE 255 W Sets the Power on status clear flag to TRUE equivalent to the command PSC 1 W Sets the Response Header Enable State to TRUE equivalent to the command HEADER 1 3 35 Commands 3 36 W Sets the Verbose Header State to TRUE equivalent to the command VERBOSE 1 Purges all aliases equivalent to the command ALIas DELEte ALL W Purges all stored settings W Sets the front panel as shown in Table 3 6 Table 3 6 FACTORY Front Panel Settings Front Panel Parameter Setting FPAN ADVance RIGHT FPAN BEND 0 FPAN BHOLd BEND FPAN BSIZe 0 FPAN BSTart 0 FPAN CONStant 1 FPAN COPies 1 FPAN CORDER Al A2 FPAN DITem Pulse Menu FPAN DMENu Main Menu FPAN DNCHannel 1 FPAN DNSTart 0 FPAN DVECtor 0 FPAN FSCale 1
210. gt CH lt n gt THOLd and PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay If THOLd does not equal TDELay then MAX sets PHASe as follows m PHASe 100 If THOLd equals TDELay then sets PHASe as follows m PHASe 100 channel period where channel period is TBAS PERiod if PGEN x CH n PRATe is either NORMal or OFF and channel period is 2 if PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PRATe is HALF lt NRf gt sets the phase to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the phase to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning 3 78 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Examples PGENA CH1 PHAS 10PCT sets the phase of channel A1 to 10 PGENC CH2 PHAS returns the phase of channel C2 PGEN x CH n POLarity PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt POLarity sets and queries the polarity of the selected channel This performs the same function as the Polarity item in the front panel Pulse menu Syntax X PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt POLarity NORMal COMPlement PGEN x lt gt POLari ty NORMa1 space COMPlement 3 POLarity Arguments NORM sets the polarity to normal COMP sets the polarity to complement Examples PGENA CH1 POL NORM sets the polarity of channel A1 to normal PGENB CH2 POL returns the polarity of channel B2 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PRATe PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PRATe Pulse Rate sets and queries the pulse rate mode of the s
211. he valid range for constant are dependent on the Data Radix For a binary data radix the valid range is 0 111111111111 For an octal data radix the valid range is 0 37777777777 For a hex data radix the valid range is 0O FFFFFFFF The value of this parameter is displayed in the argument field of the Constant item in the front panel Data Fill menu Examples FPAN CONSTANT HOOFF sets the constant to hex OOFF FPAN CONSTANT returns the constant value FPAN COPies FPAN COPies Copies Value specifies the Copies value This performs the same function as the Copies item in the front panel Data Fill menus Syntax FPAN COPies NRI FPAN COPies EL Arguments lt NR1 gt specifies the Copies value The valid range is 1 65535 Examples FPAN COPIES 20 sets the number of copies to 20 FPAN COPIES returns the copies value 3 42 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands FPAN CORDer FPAN CORDer Channel Display Order controls the display order of channels This performs the same function as the Move Up Down item in the front panel Signal menu Syntax FPAN CORDer lt channel gt channel FPAN CORDer COR sehanner mmi ERR Arguments channel lt 1 gt specifies the new order in which channels should be displayed Examples FPAN CORDER A1 A2 B p2 C1 C2 sets the display order to the default order FPAN CORDER 2 cy BO
212. icator 2 18 Low Level menu item 2 36 2 37 2 46 Low level view 2 36 2 46 3 75 Low Limit menu item 2 37 LRN query 3 56 Main menu 1 3 MAIN MENU button 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 4 Manual trigger 1 11 2 64 2 67 Simulation with command 3 114 3 116 MANUAL TRIGGER button 1 11 2 2 2 3 2 62 2 64 2 67 Manuals 1 2 5 2 6 Menu Cal Deskew 1 4 2 7 2 25 2 43 2 59 2 61 2 67 Data Copy 1 4 Data Edit 1 4 Data Fill 1 4 GPIB 1 4 3 4 Levels 1 4 2 36 Voltage diagram 2 36 Main 1 3 Navigation 2 4 Pulse 1 4 2 10 2 35 2 45 Timing diagram 2 45 RS 232 1 4 Save Recall 1 4 2 51 2 57 Signal 1 4 Time Base 1 4 2 40 2 61 2 67 Vector 1 4 Menu Item Copy Channel 2 50 Paste Channel 2 50 Menu item Address 2 33 3 4 Amplitude 2 36 2 46 Baud Rate 2 55 3 5 Blinking 2 48 2 64 Calibrate 2 7 Chan Delay 2 25 Channel 2 25 2 36 2 46 Count 1 6 1 7 2 49 2 62 Debug 2 33 2 56 3 5 3 6 Delay 2 56 3 6 Duty Cycle 2 48 Echo 2 56 3 5 EOL 2 56 3 6 Index 6 Factory 2 51 2 58 Flagging 2 55 3 5 Frequency 1 7 2 40 2 47 2 62 High Level 2 36 2 37 2 46 High Limit 2 37 Limit 2 37 Low Level 2 36 2 37 2 46 Low Limit 2 37 Mode 1 6 2 61 2 68 Offset 2 36 2 46 On Bus 2 33 3 4 Out Period 2 65 2 68 Output 2 10 2 14 2 46 Output 2 10 2 14 2 46 Parity 2
213. ifferent storage cell that has a box around it indicating that itis not empty There is no previous operation to be undone NOTE Whenever you change menu display the queue of previous operations is emptied If you press the UNDO button immediately after changing menu display you will see this error message This channel s transition time is not variable Time Base failed to stop To use manual trigger set Time Base mode to Burst You cannot adjustthe transition time of High S peed pulse generator channels The requested adjustment has been ignored Your HFS 9000 needs repair Manual triggering cannot be used in Auto or Auto Burst time base modes Setthe mode item in the Time Base menu to Burst Use the Knob or Keypad to modify the highlighted item The highlighted menu item cannot be adjusted using the SELECT button Value rounded to a legal setting Value too large decreased to maximum Value too small increased to minimum The value you entered was notan exact value to which a parameter can be set You need not do anything it has been setto the nearest value that is acceptable The maximum value for a parameter is smaller than the value you entered You need not do anything the value has been adjusted to the maximum allowable value The minimum value for a parameter is larger than the value you entered You need not do anything the value has been adjusted to the minimum allowable value
214. ification 12 Repeat steps 1 through 11 for each of the HFS 9PG2 or HFS 9DG2 card channels in the system For Not Output channels set Output off and Output on 13 Disconnect test setup Edge Placement Checks These checks verify the accuracy of the pulse delays and pulse widths You will check each HFS 9000 channel in turn A reference to channel is a reference to the particular channel being checked in this repetition Equipment One Tektronix 11801B Digital Sampling Oscilloscope or CS A803A Required Communication Signal Analyzer item 5 with sampling head item 6 Two SMA coaxial cables item 8 One threaded SMA female to SMA male slip on connector item 11 1 Reset the HFS 9000 then make the settings according to Table F 24 Table F 24 Settings for Edge Placement Checks Control Setting Pulse menu Channel The channel under test Pulse menu High Level Press SELECT to change the High Level item to an Amplitude item and the Low Level item to an Offset item Pulse menu Amplitude 1 0V Pulse menu Offset 0v Pulse menu Period Press SELECT to change the Period item to a Frequency item Pulse menu Frequency 100 kHz Pulse menu Output On 2 Ifthe channel is a Variable Rate HFS 9PG2 or HFS 9DG2 channel set transition to the lowest fastest rise time possible A quick way to do this is to enter 0 on the numeric keypad 3 Connect an SMA cable from the HFS 9000 TRIGGER OUT
215. ification Sequence Self Test HFS 9000 User Manual The performance verification procedure consists of the following steps performed in the following order 1 Perform the HFS 9000 internal self test that follows this list of steps If the self test indicates problems refer to the Maintenance section in the Service Manual to repair the instrument 2 Perform the internal calibration on page F 12 if the HFS 9000 has not been recalibrated within the last six months or if the HFS 9000 has been reconfigured with different cards or has been adjusted or repaired 3 Follow the procedures in the Check Procedures section beginning on page F 13 to verify that the HFS 9000 performs to every specification The HFS 9000 is equipped with self test diagnostic routines that execute automatically when you switch the power on You may also manually select the diagnostic routines Use the following procedure to manually select the diagnostic routines 1 Press MAIN MENU and select Cal Deskew Menu 2 Select Self Test The HFS 9000 display indicates the circuits under test as it proceeds through the diagnostics The HFS 9000 returns to normal operating mode after successfully completing the diagnostics If the HFS 9000 detects a failure it suspends normal operation and displays an error code see the Maintenance section in the Service Manual for further information The display presents two choices Press any button other than the SELECT bu
216. igger Out Performance Name Pretrigger resolution Description 250 ps Table B 35 Typical Characteristics Power Requirements Name Line Voltage HFS 9003 Description 90 VACpms to 130 or 180 VACpms to 250 5 range switched automatically HFS 9009 Description 90 VACgus to 104 VACR ms with maximum 7 cards installed 104 VACpms to 132 VACams with maximum 9 cards installed or 180 to 250 range Switched automatically Line frequency Power consumption Inrush surge current 48 Hz to 63 Hz 540 W maximum 1190 W with maximum of 9 cards installed 50 A maximum up to 40 ms at 110 VAC 100 A maximum up to 40 ms at 220 VAC HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix C Interface Specifications This appendix describes details of the remote interfaces of the Stimulus System both the serial port RS 232 C and GPIB Normally you will not need this information to use the HFS 9000 but the information is useful when connecting to controllers of unusual configuration This appendix also contains general information that pertains to programming with both interfaces including a chart of the ASCII character set and a list of reserved words Interface Messages Table C 1 shows the standard interface messages that are supported by the HFS 9000 Table C 1 HFS 9000 Standard Interface Messages Message GPIB RS 232 C DCL Yes Yes
217. ighlighted menu item cannot be adjusted using the knob or numeric keypad Use the SELECT button to change the menu item to a different name for the same parameter for example to change Frequency to Period The knob or keypad cannot be used to do this Press Select to perform the highlighted action Press Select to show the high lighted menu Stored setting memory is cor rupted The knob or keypad cannot be used to initiate the action selected in the highlighted menu item When the main menu is displayed only the SELECT button can display the highlighted menu The knob or keypad cannot be used The memory holding the stored settings has lost the settings Perform a Factory reset to clear all stored settings and clean up the settings memory Appendix D Error Messages Table D 1 Displayed Error Messages Cont Message That card s identifier memory is corrupted Explanation The memory holding the card identifier string has lost its information This string cannot be established from the front panel Use a GPIB or RS 232 C device to execute the CAL CID command and re establish the card identifier string The displayed menu does not select channels There is no stored setting by that number There is nothing to undo The PREVIOUS CHANNEL and NEXT CHANNEL buttons do not work with the displayed menu There is no stored setting in the storage cell you have specified to recall settings from Select a d
218. ime Base Menu Mode Feriod Count Qut Feriod Burst Sns Trigger In Trig Slope Trig Level PhaseLockIn Fositive 1 34 ort Run Stop __ Running Figure 2 42 The Timing Diagram Illustrating the Count Parameter HFS 9000 User Manual Time Base Auto Burst Mode Auto Mode Trig Auto Mode Auto burst mode operates much the same as burst mode except that the HFS 9000 creates its own trigger events There is a fixed delay of approximately 15 us between pulse bursts Auto mode operates as a continuous source of pulse windows without waiting for any trigger events or startup delays in the series of pulses In Trig Auto the output is the same as with Auto mode but output does not begin until a trigger event is received The HFS 9000 waits for a trigger event at the TRIGGER IN connector a remote TRG command or a press of the MANUAL TRIGGER button Stopping the Time Base Single Step Operation HFS 9000 User Manual You can stop the time base with the Run Stop menu item To stop the time base select the Run Stop menu item and turn the knob to select off This menu item performs the same function as the front panel RUN STOP button When the time base stops the logic state of the outputs depends on the mode the time base is in Table 2 2 shows the logic state of the output according to what time base mode the instrument is in Table 2 2 Logic State of Outputs When Time Base Stopped Time Base Mode Output State
219. in phase lock mode setting Trigger In to on enables the FRAME SYNC IN connector This is useful when you want to use the MANUAL TRIGGER button to trigger pulse bursts m Trig Slope can be set to positive or negative When Trig Slope is set to positive a trigger event occurs on a positive going edge on the trigger in signal as it passes through the voltage level specified by Trig Level When Trig Slope is set to negative a trigger event occurs on a negative going edge m Trig Level lets you set the voltage level at which a trigger events occur m PhaseLockIn lets you synchronize and lock in the HFS 9000 to an external timing source connected to the PHASE LOCK IN and FRAME SYNC IN connectors For complete information about using phase lock see the Phase Lock section on page 2 39 When the HFS 9000 is in Burst or Trig Auto mode set using the Time Base menu Mode item you can use the MANUAL TRIGGER button to trigger the generation of pulse bursts If you have a trigger signal connected to the TRIGGER IN connector you do not have to disconnect it to use manual triggering Instead turn off the trigger in signal by setting the Time Base menu Trigger In item to off HFS 9000 User Manual Time Base Trigger Out HFS 9000 User Manual You can set the HFS 9000 to produce an external trigger signal at the TRIG GER OUT connector Use this output signal to trigger an external detection device such as an oscilloscope The Time Base m
220. ing of the first pulse window of a burst Chan Delay allows the adjustment of the time zero references for multiple channels to be simultaneous See Chan Delay and Deskew Trail Delay The time between the beginning of a pulse window and the second edge of the generated pulse See Duty Cycle Lead Delay Phase and Width Transducer Mode A mode where a channel output timing is governed solely by a signal applied to the channel Transducer In connector HFS 9000 User Manual Glossary HFS 9000 User Manual Transition Var Rate pulse cards only The rise time and fall time of transitions between logic levels Trigger In An external signal that initiates the time base burst of pulse windows Trigger Out A signal generated by the HFS 9000 that is synchronous with a particular pulse window in a burst Var Rate Pulse Generator Card A pulse generator card having variable transition time rise and fall time capability Channels on the var rate pulse generator card have limited frequency capability Contrast with High Speed Pulse Generator Card Width The time between the first and second edges of a generated pulse See Duty Cycle Lead Delay Phase and Trail Delay Window A span of time defined by the time base during which the pulse generators produce a single pulse XON XOFF An RS 232 C flagging standard to prevent buffer overflow Two ASCII characters are used DC3 Control S or hex 11 flags the sending device to stop trans
221. ing to 2 V Both true and complement outputs must be terminated to the same voltage Output level range will double until certain internal limits are achieved Since the programmed specified and displayed output levels do not match the actual output levels level accuracy specifications do not apply when terminating to a high impedance load Because of the larger voltage swings associated with doubled level range output transition time specifications do not apply when driving a high impedance load One high limit and one low limit may be enabled or disabled together Table 4 Nominal Traits HFS 9062 Output Performance Each channel and complement driving a 50 Q load to ground except as noted Name Description Maximum high level 5 50 V Minimum low level 2 00 V Maximum amplitude 5 50 V Minimum amplitude 0 01 V Level resolution 0 01 V Operation when terminated through 50 Q to 2 V Transition time 2096 to 8096 Output levels will be approximately 1 V more negative than the values programmed specified and displayed Actual output levels more negative than 2 V may cause malfunction Level accuracy specifications do not apply when terminating to 2 V Both true and complement outputs must be terminated to the same voltage Variable from 800 ps to 6 ns Appendix B Specifications Table B 4 Nominal Traits HFS 9DG2 Output Performance Cont Each channel and complement driving a 50 load to
222. is 01010101010101 SIGNal CVIew Signal Channel View controls whether signals are displayed individually as a channel or displayed as a group a bus This performs the same function as the View item in the Signal Data Fill Data Copy and Vector menus PGEN x lt gt CVIew SIGNal CVIew lt signal gt GROup CHANnel SIGNal CVIew signal space signal oa lt signal gt lt space gt signal is the name of the signal HES 9000 User Manual Commands GROup sets the channel display so that signals are viewed by their name lt 1 gt sets the channel display so that signals are viewed individually Examples SIGNAL CVIEW A GROUP sets the display of bus A to group the group will be displayed by name rather than by card and channel number SIGNAL CVIEW returns the display setting for signal Clk SIGNal DATA SIGNal DATA Signal Data Input Output provides ascii encoded data input out put for a single pin Only binary ascii is supported by this command octal and hexadecimal data input output more appropriate for bus oriented data is supported by the VECTOR commands Related Commands VECTor IOFormat VECTor DATA Syntax SIGNal DATA lt pin gt lt address gt lt count gt lt ascii data SIGNal DATA lt pin gt lt address gt lt count gt space xaddress gt C lt count gt ascii da
223. l 1V TT 5ns 4200 Jo 5 800 Complement 1V Tr 5ns 4200 5 800 Edge Placement Pulse Delay Time 1 of Lead Delay Chan Delay 300 ps Output Normal j 10p 20 _________ _______ 401 Chanel b500ps 1 195 nl 805 re ar esa 1 310 aeneo 5 350 ortum 10 400 50 80 eee 101 30 Not Output Normal 100 ps z2013 E xen eene Nita Rete 401 Channel 500 ps MOS We es test crt 805 1 5 07090 Wi r 1 310 5 ns 4650 5 350 10 ns 9600 0 10 400 50 ns 4920 ELS xx 50 80 100 ns 98 70 101 30 HFS 9000 User Manual F 9 Appendix Performance Verification Table F 6 Test Record for HFS 9PG2 Card Cont Channel Page of Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH Date of Calibration Performance Test Technician Edge Placement Pulse Width Limits 1 of width 300 ps 500 ps for widths lt 20 ns 1 of width 300 ps for widths gt 20 ns Output Normal Channel Not Output Normal Channel Frequency Accuracy 1 Output Nominal HFS Setting Channel Output Nominal 2 F 10 Nominal Minimum incoming Outgoing Maximum 5 350 10 400 50 80 101 30 505 3 1 010 5 350 10 400 50 80 101 30 505 3 1 010 50 50 163 6 164 6 202 0 218 7 235 3 252 5 269 2 285 8 303 0 HES 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification Ver
224. l is off Output Off Turn off specified channel equivalent to the OUTPUT button when the channel is on Output On Turn on specified channel inverted output equivalent to the OUTPUT button when the channel is off Output Off Turn off specified channel inverted output equivalent to the OUTPUT button when the channel is on FPAN KEY FP 6 presses the front panel button 6 FPAN KEY FP Knob 3 turns the knob 3 clicks counter clockwise FPAN KEY Al Output On puts the channel A1 button Output in the ON position FPAN KEY returns the oldest entry in a FIFO queue of the last 20 button presses or knob turns If the FIFO queue is empty the string FPAN KEY FP NONE is returned FPAN KRESolution Knob Resolution Syntax HES 9000 User Manual FPAN KRESolution sets and queries the resolution of the front panel knob This performs the same function as pressing the Fine button above the front panel knob FPAN KRESolution COARse FINE FPAN KRESolution 3 51 Commands Arguments Examples KRESolution bmi COARse sets the knob resolution to Coarse FINE sets the knob resolution to Fine FPAN KRES FINE sets knob resolution to Fine FPAN KRES returns the current knob resolution FPAN MESSage No Query Form Syntax Arguments Examples FPAN METHod 3 52 FPAN MESSage sets a message that appears on the front panel FPAN MESS
225. lay lets you adjust the delay for each channel from 60 ns to 2 us This value is added to the 100 ns internal delay In the Cal Deskew menu the Channel menu item lets you set which channel the Chan Delay menu item controls Use the SELECT button or the knob to select the channel Once you have set the desired channel you can set the channel delay for that channel An alternate method of channel selection is to use the NEXT CHANNEL and PREVIOUS CHANNEL buttons next to the display 2 25 Deskew 2 26 Before Deskew Long Cable _ LI LI LI Short Cable Long Cable LI L Short Cable Chan Delay added to channel with short cable to synchronize pulse outputs Figure 2 24 Deskewing Channels Follow this sequence to deskew several channels so that they deliver pulses simultaneously to your device under test 1 Connect the generator channels to the device under test using the exact cabling that you will use in the actual testing Set the Chan Delay of each channel to zero Turn on pulse output for each channel you are using On each channel set the Lead Delay to zero or the Phase to 0 Set the Count to 1 Using an oscilloscope measure the time between the trigger event on the trigger signal and the rising edge of the pulse of each channel Note which channel has the longest time delay this is the reference channel For each channel
226. le line local lockout is reset automatically Refer to the documentation on your controller to determine how you control the remote enable line m LLO The HFS 9000 is in local lockout mode The front panel is inactive when both the LLO command is received and REM remote enable is asserted Use the LLO command to assert local lockout mode Once local lockout mode is asserted you can reset it by de asserting remote enable ATN The attention line is asserted low on the GPIB This means that the controller is sending an interface command on the bus When not asserted the data I O lines are carrying data LADS The HFS 9000 is addressed on the GPIB to listen W TADS The HFS 9000 is addressed on the GPIB to talk m RS232 Error An error has occurred during I O on the RS 232 C interface Check the RS 232 C settings especially Baud Rate Parity and Stop Bits This error flag can also occur when the input buffer has overflowed which HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix C Interface Specifications may indicate the controller failing to acknowledge that the HFS 9000 has flagged busy by sending an XOff character See XOff gt below You can clear the RS232 Error flag by turning Debug off and then on m gt An character has been received by the HFS 9000 on the RS 232 C controller The HFS 9000 has responded by suspending output When the HFS 9000 receives an XOn character output will resume m gt The HFS 9000
227. lize reset the pulse generator REM WRT rst header on verbose CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT REM REM Set up the time base REM WRT fpan dmenu Time Base Menu CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT WRT tbas mode burst period lus count 10 tout per 5 CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT REM REM Set up channels Al and A2 REM WRT fpan dmenu Pulse Menu CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT WRT pgena chl high 1v low 1v ldel 250ns thold width width 250ns CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT WRT pgena ch2 high 2v low Ov ldel 100ns thold width width 350ns CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT WRT pgena chl output on pgena ch2 output on CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT REM REM Wait for above setups to complete REM WRT opc CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT RD SPACE 64 CALL IBRD TEKDEV1 RD REM REM Trigger the burst of pulses when requested REM INPUT Press ENTER to trigger the burst of pulses A CALL IBTRG TEKDEV1 END HES 9000 User Manual Programming Examples Example 2 Command Query Usage with Error Handling HFS 9000 User Manual The second example illustrates the use of the status and event system to query the HFS 9000 and to read error messages The program reads and executes commands or queries that you type on the PC keyboard If the command you type generates messages or a query response they are displayed on the PC screen Lines 100 140 print the title of the program Lines 150 320 are
228. located Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment or c to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ni Table of Contents Getting Started
229. low these rules when you use quoted strings A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7 bit ASCII character set Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string For example this is correct and this is correct but this is not You can mix quotation marks and apostrophes within a string as long as you follow the previous rule For example this is an acceptable string this is also an acceptable string You can include a quote character within a string simply by repeating the quote For example here is a mark is a mark Strings can have upper or lower case characters If you use a GPIB network you cannot terminate a quoted string with an EOI interface signal before the closing delimiter For example the following string is invalid test lt EOI gt A carriage return or line feed imbedded in a quoted string does not terminate the string but is treated as just another character in the string HES 9000 User Manual Command Syntax Block Arguments Several HFS 9000 commands use a block argument form Symbol Meaning Block A block of binary data bytes lt NZDi g gt A digit character in the range 0 9 note that 0 is treated as a special case lt Dig gt A digit character in the range 0 9 lt DChar gt A character with the binary equivalent of 0 through FF hexadecimal 0 through 255 decimal The block argument is in one of the two following for
230. lse menu Frequency 100 MHz Pulse menu Output On 050 Main Size 2 ns Vertical Size 200 mV Vertical Offset 0 Main Position Minimum Measure Min Max Amplitude 6 Measure maximum value is less than or equal to 0 5 V the minimum value is greater than or equal to 1 5 V and the amplitude is greater than or equal to 300 mV Rise Time and Fall Time These checks verify the rise time and fall times of HFS 9PG1 pulse card and Checks HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9DG1 data time generator channels You will check each HFS 9000 high HFS 9DG1 Cards Only speed channel in turn A reference to the channel is a reference to the particular channel under test Equipment Required One Tektronix 11801B Digital Sampling Oscilloscope or CS A803A Communication Signal Analyzer item 5 with sampling head item 6 Two SMA coaxial cables item 8 One SMA 5X attenuator item 7 One threaded SMA female to SMA male slip on connector item 11 1 Resetthe HFS 9000 then make the settings according to Table F 20 F 22 HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification Table F 20 Settings for Rise Time and Fall Time Checks Control Setting Pulse menu Channel The channel under test Pulse menu High Level Press SELECT to change the High Level item to an Amplitude item and the Low Level item to an Offset item Pulse menu Amplitude 1 0V Pulse menu Offset 0v Pulse menu Polarity Normal Pulse menu Period Press SELECT to change
231. lse menu but it is easiest to turn on a channel from the front panel Depending on the configuration of your HFS 9000 you have from one to nine pulse generator cards with up to four channels each The controls for each card appear as in Figure 1 10 Light SMA Connector OUTPUT Button O QOOQOOOO OOGOoOOoOOoO0O000200O000 ourevr OUTPUT oureur OUTPUT oureur OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT CH3 O O O O 2 TRANSDUCER TRANSDUCER OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT CH 1 CH2 TRIGGER OUT TRIGGER IN FRAME SYNC IN PHASE LOCK IN SKEW CAL IN O 5V T ma 500 NN MIN bt MIN 500 TO 2V 500 TO 2V Figure 1 10 Pulse Generator Data Time Generator and Time Base Controls and Connectors 1 10 HFS 9000 User Manual Getting Started 1 Select any channel to use for output and press the OUTPUT button for that channel Observe that the associated light turns on The HFS 9000 is now creating pulse trains It puts out 5 pulses of 150 MHz frequency When that is done it automatically starts over after the re arm time If you have an oscilloscope you can view the pulses that are being generated 2 Connect a cable from the associated OUTPUT connector to the signal input connector of your oscilloscope 3 Adjust your oscilloscope for a stable display of the pulses If necessar
232. lt n gt COUTput 3 64 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA 3 65 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA COPY 3 66 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA S WAP 3 67 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DCYCle 3 67 PGEN x CH n CVIew 3 65 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DRADix 3 68 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HIGH 3 69 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HLIMit 3 70 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LDELay 3 71 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LHOLd 3 72 HES 9000 User Manual Index PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LIMit 3 73 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LLIMit 3 73 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt Low 3 74 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LVlew 3 75 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OFFSet 3 76 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OUTPut 3 77 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PHASe 3 78 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt POLarity 3 79 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt PRATe 3 79 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt SIGNal 3 80 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay 3 81 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt THOLd 3 82 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TINPut 3 83 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TRANsition 3 83 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TYPE 3 84 PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt WIDTh 3 85 PSC 3 86 3 132 PURGE 3 87 Query 3 9 Quoted string argument 3 14 RCL 3 88 RS232 3 88 RS232 BAUD 3 89 RS232 DELay 3 89 RS232 ECHO 3 90 RS232 EOL 3 91 RS232 FLAGging 3 92 RS232 PARity 3 93 RS232 SBITs 3 94 RST 3 95 S AV 3 96 Separator 3 10 Set 3 9 SIGNAL lt parameter gt 3 96 SIGNAL BDATA 3 98 SIGNAL BDATA FILL 3 99 SIGNal CVIew 3 100 SIGNal D
233. lue in the range from 1 to 30 Using an out of range value causes an execution error Examples PURGE 3 clears the contents of save recall register 3 HFS 9000 User Manual 3 87 Commands RCL No Query Form The RCL Recall command restores the state of the HFS 9000 from a copy of its settings stored in local memory The settings are stored using the SAV command This performs the same function as the Recall item in the front panel Save Recall menu Related Commands LRN RST PURGE SAV Syntax RCL lt NRf gt NOTE RCL does not restore phase lock mode After a recall phase lock mode is always off because phase lock requires an external signal to be attached at the time phase lock is turned on If your setting uses phase lock mode recall the setting connect the phase lock signal to the PHASE LOCK IN connector and then turn on phase lock using the commandTBAS PLIN INP ON Arguments lt NRf gt is a value in the range from 1 to 30 lt NRf gt recalls the state of the HFS 9000 from the specified local memory Using an out of range value causes an execution error Examples RCL 3 restores the HFS 9000 from a copy of the settings stored in local memory 3 RS232 The RS232 command sets and queries the HFS 9000 RS 232 C interface parameters RS232 queries all RS 232 C parameters Syntax 85232 CRS232 1 Examples 85232 might return the string RS232 BAUD 19200 PAR NONE SBIT 1 00000 F
234. m in the front panel Levels menu Related Commands PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt AMPLitude PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HIGH PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LOW PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OFFSet HFS 9000 User Manual 3 73 Commands Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LLIMit MIN MAX lt NRf gt PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LLIMit MIN me MAX space Arguments MIN sets the low limit to the minimum MAX sets the low limit to HLIMit minimum AMPLitude lt NRf gt sets the low limit to the specified value Using a value outside the current legal range sets the low limit to the nearest legal value and gives an execution warning Examples PGENB CH2 LLIM MIN sets the low limit of channel B2 to the minimum level PGENA CH1 LLIM returns the low limit of channel A1 PGEN x CH n LOW PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LOW sets and queries the low level of the selected channel This performs the same function as the Low Level item in the front panel Pulse menu and Levels menu Related Commands PGEN x CH n AMPLitude PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HIGH PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt HLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LLIMit PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LVIew PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt OFFSet Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LOW MIN MAX lt NRf gt PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt LOW 3 74 HFS 9000
235. mands signal signal lt radix gt lt radix gt VECTOR IOFORMAT D 3 0 HEX WE BIN VECTOR DATA 0 4 AOAOA1A1 port xe address ascii data count Vector Signals lt address gt 1 02 01 00 000000 1 0 1 0 0 000001 1 0 1 0 0 101001010010110101 000002 1 0 1 0 1 000003 1 1 0 1 E Binary Wa ES Data Bytes to be Entered ascii data Loaded Into address Loaded Into address 1 Loaded Into address 2 Loaded Into address 3 Figure 3 10 Reading ASCII Data into a Vector VECTor END The VECTor END Vector End Address sets the vector end address This performs the same function as the End item in the Vector menu Syntax VECTor END address VECTor END HFS 9000 User Manual 3 123 Commands oai zc MEER RE Arguments address sets the vector end address Examples VECTOR END 16 sets the vector end address to 16 VECTOR END returns the vector end address VECTor lOFormat VECTor IOFormat Vector Input Output Format sets the format to be used by subsequent VECTor DATA commands This command specifies the radix of the vectors being input or output and which signals the vectors are mapped to This is a flexible command that allows vectors to be input or output in any radix or combination Vectors can be input for every signal in the Data Generator or for any subset of sig
236. mats m Block lt NZDig gt lt Dig gt lt Dig gt lt DChar gt m Block 0 lt DChar gt EOI NZDi g gt specifies the number of Dig elements that follow Taken together the Dig elements form a decimal integer that specifies how many lt DChar gt elements follow see Figure 3 6 If the second form is used it means that the number of lt DChar gt elements to follow is unknown and that the end of the block of data bytes will be identified by EOI So when lt NZDig gt is zero everything that follows is treated as data until an EOI character is encountered This form should not be used with the RS 232 C interface or with GPIB controllers that have LF termination only Block Argument A C ALIas DEFine SETUP1 1232 PGENA LDEL 10E 9 WIDTH 20E 9 Specifies Number of Length Digits that Follow Block Header Specifies Data Length Figure 3 6 Block Argument Example HFS 9000 User Manual 3 15 Command Syntax Numeric Arguments Card Channel Mnemonics Channel Arguments Many HFS 9000 commands require numeric arguments This manual represents these arguments as follows Symbol Meaning lt NR1 gt Signed integer value lt NR2 gt Floating point value without an exponent lt NR3 gt Floating point value with an exponent lt NRf gt Flexible numeric argument NR1 NR2 NR3 A suffix composed of a multiplier letter exponent and units may be
237. med by PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt SIGnal lt pin gt are displayed This command performs the same function as the Move Up Down item in the front panel Signal menu Syntax FPAN SORDer lt signal gt signal FPAN SORDer n Arguments signal is the name of the channel HFS 9000 User Manual 3 53 Commands Examples FPAN VRADix Syntax Arguments Examples HEADER Related Commands Syntax 3 54 FPAN SORDER WE A 0 7 D 3 0 sets the signal display order as indicated FPAN SORDER returns the current signal display order FPAN VRADix controls how vector addresses are displayed on the front panel This command performs the same function as the Vec Radix item in the front panel Data Fill and Data Copy menus FPAN VRADix OCT DEC HEX FPAN VRADi x space CZD Om GED OCT specifies an octal vector radix DEC specifies a decimal vector radix HEX specifies a hexadecimal vector radix FPAN VRADIX HEX sets the vector radix to hexadecimal FPAN VRADIX returns the current vector radix The HEADER command sets and queries the Response Header Enable State that causes the HFS 9000 to either include or omit headers on query responses This command does not affect IEEE 488 2 Common Commands those starting with an asterisk VERBOSE HEADER ON OFF NRf HFS 9000 User Manual Commands
238. mission and Control Q or hex 13 indicates that transmis sion can resume Glossary 7 Glossary Glossary 8 HFS 9000 User Manual Index A Abbreviating Command 3 12 Address Channel 2 9 GPIB 2 33 3 4 Address menu item 2 33 3 4 Alias Define 3 27 Delete 3 28 Query 3 27 State 3 29 ALIas command ALIas CATalog 3 27 ALIas DEFine 3 27 ALIas DELEte ALL 3 28 ALIas DELEte NAME 3 28 ALIas S TATE 3 29 ALLEV 3 29 Amplitude menu item 2 36 2 46 Amplitude view 2 36 2 46 3 75 Argument Command 3 10 Arrow button 1 3 2 2 2 3 2 4 ASCII 3 9 Character table C 2 debug indicator C 4 Auto Time base mode 1 7 2 63 Auto burst Time base mode 2 20 Auto Time base mode 2 20 Auto burst Time base mode 1 7 2 63 BACKSPACE button 1 8 Baud Rate menu item 2 55 3 5 Blinking Menu items 2 48 2 64 Block Command argument 3 15 Block End menu item 2 21 2 24 Block Start menu item 2 21 2 24 BNF Backus Naur form 3 9 Break 3 9 Burst Time base mode 1 7 2 1 2 62 Burst Time base mode 2 20 Button Arrow 1 3 2 2 2 3 2 4 BACKSPACE 1 8 ENTER 1 8 FINE 1 7 2 2 2 3 MAIN MENU 1 2 2 2 23 2 4 HFS 9000 User Manual MANUAL TRIGGER 1 11 2 2 2 3 2 62 2 64 2 67 NEXT CHANNEL 2 2 2 3 2 11 2 25 2 36 2 46 Numeric keypad 1 8 ON STANDBY 2 2 2 3 OUTPUT 1 11 22 2 3 PREVIOUS CHANNEL 2 2 2 3 2 11 2 25 2 36 2 46
239. n National Safe Transit Association test procedure 1A B 1 MIL STD 810D method 514 3 category 1 Figure 514 3 1 HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix B Specifications Table B 25 Warranted Characteristics Environmental and Safety Cont HFS 9003 Description Listed to UL1244 Certified to CAN CSA C22 2 No 231 M89 Installation Category Il Pollution Degree 2 Safety Class HFS 9009 Description Safety IEC Specifications Typical Characteristics HES 9000 User Manual Typical characteristics are described in terms of typical or average performance Typical characteristics are not warranted Table B 26 Typical Characteristics Time Base Name RMS jitter Recovery time between bursts or auto bursts Description 15 ps 0 05 of interval 15 us Table B 27 Typical Characteristics HFS 9PG1 Output Performance Name Transition time 20 to 80 Description Amplitude lt 1 V 150 ps 1V Amplitude lt 2 V 190 ps 2 V Amplitude lt 3 V 225 ps Output aberrations beginning Overshoot 41596 420 mV 200 ps after 50 pointoftransi Undershoot 1096 20 mV tion Appendix B Specifications Table B 28 Typical Characteristics HFS 9PG2 Output Performance Name Description Output level range will double until certain internal limits are achieved Since the programmed specified and displayed output levels do not match the actual output levels level accuracy specific
240. n Operator Overview Menu Navigation 1 Press the MAIN MENU button to display the top level menu SELECT Main Menu CO CO CO press SELECT to show the Pulse Menu Pulse Time Base Levels Menu Menu Menu Vector Data Edit Data Fill Data Copy Menu Menu Menu Menu SaverRecall 5 232 1 Menu Menu Menu Menu 2 Use the arrow buttons to move to the menu you want to display a a Main Menu SELECT press SELECT to show the Time Base Menu e 69 Pulse Signal Menu Menu qe Vector Data Edit Data Copy Henu Henu Henu b 4 MAIN MENU Save Recall GPIB Cal Oeskeu CO Menu Menu Menu 3 Press the SELECT button to display that menu SELECT Time Base Menu CO CO press SELECT Auta Burstk uto Burst Trig Auto Mode Period Count Co Auto Burst 1 7ns 1 Trigger In Trig Slope Trig Level PFhaseLockIn MAIN ii MENU n Positive C Runzstop Running 2 4 HFS 9000 User Manual An Operator Overview Menu Map Time Base Menu press SELECT Auto Burstk uto Burst Trig Auta Period Buta Burst 1 7ns Trigger In On Run Stap Running Pulse Menu Go to the next channel press SELEC Channel High Level Low Level Polarity Al EL iW Hormal Period Lead Delay Duty Cycle Transition 1 rns 1 Sips Fulse Rate __ Output Output Hormal ort off Copy Signal Type View Channel Channel
241. n Table 3 16 on page 3 137 2 QYE Query Error Shows that either an attempt was made to read the Output Queue when no data was present or pending or that data in the Output Queue was lost 1 RQC Request Control Not used 0 LSB OPC Operation Complete Shows that the operation is complete This bit is set by the OPC command The Status Byte Register SBR The SBR see Figure 3 12 and Table 3 12 records whether output is available in the Output Queue whether the HFS 9000 requests service and whether the SESR has recorded any events Use a Serial Poll or the STB query to read the contents of the SBR The bits in the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR the Event Status Enable Register ESER and the Output Queue When you use a Serial Poll to obtain the SBR bit 6 is the RQS bit When you use the STB query to obtain the SBR bit 6 is the MSS bit 6 7 RQ55 2 1 JO 6 ESB MV MSS Figure 3 12 The Status Byte Register SBR 3 130 HFS 9000 User Manual Status and Events Enable Registers HFS 9000 User Manual Table 3 12 SBR Bit Functions Bit Function 7 MSB Not used 6 RGS Request Service obtained from a serial poll Shows that the HFS 9000 requests service from the GPIB controller 6 MSS Master Status Summary obtained from STB query Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR 5
242. n an HFS 9DG1 Card 2 10 Figure 2 5 Channel Controls on an HFS 9DG2 Card 2 10 Figure 2 6 Pulse Menu Showing Channel Selection 2 11 Figure 2 7 Levels Menu Showing Channel Selection 2 12 Figure 2 8 Signal Menu Showing Channel Selection 2 12 Figure 2 9 The Pulse 2 13 Figure 2 10 The Signal Menu 2 14 Figure 2 11 The Signal Name Dialog Box 2 15 Figure 2 12 Signal Menu After Entering Signal Name 2 15 Figure 2 13 Naming a Bus 2 16 Figure 2 14 Viewing a Bus by 2 16 Figure 2 15 Assigning Signal Type 2 17 Figure 2 16 Changing the Display Order 2 17 Figure 2 17 The Data Edit Menu 2 18 Figure 2 18 The Vector 2 19 Figure 2 19 The Data 2 21 Figure 2 20 A Block Filled with Fill Scale Set to 1 2 22 Figure 2 21 A Block Filled with Fill Scale Set to 3 2 23 HFS 9000 User Manual Table of Contents HFS 9000 User Manual Figure 2 22 Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 25 Figure 2 26 Figure 2 27 Figure 2 28 Figure 2 29 Figure 2 30 Figure 2 31 Item Figure 2 32 The Data Copy Menu
243. n change the frequency or period while in phase lock but only by powers of two that is you can repeatedly double or halve the period or frequency If you adjust period or frequency with the knob each knob click will double or halve the value in the menu item The frequencies you can use are limited to those within the frequency specifications of the HFS 9000 Triggering During Phase Lock Mode HFS 9000 User Manual You can provide a triggering window while in phase lock mode This triggering window is the time during which the input at the FRAME SYNC IN connector is held high A trigger event is the first positive going edge of the phase lock signal that occurs during the triggering window see Figure 2 32 The FRAME SYNC IN is terminated through 50 Q to 2 0 V Logical low is from 1 810 V to 1 475 V logical high is from 1 165 V to 0 810 V These standard ECL specifications Just as normal triggering a trigger event at the TRIGGER IN connector is only operational during Burst mode operation phase lock triggering using the FRAME SYNC IN connector can only be used during Burst mode See page 2 61 for a description of Burst Auto Burst Auto and Trig Auto modes Phase lock triggering is disabled when the Trigger In item in the Time Base menu is Off Trigger Event LI E433 Wes Phase Lock In a Frame Sync In Pulse Output Pulse Windows 130ns Startup Delay
244. n of the use of these registers see page 3 129 CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMSG FACTORY PSC STB SRE lt NRf gt SRE lt NRf gt is a value in the range from 0 to 255 The binary bits of the SRER are set according to this value Using an out of range value causes an execution error The power on default for SRER is 0 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the SRER maintains its value through a power cycle SRE 48 sets the bits in the SRER to 00110000 binary SRE might return a value of 32 showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary value 00100000 The STB Read Status Byte query returns the Status Byte Register SBR using the Master Summary Status MSS bit For a complete discussion of the use of these registers see page 3 129 CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMSG FACTORY SRE STB 3 105 Commands Examples TBAS Related Commands Syntax Examples TBAS COUNt Syntax Arguments 3 106 5578 STB might return the value 96 showing that the STB contains the binary value 01100000 The TBAS Time Base command sets and queries the HFS 9000 time base parameters The query TBAS returns the values of all time base parameters TBAS PLIN TBAS TIN TBAS TOUT TBAS DO TBAS might return the string TBAS MODE AUTO PVI 5 0E 09 COUN 64 TIN INP 1 SLOP POS LEV 1 3E 00 TBAS PLIN INP 0 TBAS TOUT PER 1 PRET 7 0E 08 TBAS COUNt sets and queries the time
245. n this case it is the third pulse window See page 2 62 HFS 9000 User Manual Trigger Event Startup Delay fixed at 130 ns Time Zero Reference x Pulse Windows Trigger In IEEE Channel 2 Outputs Trigger Out _ NEED An Operator Overview The HFS 9003 Front Panel The Time Base card has connectors for timing input and output including the TRIGGER NEXT CHANNEL and PREVIOUS CHANNEL buttons let you select a channel in menus that have channel parameters This convenience avoids a lot of menu navigation See page 2 11 The UNDO button restores the IN TRIGGER OUT connectors see page 2 65 the PHASE LOCK IN and FRAME SYNC IN connectors see page 2 41 and The Generator cards have connectors for normal the SKEW CAL IN connector see OUTPUT and inverted OUTPUT along with buttons to turn the outputs on and off and lights to page 2 7 HFS 9000 to the state it was in before your last change When you change menus you can no longer undo the previous operation indicate whether those outputs are on The TRANSDUCER IN connector PG cards only lets you apply a logic signal to directly drive a channel See pages 2 13 and 2 45 REMOTE light and SRQ button used for operator interaction when the HFS 9000 is controlled from a computer or controller See page 2 31 RUN STOP lets you start and stop the time base as necessary The RUNNING light indicates whether o
246. nals Vectors can be addressed all the way down to a single bit When specifying how buses will be formatted note that bit order is important The specification D 3 0 is not the same as D 0 3 D 0 3 states that the most significant bit is associated with D 0 while D 3 0 states that the most significant bit is associated with D 3 Syntax VECTor IOFormat signal radix signal radix VECTor IOFormat e Citrornst signal space signal Arguments signal identifies the signal s to receive the data provided by subsequent BDATA commands radix sets the format of the data to be entered Examples VECTOR IOFORMAT A 0 7 identifies the signal A 0 7 to receive data from the subsequent VECTor Data command and set the data format to hex 3 124 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands VECTor LOOP Syntax Arguments Examples VECTor STARt Syntax HES 9000 User Manual VECTOR IOFORMAT D 3 0 HEX WE BIN identifies two signals D 3 0 and WE to receive data from the subsequent VECTor Data commands D 3 0 will receive data in hex format while WE will receive data in binary format The VECTor LOOP Vector Loop Back Address sets the vector loop back address This performs the same function as the Loop item in the Vector menu VECTor LOOP lt address gt VECTor LOOP gt Oem address sets the vector loop
247. nd how to correct it Table D 1 Displayed Error Messages Message Calibration failed Explanation The HFS 9000 has failed to calibrate itself to its internal voltage and timing references It needs repair Calibration memory is corrupted Calibration memory has lost all information To reset it perform a total instrument reset as described under Reset in the User Reference section of this manual Invalid character in number Level adjusted to new limit Press Undo to restore it Numeric data error You have entered a number through the numeric keypad that contains an improper character Re enter the number The level you entered is outside the established limits You need not do anything the level has been set to the nearest limit If you want to restore the previous level press UNDO You have entered an improper number through the numeric keypad Re enter the number Out of memory The HFS 9000 has run out of internal memory Phase Lock failed Turn on PhaseLockln to reattempt Press Select to modify the high lighted item Press Select to modify the high lighted view The HFS 9000 cannot phase lock on the signal connected to the PHASE LOCK IN connector Make certain the signal is stable continuous and within the amplitude and frequency range specified The HFS 9000 will also fail to phase lock if the instrument needs calibrating Retry by turning on the PhaseLockin menu item again The h
248. nds Related Commands OPC Syntax WAI HFS 9000 User Manual 3 127 Commands 3 128 HFS 9000 User Manual s Status and Events Registers Status Registers HFS 9000 User Manual The HFS 9000 provides a status and event reporting system for the GPIB and RS 232 C interfaces This system informs you of significant events that occur within the HFS 9000 The 9000 status handling system consists of five 8 bit registers and two queues This section describes these registers and components and explains how the event handling system operates The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional groups m The Standard Event Status Register SESR and the Status Byte Register SBR contain information about the status of the HFS 9000 These registers are therefore called the Status Registers m The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER the Event Status Enable Register ESER and the Service Request Enable Register SRER determine whether selected types of events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue These three registers are called the Enable Registers The Standard Event Status Register SESR and the Status Byte Register SBR record certain types of events that may occur while the HFS 9000 is in use These registers are defined by IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event such a
249. ng a specific pair of characters DC3 and is used to stop and restart transmission NOTE Do not use soft flagging when transferring binary data since the data may contain DC3 and DCI characters Use hard flagging when transferring binary data 9 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the Echo item and use the SELECT button to specify the desired setting off or on For most systems echo will be off With echo on whenever the HFS 9000 receives a character from the Setting Up the Instrument 3 6 Interactive Command Entry terminal or computer it sends the same character back to the terminal or computer before acting on it NOTE If you use a terminal to send commands to the HFS 9000 and interactively observe the results set Echo to on For more detail refer to Interactive Command Entry on page 3 6 10 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the EOL item and the SELECT button to specify the character sequence the HFS 9000 appends to all messages it sends CRLF LFCR CR or LF For most systems CRLF is the proper setting EOL specifies the message terminator that the HFS 9000 puts at the end of every query response 11 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the Delay item and the knob or keypad to set the desired value Delay can be set from 0 to 60 seconds in 50 ms increments Delay is the amount of time that the HFS 9000 waits after receiving a query before sending the response Some systems require some setu
250. nnel by setting the pulse rate to off When in half rate mode the number of pulses in the pulse burst are half of the number specified in the Time Base menu Count item If the specified count is an odd number half rate mode rounds the count up For example if the specified count is 5 then in half rate mode there will be 3 pulses in a burst The quarter and eighth rates behave in the same fashion as the half rate mode NOTE The Trigger Out signal is based on the slowest channel So when you use the half quarter and eighth pulse rate modes be aware of the effect this will have on the Trigger Out signal The ability to change the pulse rate is useful in testing devices For example you can use one pulse generator channel running at normal pulse rate as a clock for the device and set another channel to half pulse rate to simulate data to the device under test Pulse rate set to off is useful to hold an output at logical high or low during a test You can use the Polarity item to control the output logic level The Transducer menu item lets you bypass the Stimulus System time base for an HFS 9 9PG2 channel Transducer mode is not available on the HFS 9DG1 9DG2 cards When transducer mode is on the signal you apply to the TRANSDUCER IN connector directly controls the channel pin driver This allows you to use the fast transition times of the HFS 9000 amplifiers to shape your timing signal In transducer mode only th
251. ntly displayed item HFS 9000 User Manual Commands FPAN DMENu Syntax Arguments Examples FPAN DNCHannel Syntax Arguments HFS 9000 User Manual FPAN DMENu Displayed Menu displays a selected menu or queries the displayed menu This performs the same function as selecting a menu from the front panel FPAN DMENu lt QString gt FPAN DMENu lt QString gt specifies the menu to display Valid strings are the menu titles including Main Menu from the Main Menu FPAN DMEN Pulse selects the Pulse menu FPAN DMEN Time Base selects the Time Base menu FPAN DMEN returns the currently displayed menu FPAN DNCHannel Destination Channel specifies the destination parameter of the Swap Block with Dest and Copy Block to Dest items in the front panel Data Copy menu This command performs the same function as the Dest Chan item in the front panel Data Copy menu FPAN DNCHannel channel FPAN DNCHannel lt space gt channel DNCHannel lt channel gt specifies the channel to which blocks of data are copied or with which they are swapped 3 45 Commands Examples FPAN DNSignal Syntax Arguments Examples FPAN DNSTart 3 46 Syntax FPAN DNCHANNEL C2 sets the destination channel to C2 FPAN DNCHANNEL returns the destination channel name FPAN DNSignal Destination Channel specifies the destination parameter of the Swap Block with Dest and Copy Block
252. nts that follow an ESR are put in the Event Queue but are not available until ESR is used again Event Handling Sequence HFS 9000 User Manual Figure 3 16 on page 3 134 shows how to use the status and event handling system In the explanation that follows numbers in parentheses refer to the numbers in circles in Figure 3 16 When an event occurs a signal is sent to the DESER 1 If that type of event is enabled in the DESER that is if the bit for that event type is set to 1 the appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one and the event is recorded in the Event Queue 2 If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled 3 then the ESB bit in the SBR is set to one 4 When output is sent to the Output Queue the MAV bit in the SBR is set to one 5 When bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER is enabled 6 the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is generated 7 3 133 Status and Events Device Event Status Enable Register DESER Read using DESE Write using DESE Standard Event Status Register SESR Read using ESR Cannot be written Event Status Enable Register ESER Read using ESE Write using ESE Status Byte Register SBR Read using STB Cannot be written Service Request Enable Register SRER Read using SRE Write using SRE Taa
253. o types of reset are Reset and Factory m Reset changes settings in menus to default condition Reset does not affect stored settings defined aliases or GPIB and RS 232 C interface parameters m Factory resets all the same items as Reset In addition Factory removes all stored settings and all alias definitions Factory does not affect GPIB and RS 232 C interface parameters There is no form of reset for communication parameters either GPIB or RS 232 C Reset and Factory are items in the Save Recall menu see Figure 2 36 Each presents a verification dialog before executing Save Recall Menu 2 Factory Figure 2 36 The Save Recall Menu with Reset and Factory Items If you encounter problems or observe certain error messages such as Calibration memory is corrupted you may want to completely reset the HFS 9000 You can perform a total instrument reset which clears and re establishes all memory in the instrument NOTE Total instrument reset erases all memory in the HFS 9000 including calibration memory GPIB and RS 232 C settings and optionally stored settings Total instrument reset is not normally required and should be consid ered a corrective action only 2 51 Reset To perform a total instrument reset power off the HFS 9000 Then hold down the BACKSPACE button while powering on the HFS 9000 Hold the button down until you see a dialog asking you the type of reset you want Choose the type of r
254. ode it does not complete any remaining tests HFS 9000 User Manual 3 117 Commands Examples TST might return the value 220 showing that the time base card in the time base slot has an error If the test returned the value 431 the High Speed Pulse card in Slot B would have an error VECTor The VECTor command queries the vector parameters Related Commands VECTor STARt VECTor LOOP VECTor END Syntax VECTor CETA Examples VECTOR returns the vector parameters in the following format VECTOR START 0 LOOP 0 END 7 VECTor BDATA VECTor BDATA Vector Binary Data Input Output is used to input and output vectors according to the BIOFORMAT command This is the fastest method for downloading data Because this command should always be used in conjunction with the VECTor BIOFormat the examples given below use both a BIOFormat command as well as one or more BDATA commands Related Commands PGEN x CH n BDATA VECTor IOFormat Syntax VECTor BDATA lt address gt lt count gt lt block gt VECTor BDATA lt address gt lt count gt gae e ET IE O A S S L LOO O sce EE e C e Arguments lt address gt sets queries the start address for the data 3 118 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Examples HFS 9000 User Manual count specifies the number of data elements that follow or that should be returned block represents a block of binary bytes VECTOR BIOFORMAT
255. on before a star command m PGENA CH1 WIDTH 1ns CH2 WIDTH 2ns The two commands differ in the middle mnemonic you can abbreviate only if the commands differ by the last mnemonic Place PGENA in front of CH2 This manual uses EOI End or Identify to represent a message terminator Symbol Meaning lt 01 gt Message terminator If you use a GPIB network lt gt can be the IEEE 488 EOI interface symbol or LF line feed If you use an RS 232 C network you can use CR carriage return LF line feed CRLF carriage return followed by a line feed or LFCR line feed followed by a carriage return as the output terminator EOL string When using RS 232 C with echo off the HFS 9000 accepts only LF line feed as an input message terminator The end of message terminator may be either the END message EOI asserted concurrently with the last data byte or the ASCII code for line feed LF sent as the last data byte The argument of a command may be in one of several forms The individual descriptions of each command tell which argument types to use with that command 3 13 Command Syntax Quoted String Arguments 3 14 Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string a group of ASCII characters enclosed by apostrophes or quotation marks For example this is a quoted string this is also a quoted string Symbol Meaning lt QString gt Quoted string of ASCII text Fol
256. on memory 2 51 Command 3 95 Factory 2 51 3 35 Total instrument 2 51 Reset menu item 2 51 Reset Order menu item 2 17 Rise Time and Fall Time Checks HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9DG1 Cards Only F 22 Rise Time and Fall Time Checks HFS 9PG2 and HFS 9DG2 Cards Only F 25 RS 232 C 2 53 Additional information you need about your computer 3 6 Baud rate 2 55 3 5 Debug 2 56 3 6 Delay 2 56 3 6 Echo 2 56 3 5 EOL End of Line 2 56 3 6 Flagging 2 55 3 5 Parity 2 55 3 5 Stop bits 2 55 3 5 Terminal 3 6 Using a terminal 3 6 RS 232 menu 1 4 HFS 9000 User Manual Index RS 232 C Baud rate 3 89 Cables C 6 Delay 3 89 Echo 3 90 EOL End of Line 3 91 Flagging 3 92 Parity 3 93 Query 3 88 Stop bits 3 94 Wiring C 6 RS232 command RS232 3 88 RS232 BAUD 3 89 RS232 DELay 3 89 RS232 ECHO 3 90 RS232 EOL 3 91 RS232 FLAGging 3 92 RS232 PARity 3 93 RS232 SBITs 3 94 RS232 Error debug indicator C 4 RST command 3 95 RUN STOP button 2 2 2 3 RUNNING light 2 2 2 3 S S in Data Edit menu 2 18 S AV command 3 96 Save menu item 2 58 Save setting command 3 96 Save Recall menu 1 4 2 51 2 57 SBR register 3 105 3 130 SDC C 1 SELECT button 1 3 2 2 2 3 2 4 Selected device clear C 1 Selecting Channels 2 11 Menu 2 4 Self Test F 11 Self test 2 59 3 117 Self Test menu item 2 59 Separator Command 3 10 Serial poll 3 130 Disable
257. ormatted data are provided These are m PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA m SIGNAL BDATA m VECTOR BIOFORMAT m VECTOR BDATA To correctly use these commands the binary data must be formatted correctly The format used is based on the internal memory structure of the Data Generator cards To convert an ASCII formatted string into a binary formatted block each byte of data must be reversed in bit order Consider the following command placed on two lines for ease of reading SIGNAL DATA Data0 0 40 1000001001000010110000100010001010100010 Translating this data to binary form would result in this command SIGNAL DATA Data0 0 40 215ABCDE where A binary 0100 0001 which is the reverse of 1000 0010 B binary 0100 0010 which is the reverse of 0100 0010 C binary 0100 0011 which is the reverse of 1100 0010 HFS 9000 User Manual 3 19 Command Syntax Syntax Diagrams 3 20 D binary 0100 0100 which is the reverse of 0010 0010 binary 0100 0101 which is the reverse of 1010 0010 The syntax diagrams in this manual use the following symbols and notation Circles and ovals contain literal elements that must be sent exactly as shown Command and query names are abbreviated to the minimum required spelling m Boxes contain the defined elements described earlier in this section such as lt NRf gt or lt QString gt m Elements are connected by arrows that show the allowed paths through the diagram
258. ound except as noted Name Description Maximum high level 5 50 V Minimum low level 2 00 V Maximum amplitude 5 50 V Minimum amplitude 0 50 V Level resolution 0 01 V Operation when terminated through 50 O to 2 V Output levels will be approximately 1 V more negative than the values programmed specified and displayed Actual output levels more negative than 2 V may cause malfunction Level accuracy specifications do not apply when terminating to 2 V Both true and complement outputs must be terminated to the same voltage Transition time 2096 to 8096 Transition time resolution Output limits Variable from 800 ps to 5 ns 10 ps One high limit and one low limit may be enabled or disabled together HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix B Specifications HFS 9000 User Manual Table 3 Nominal Traits HFS 9DG1 Output Performance Each channel and complement driving a 50 O load to ground except as noted Name Description Maximum high level 5 0 V Minimum low level 2 5 V Maximum amplitude 3 00 V Minimum amplitude 0 01 V Level resolution 0 01 V Operation when terminated through 50 Q to 2 V Operation when terminated to high impedance loads Output limits Output levels will be approximately 1 V more negative than the values programmed specified and displayed Actual output levels more negative than 2 V may cause malfunction Level accuracy specifications do not apply when terminat
259. ow to Stack GPIB Connectors Typical GPIB Network Configurations The GPIB Menu Command Message Elements Block Argument Example Typical Syntax Diagrams Reading Binary Encoded Data into a Channel Reading Binary Encoded Data into Vectors Reading ASCII Data into a Vector The Standard Event Status Register SESR The Status Byte Register SBR The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER Table of Contents vi Figure 3 14 The Event Status Enable Register ESER 3 132 Figure 3 15 The Service Request Enable Register SRER 3 132 Figure 3 16 Status and Event Handling Process 3 134 Figure C 1 The Debug Window C 4 HFS 9000 User Manual Table of Contents List of Tables HFS 9000 User Manual Table 2 1 Output Voltage Limits 2 35 Table 2 2 Logic State of Outputs When Time Base Stopped 2 63 Table 3 1 BNF Symbols and Meanings 3 9 Table 3 2 Command Message Elements 3 10 Table 3 3 Comparison of Header On and Off Responses 3 11 Table 3 4 Commands Common to GPIB Devices 3 21 Table 3 5 HFS 9000 Device Commands and Parameters 3 22 Table 3 6 FAC
260. p time to begin receiving a message the delay setting lets you ensure that the HFS 9000 does not respond before the terminal or computer is ready 12 If the Debug item is not set as you wish use the arrow buttons to highlight the Debug item and press the SELECT button When debug is on a display window shows the most recent commands sent to the HFS 9000 and the status of several control settings Appendix C Interface Specifications gives complete information about using debug mode Once you have set these parameters you can use the RS 232 C interface to control your HFS 9000 NOTE You will need to consult the documentation for your computer to determine how commands are sent and messages are received from within the computer s programming language When you are using a CRT or hardcopy terminal with the HFS 9000 or are using terminal emulation software on your controller you can send commands to the HFS 9000 and observe the results interactively In this mode turn echo on to use these echo features m Whenever the HFS 9000 is ready for the next command it sends a gt prompt to the terminal or controller When this prompt appears enter a command or query and a termination CR or LF HFS 9000 User Manual Setting Up the Instrument HFS 9000 User Manual m All input is buffered so the HFS 9000 will not analyze and act on a command until the complete command is sent and a terminator is received Until the
261. quit OR C QUIT THEN 999 450 REM 460 REM Send command query to pulse generator and check for errors 470 REM 480 CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 C 490 GOSUB 700 500 IF THEN 400 510 REM 520 REM If query read response from pulse generator 530 REM 540 IF RIGHT C 1 lt gt THEN 400 550 RD SPACE 64 560 CALL IBRD TEKDEV1 RD 570 PRINT 580 PRINT RD 590 EOI 8H2000 600 IF IBSTA AND EOIZ lt gt EOI THEN 550 610 GOTO 400 700 REM 710 REM Check for errors 720 REM 730 CALL IBRSP TEKDEV1 SPR 740 RQS 8H40 Request Service bit 3 142 HFS 9000 User Manual Programming Examples 750 760 770 780 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 970 980 999 ESB 8H20 Event Status Bit IF SPR AND RQS RQS THEN 800 0 RETURN PRINT PRINT Status Byte SPR WRT esr CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT RD SPACE 64 CALL IBRD TEKDEV1 RD PRINT ESR Register RD WRT evmsg CALL IBWRT TEKDEV1 WRT RD SPACE 64 CALL IBRD TEKDEV1 RD IF VAL MID RD 8 0 THEN 950 IF VAL MID RD 8 1 THEN 820 PRINT RD GOTO 870 1 RETURN END HFS 9000 User Manual 3 143 Programming Examples Example 3 Interacting With a User Example 3 demonstrates using the HFS 9000 in an automated test system where the front panel is locked out During automated operation the testing process may nee
262. r 174 1427 00 Trigger Output Check Rise and fall time checks Edge placement check Frequency accuracy check Tektronix SG 504 Phase lock check Appendix Performance Verification Table F 1 Required Test Equipment Cont Item Number and Description Minimum Requirements Example Purpose 10 BNC female to Tektronix part number Output level and amplitude SMA male adapter 015 1018 00 checks Phase lock check 1 Threaded SMA Tektronix part number SMA quick disconnect female to SMA 015 0553 00 male slip on con nector Test Record Identify the type of cards you will be testing and photocopy the appropriate tables from pages F 3 to F 9 Use these tables to record the performance test results for the instrument F 2 HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification Table F 2 Trigger Output Level and Phase Lock Test Instrument Serial Number Temperature Date of Calibration Performance Test Trigger Output Level Amplitude gt 300 mV 0 5 V gt offset 1 5 V driving 50 to ground Output Maximum High Level Minimum Low Level Minimum Amplitude Phase Lock Test 1 frequency set accuracy of generator Output Channel 0 8 V 250 MHz 250 0 3 V 594 MHz 594 MHz of Certificate Number RH 96 Technician Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum NA he Me teak lt 0 5V esM ea festen N A gt 300 MVp
263. r Time Base Trigger Out Pretrigger VECTor BDATA Vector Binary Data Input Output HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 cards only VECTor BIOFormat Vector Binary Input Output F ormat HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only VECTor DATA Vector Data Input O utput HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only VECTor END Vector End Address HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only VECTor IOFormat Vector Input O utput Format HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9062 cards only VECTor LOOP Vector Loop Address HFS 9DG1 and HFS 9DG2 cards only VECTor STARt Vector Start Address HFS 9PG2 and HFS 9062 cards only 3 26 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands ALIAS CATALOG Query Only The ALIas CATalog query returns the currently defined alias labels Related Commands ALIas DEFine ALIas DELEte FACTORY Syntax ALIas CATalog CATES O Cita O Examples ALI CAT might return the string SETUP1 PULSE1 DEFAULT showing that there are currently 3 aliases named SETUP1 PULSEI and DEFAULT If the query returns the string no aliases are defined ALIAS DEFINE The ALIas DEFine command assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label These messages are then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a command or query The ALIas DEFine query returns the definition of a selected alias Related Commands ALIas CATalog ALIas DELEte FACTORY Syntax ALIas DEFine lt QString gt lt Separator gt lt QString gt Block ALIas DEFine lt QS
264. r not the time base is running The MANUAL TRIGGER button simulates a trigger event that normally occurs as a signal at the TRIGGER IN connector See page 2 68 Y QAO OIO OIKOO OoOlpoo CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 GEC C 2 Numeric keypad lets you type a number for any selected menu item having a numeric value End 370 CD i eR C569 T OOOO CO Co The knob and FINE button let you adjustthe value of any selected menu item that has a numeric value The FINE button gives you finer O OJO O0 UE o DD ODIO ON STANDBY switch turns HFS 9000 or turns it off standby Even when on standby some circuits have line power your number by pressing the ENTER button See page 1 8 knob control The FINE lighttells you when the applied To remove all power disconnect the knob is in fine granularity mode See page 1 7 SELECT arrow and MAIN MENU buttons navigate through the menus MAIN MENU displays the main menu The arrow buttons change which menu item is selected see page 2 4 In the main menu SELECT displays the selected menu In other menus SELECT may perform an action or change the way an item works see page 1 7 power cord from the HFS 9000 The CPU card has
265. r signal is continually sent to the HFS 9000 through the TRIGGER IN connector Once the program completes you can also generate other bursts on demand by pressing the MANUAL TRIGGER button HFS 9000 User Manual 3 139 Programming Examples 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 999 3 140 Example 1 Listing CLS PRINT HFS 90x0 Precision Pulse Generator PRINT Example 1 Setting Up a Pulse Channel PRINT GPIB Version PRINT REM REM decl bas REM REM GURU initialization code declarations REM CLEAR 58900 BASICA Declarations BYTES FREE size bib m IBINIT1 58900 a smaller than calculated is OK in lines 1 amp 2 IBINIT2 IBINIT1 3 Lines 1 thru 6 MUST be included in your program BLOAD bib m IBINIT1 CALL IBINIT1 IBFIND IBTRG IBCLR IBPCT IBSIC IBLOC IBPPC IBBNA IBONL IBRSC IBSRE IBRSV IBPAD IBSAD IBIST IBDMA IBEOS IBTMO IBEOT IBRDF IBWRTF IBTRAP CALL IBINIT2 IBGTS IBCAC IBWAIT IBPOKE IBWRT IBWRTA IBCMD IBCMDA IBRD IBRDA IBSTOP IBRPP IBRSP IBDIAG IBXTRC IBRDI IBWRTI IBRDIA IBWRTIA IBSTA IBERR IBCNT BDNAME TEKDEV1 CALL IBFIND BDNAME TEKDEV1 IF TEKDEV1 lt 0 THEN PRINT IBFIND ERROR END REM REM Initia
266. rate item in the Cal Deskew menu Figure 2 1 shows this menu Cal Deskew Menu press SELECT to calibrate the instrument Miew Config Self Test Calibrate Pretrigger Channel Chan Delay __ r ns Al os Figure 2 1 The Cal Deskew Menu Run the calibration procedure only when the HFS 9000 has been powered on for 20 minutes in the temperature environment you expect it to be used You will need a 20 inch SMA cable the cable supplied as a standard accessory is acceptable The calibration process will take approximately one minute for every channel installed in the HFS 9000 When you select the Calibrate item in the Cal Deskew menu a dialog box asks you for verification If you proceed the HFS 9000 will prompt you to attach the SMA cable from the front panel SKEW CAL IN connector first to the TRIG GER OUT connector and then to each channel OUTPUT connector in turn During the time that the channels are connected calibration is performed automatically Calibration Diagnostic Failure of Calibration Memory Whenever you power on the HFS 9000 diagnostics check the integrity of the calibration memory If the test fails the instrument may require service When this happens nominal values are put into calibration memory and the instrument will be uncalibrated However the HFS 9000 will let you continue to operate the instrument after the initial warning that calibration memory has been reset Check out the instrument to be cert
267. rguments Examples TBAS TIN SLOPe POSitive NEGative TBAS TIN SLOPe POSitive denm NEGative TEDA O2 CD POSitive sets the Trigger In slope to positive edge triggering NEGati ve sets the Trigger In slope to negative edge triggering TBAS TIN SLOP POS sets the Trigger In slope to positive edge triggering TBAS TIN SLOP might return the string NEGATIVE showing that the Trigger In slope is set to negative edge triggering TBAS TIN TRIGger No Query Form Syntax Arguments Examples 3 114 TBAS TIN TRIGger simulates the detection of a trigger event on the TRIG GER IN signal This performs the same function as the MANUAL TRIGGER button on the front panel TBAS TIN TRIGger count CED O CHO O Cmeo ums count sets the number of times a trigger event occurs If no count value is specified a count equal to 1 is assumed TBAS TIN TRIGGER triggers the timebase one time TBAS TIN TRIGGER 100 triggers the timebase 100 times HFS 9000 User Manual Commands TBAS TOUT Related Commands Syntax Examples TBAS TOUT PERiod Syntax Arguments Examples HFS 9000 User Manual The TBAS TOUT Time Base Trigger Out command sets and queries the time base Trigger Out parameters TBAS TOUT queries all Trigger Out parameters TBAS TBAS PLIN TBAS TIN TBAS TOUT CBS O TBAS TOUT might return the string TBAS TOUT PER 1 DESK 0 000000E 00 TBA
268. rial Port DB 9 Pin Assignments Pin RS 232 C Signal Name 1 DCD Carrier Detect 2 RXD Receive Data 3 TXD Transmit Data 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 5 Signal Ground 6 DSR Data SetReady 1 RTS Request To Send 8 CTS Clear To Send 9 RNG Ring Indicator The standard accessory serial cable supplied with the HFS 9000 Tektronix part number 012 1241 00 connects the HFS 9000 to a standard RS 232 C serial port with a DB 25 female connector configured as DCE Data Communications Equipment HES 9000 User Manual Appendix C Interface Specifications Connection to IBM PC DB 25 Ports HFS 9000 User Manual In effect the standard accessory serial cable converts the HFS 9000 to a standard RS 232 C serial port with a DB 25 male connector configured as DTE Data Terminal Equipment Table C 4 shows the wiring of the standard accessory cable This table also shows the standard cable s effective pin assignments at the DB 25 connector when the DB 9 connector is attached to the HFS 9000 Table C 4 Standard Accessory Cable Connections DB 9 Female 9 Pin DB 25 Male 25 Pin RS 232 C Pin Assignments Connector Connector when Cable Connected to Pin Number Pin Number HFS 9000 1 DEN DCD Carrier Detect 2 RXD Receive Data 3 TXD Transmit Data 4 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready 5 1 Signal Ground 6 6 DSR Data SetReady 7 DEN RTS Request To Send 8 5 CTS Clear To
269. riving a 50 load to ground except as noted Name Description Maximum high level 2 6 V Minimum low level 2 00 V Maximum amplitude 3 00 V Minimum amplitude 0 50 V Level resolution 0 01 V Operation when terminated Output levels will be approximately 1 V more negative than through 50 Q to 2 V the values programmed specified and displayed Actual output levels more negative than 2 V may cause malfunction Level accuracy specifications do not apply when terminating to 2 V Both true and complement outputs must be terminated to the same voltage B 1 Appendix B Specifications Table B 1 Nominal Traits HFS 9PG1 Output Performance Cont Each channel and complement driving a 50 load to ground except as noted Name Operation when terminated to high impedance loads Description Output level range will double until certain internal limits are achieved Since the programmed specified and displayed output levels do not match the actual output levels level accuracy specifications do not apply when terminating to a high impedance load Because of the larger voltage swings associated with doubled level range output transition time specifications do not apply when driving a high impedance load Output limits One high limit and one low limit may be enabled or disabled together Table B 2 Nominal Traits HFS 9PG2 Output Performance Each channel and complement driving a 50 load to gr
270. rn as the RS 232 C end of line terminator RS232 EOL might return the string LF showing that the RS 232 C end of line character is a line feed RS232 FLAGging sets and queries the RS 232 C handshaking mode This performs the same function as the Flagging item in the front panel RS 232 menu RS232 FLAGging HARD SOFT OFF RS232 FLAGging HES 9000 User Manual Commands Arguments Examples RS232 PARity Syntax Arguments HFS 9000 User Manual FLAGgi ng HARD sets the RS 232 C handshaking to use DTR and CTS control lines SOFT sets the RS 232 C handshaking to use XOn DC1 and XOff DC3 OFF sets the RS 232 C handshaking to OFF no transmission control RS232 FLAG SOFT sets RS 232 C handshaking to XOn XOff RS232 FLAG OFF turns RS 232 C handshaking off RS232 FLAG might return the string HARD showing that the RS 232 C handshake is set to hard flagging RS232 PARity sets and queries the RS 232 C parity setting This performs the same function as the Parity item in the front panel RS 232 menu RS232 PARity ODD EVEN NONE ZERO ONE RS232 PARity space EVEN sets the RS 232 C parity to even ODD sets the RS 232 C parity to odd ZERO sets the RS 232 C parity to zero or space ONE sets the RS 232 C parity to one or mark 3 93 Commands NONE sets the RS 232 C parity to none NOTE Parities EVEN ODD ZERO and ONE add one bit of parity to seven bits o
271. rpassed accuracy and repeatability Some of the outstanding characteristics of the HFS 9000 are as follows m Multi channel stimulus The HFS 9000 can be configured with up to 36 channels of output in one mainframe and up to 640 channels across multiple phase locked systems m Independent edge placement This feature can be applied to all channels and is especially useful in characterizing synchronous components Upto l ps timing resolution The timing resolution is an order of magnitude greater than typical ECL gate delays Combined with the multi channel capability this allows for setup and hold time margin testing by providing clock data set and reset signals to the device under test Advanced trigger features The triggering is designed specifically to help in device characterization Phase lock lets you synchronize the HFS 9000 to other signal sources Trigger out deskew eliminates the timing delays introduced by cabling m Mixed logic family testing The HFS 9000 can be configured to combine different kinds of pulse output in the same mainframe for characterizing mixed logic components Exceptionally flexible formatting A high speed card can provide data at a rate of up to 630 MB sec with a transition time of less than 250 ps A variable rate card has a variable transition time between 800 ps to 6 ns m Fully programmable digital architecture The HFS 9000 is a digital instrument throughout Thi
272. rroooorooorr 00111000 E 8 Figure 3 8 Reading Binary Encoded Data into a Channel PGENA CH1 BDATA 0 12 returns the first 12 bits of data starting from address 0 from channel A1 3 62 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA FILL PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA FILL Binary Data Input Output provides a method of filling a channel with binary data Related Commands SIGNal BDATA VECTOR BIOFormat VECTOR BDATA Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt BDATA FILL lt address gt lt count gt lt binary byte gt rn Arguments address sets the start address binary byte represents the data used to fill the channel count specifies the number of number of addresses to be filled If count is less than eight the rightmost count bits are used from the binary byte count is greater than eight the binary byte is repeated the required number of time to satisfy count Note that the byte is read from right to left That is the least significant bit is read first Examples PGENB CH2 BDATA FILL 0 1024 0 fills the first 1024 addresses of channel B2 with all zeros PGENA CHA BDATA FILL 0 1024 HFF fills the first 1024 addresses of channel A4 with all ones PGENC CHI1 BDATA FILL 0 512 H55 fills the first 512 addresses of channel C1 with alternating ones and zeros that is 10101010101010
273. s are in the Time Base menu and include the Pretrigger item in the Cal Deskew menu see Figure 2 43 Time Base Menu press SELECT Auto Burstbk uto Burst Trig nuto Mode Feriod Count Qut Feriod Autoa Burst 1 rns 1 Trigger In Trig Slope Trig Level PhaseLockIn On Fositive au Run Stop Running eee Selt Test Calibrate Pretrigger Channel Chan Delay rons Al os Figure 2 43 The Time Base and Cal Deskew Menus The Time Base menu gives you control of the detection of trigger events at the TRIGGER IN connector There are four Trigger In menu items m Trigger In can be set to on or off When Trigger In is set to off no trigger events can be detected at the TRIGGER IN connector When in phase lock mode setting Trigger In to on enables the FRAME SYNC IN connector This is useful when you want to use the MANUAL TRIGGER button to trigger pulse bursts 2 67 Trigger Manual Trigger Trigger Out 2 68 m Trig Slope can be set to positive or negative When Trig Slope is set to positive a trigger event occurs on a positive going edge on the trigger in signal as it passes through the voltage level specified by Trig Level When Trig Slope is set to negative a trigger event occurs on a negative going edge m Trig Level lets you set the voltage level at which trigger events occur m PhaseLockIn lets you synchronize and lock in the HFS 9000 to an external timing source connected to the PHASE LOCK
274. s the HFS 9000 puts at the end of every query response when using the RS 232 C interface Event An occurrence that causes a GPIB instrument to send a signal to the controller An event is usually accompanied by a message Factory A form of reset that restores the HFS 9000 to a known state Factory is similar to Reset except that Factory also deletes the definition of all aliases and purges all settings Contrast with Reset Flagging When using the RS 232 C interface a method of preventing data overflow of buffers Shortly before it can handle no more data each device flags the sending device to stop sending data until the flag is removed Frame Sync When using phase lock a method of providing a trigger event that is synchronized with the phase lock external clock signal Frequency A specification of the rate of occurrence of pulse windows the inverse of period GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus A bus standard that allows instruments to be connected in a network and programmed with a controller This standard is formally defined in ANSI Standard IEEE 488 2 1987 Glossary 3 Glossary Glossary 4 Header The name portion of a command The header is composed of mnemonics separated by colon characters High Speed Pulse Generator Card A pulse generator card having high frequency capability Channels on the high speed pulse generator card cannot vary their transition time rise and fall time Contrast with Var Rat
275. s an execution error or service request When an event of a given type occurs the bit that represents that type of event is set to a value of one You can disable bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero see the Enable Registers section on page 3 131 Reading the status registers tells you what types of events have occurred The Standard Event Status Register SESR The SESR see Figure 3 11 and Table 3 11 records eight types of events that can occur within the HFS 9000 Use the ESR query to read the SESR register Reading the register clears the bits of the register so that the register can accumulate information about new events 3 129 Status and Events 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CME EXE DDE QYE OPC Figure 3 11 The Standard Event Status Register SESR Table 3 11 SESR Bit Functions Bit Function 7 MSB PON Power On Shows thatthe HFS 9000 was powered on 6 URQ User Request Shows that the SRQ button was pressed 5 CME Command Error Shows that an error occurred while the HFS 9000 was parsing a command or query Command error messages are listed in Table 3 14 on page 3 135 4 EXE Execution Error Shows that an error occurred while the HFS 9000 was executing a command or query Execution error messages are listed in Table 3 15 on page 3 137 3 DDE Device Error Shows thata device error occurred Device error messages are listed i
276. s except the first The Loop value is used only in Auto and Trig Auto modes it is ignored in Burst and Auto Burst modes Loop is useful if you need to send setup information with the first cycle of data but don t want it to be sent out on subsequent cycles Of course Loop can be set to the same vector as Start There are some constraints on Loop size defined as End Loop 1 If vector consumption defined as End Start 1 is 2 19 Data Time Generators Filling Vectors with Data 2 20 8192 there are no constraints on Loop size gt 8192 then Loop size must be divisible by 2 216384 then Loop size must be divisible by 4 232768 then Loop size must be divisible by 8 m End sets the vector of the last data bit output NOTE Start Loop End Mode and Vec Radix are global values If you change these settings for any channel the change applies to all channels m The Mode menu item determines how data is output from the data time generator It is the same as the Mode menu item in the Time Base Menu In Burst mode the HFS 9000 waits for a trigger event at the TRIGGER IN connector a remote TRG command or a press of the MANUAL TRIG GER button When a trigger event is detected the HFS 9000 waits for approximately 130 ns the startup delay before outputting data Data output begins with the Start vector and stops with the End vector The HFS 9000 then awaits the next trigger event In Auto Burst mode o
277. s means that the HFS 9000 can be fully pro grammed through either the GPIB or RS 232 C interface Programmed control is essential for automated repeatable tests In addition the program capability of the HFS 9000 means that it will fit easily into your automated test system A complete automated test facility can be configured from an Getting Started HFS 9000 a controller such as a PC and a high speed acquisition system such as the Tektronix 11801B Digital Sampling Oscilloscope m Graphic display Sample waveforms show how the controls are set and indicate visually the parameter that a particular control governs m BitWriter Software Optional This software package provides a Microsoft Windows environment in which to program the HFS 9000 using an IBM PC compatible computer The PC must include at least an 80386 processor with 640 kbytes minimum a color monitor a high density 5 25 inch or 3 5 inch disk drive a GPIB card and a mouse Brief Tour You may choose to go through this tour very carefully or you may elect to skip the tour and investigate the HFS 9000 on your own If you do not take the tour use the Operating Basics section that follows to answer any questions you encounter The Operating Basics section also describes details and features not covered in the Getting Started section Part 1 Resetthe Resetting the HFS 9000 to a known factory default state is useful when you HFS 9000 begin a new task and nee
278. s on then the range of voltage levels cannot be set outside the voltage limits Limiting is controlled with the Levels menu complete discussion of limiting appears on page 2 36 The High Level and Low Level menu items in the Levels menu are identical to their counterparts in the Pulse menu Adjusting voltage levels does not change the appearance of the Pulse menu timing diagram The Levels menu provides a graphic display of the pulse generator voltage settings and limits Period Frequency Pulse windows can be specified in terms of Frequency or in terms of Period Both frequency and period use the same menu item Choose the way you want to specify pulse windows by pressing the SELECT button to alternate between frequency and period Then use the knob or keypad to set the value This menu item is a duplicate of the Period or Frequency item in the Time Base menu NOTE Period and Frequency are time base parameters and affect all pulse generator channels simultaneously All other Pulse menu items affect only the selected channel Pulse Timing You can adjust the timing of the pulse within the pulse window specified by the time base Two Pulse menu items let you control the pulses in different ways m The Lead Delay alternately Phase menu item lets you control when the pulse begins within the window specified by the time base Choose the way you want to specify the beginning pulse edge by pressing the Select button to alterna
279. s the SELECT button repeatedly until the desired mode is set The four modes are Burst Auto Burst Auto and Trig Auto 2 61 Time Base 2 62 Burst Mode In burst mode the HFS 9000 waits for a trigger event at the TRIGGER IN connector a remote TRG command or a press of the MANUAL TRIGGER button When a trigger event is detected the HFS 9000 waits for approximately 130 ns the startup delay before generating pulses The time base then generates the number of pulse event windows specified by Count and awaits the next trigger event The beginning of the first pulse window is the time zero reference NOTE See the Deskew section on page 2 25 for information on compensating for the 130 ns startup delay Pulse windows can be specified in terms of Frequency or Period Both frequency and period use the same menu item Choose the way you want to specify pulse windows by pressing the SELECT button to alternate between frequency and period Then use the knob or keypad to set the value Displayed above the Time Base and Cal Deskew menus is a timing diagram When the Frequency Period Count or Pretrigger menu items are highlighted arrows and dotted lines annotate the timing diagram to illustrate the parameter controlled by that menu item Figure 2 42 shows this timing diagram when the Count menu item is highlighted Trigger In is i Trigger ut d 2 14 MH Outputs ILILIT T T
280. se loop or parallel configurations GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device Figure 3 3 Typical GPIB Network Configurations Appendix C Interface Specifications gives additional information on the HFS 9000 GPIB configuration Once you have connected your HFS 9000 through the GPIB interface you need to set its GPIB parameters to allow it to communicate through the interface 1 Display the GPIB Menu press the Main Menu button use the arrow buttons to highlight the GPIB Menu item and press the SELECT button Figure 3 4 shows this menu GPIB Menu Figure 3 4 The GPIB Menu 2 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the Address item and the knob or keypad to enter the desired GPIB device address You may use any number from 0 through 30 3 Ifthe On Bus item is set to off use the arrow buttons to highlight the On Bus item then press the SELECT button HES 9000 User Manual Setting Up the Instrument HFS 9000 User Manual 4 If the Debug item is not set as you wish use the arrow buttons to highlight the Debug item then press the SELECT button When debug is on a display window shows the most recent commands sent to the HFS 9000 and the status of several control settings Appendix C Interface Specifications gives complete information about using debug mode Once you have set these parameters you can control the HFS 9000 through the GPIB interf
281. se only the power cord specified for this product To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not apply a voltage to a terminal that is outside the range specified for that terminal This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not operate this product with covers or panels removed To avoid fire hazard use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product To avoid electric shock do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions To avoid injury or fire hazard do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere Product Damage Precautions Use Proper Power Source Provide Proper Ventilation HFS 9000 User Manual Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more than the voltage specified To prevent product overheating provide proper ventilation xi General Safety Summary Do Not Operate With If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified Suspected Failures service personnel Safety Terms and Symbols Terms in This Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life
282. sets the vector where the copied Block will begin m Swap Block with Dest swaps the Block defined by Block Start and Block End Size with the Block that begins at Dest Start Copy Block to Dest copies the Block defined by Block Start and Block End Size to the Block that begins at Dest Start m Radix specifies how vectors are displayed in the Vector Edit menu View sets the display mode to either Channel or Group HFS 9000 User Manual Deskew Channel Delay HFS 9000 User Manual You can adjust two parameters to deskew the HFS 9000 so that its timing matches the external circuitry you are working with Both these parameters Pretrigger and Chan Delay are in the Cal Deskew menu as shown in Fig ure 2 23 NOTE Channel delay is set for each channel individually while Pretrigger affects all channels by changing the delay relative to the HFS 9000 output trigger Cal Deskew Menu press SELECT to view the configuration eee Sele Test Calibrate Pretrigger Channel Chan Delay rons Al os Figure 2 23 The Cal Deskew Menu You can set Chan Delay channel delay independently for each channel Figure 2 24 shows the result of deskewing one channel Channel delay adjusts the time between the trigger out the detection of a trigger event at the TRIG GER IN connector and the beginning of the first pulse window of the burst There is normally a delay of approximately 130 ns between these two events Channel de
283. shown in the example in Figure 3 5 Table 3 2 Command Message Elements Symbol Meaning Header The basic command name If the header ends with a question mark the command is a query The header may begin with a Colon character if the command is concatenated with other commands the beginning colon is required The beginning Colon can never be used with command headers beginning with star Mnemoni c A header sub function Some command headers have only one mnemonic If a command header has multiple mnemonics they are always separated from each other by a colon character Argument A quantity quality restriction or limit associated with the header Not all commands have an argument while other commands have multiple arguments Arguments are separated from the header by one or more space characters Arguments are separated from each other by a lt Separator gt lt Separator gt A separator between arguments of multiple argument commands The separator can consist of a comma or a comma with blank characters before and after it Header A A N PGENA CH1 HIGH 3V Mnemonics Argument Figure 3 5 Command Message Elements HFS 9000 User Manual Command Syntax Commands Queries Headers in Query Responses Command Entry HFS 9000 User Manual Commands cause the HFS 9000 to perform a specific function or change one of its settings Commands have the structure m lt He
284. signal AddrO address 0 SIGNal DATA SWAP SIGNal DATA SWAP Signal Data Swap swaps blocks of data between signals Related Commands PGEN x CH n DATA SWAP Syntax SIGNal DATA SWAP lt pinl gt lt address1 gt lt count gt lt pin2 gt lt address2 gt 3 102 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Arguments Examples SIGNal DRADix Syntax Arguments Examples HFS 9000 User Manual Ores count pin GC adress pinl specifies the signal to which data is swapped in other words this argument identifies the destination signal address1 sets the destination address count specifies the number of data elements to be swapped lt pin2 gt specifies the signal from which data is to be swapped it identifies the source signal address identifies the beginning of the block of data to be swapped SIGNAL DATA SWAP Data3 512 10 Datal 0 swaps 10 bits of data from signal Datal address 0 with signal Data3 address 512 SIGNal DRADix Signal Data Radix controls how signal data is displayed on the front panel This command performs the same function as the Data Radix item in the front panel Data Fill menu SIGNal DRADix lt signal gt OCT DEC HEX OCT e gars 4 C Was signal identifies the signal whose data radix is to be set or queried OCT specifies an octal data radix lt DEC gt specifies a decimal data radix
285. signal For example you could run the HFS 9000 at 1 1 the phase lock frequency or at 32 times the phase lock frequency When in phase lock mode you can use an external signal connected to the FRAME SYNC IN connector to provide a phase locked trigger Establishing Phase Lock The signal connected to PHASE LOCK IN must be stable and continuous It must not change frequency once phase lock is established The frequency range of the phase lock signal must be between 6 MHz and 630 MHz The PHASE LOCK IN signal must have a voltage between 0 8 V and 1 0 V peak to peak The input circuitry removes the DC component by passing the signal through a 0 1 uF blocking capacitor The signal is then terminated by a 50 Q resistor to ground To ensure the proper operation of phase lock it is important to calibrate the HFS 9000 after the instrument has been repaired or after the instrument has been reconfigured by adding or changing cards It is also necessary to calibrate the HFS 9000 if you operate the instrument in an environment where the ambient temperature differs by more than 5 C from the temperature of the last calibra tion As a matter of routine you should calibrate the HFS 9000 every six months Refer to page 2 7 for details about calibrating the HFS 9000 Use the following procedure to establish phase lock and to put the HFS 9000 in phase lock mode 1 Connect the phase lock signal to the PHASE LOCK IN connector on the Time Base Card see
286. specified card Syntax CAL CID lt QString gt lt Separator gt lt QString gt 3 30 HFS 9000 User Manual Commands Arguments Examples CLS No Query Form Related Commands Syntax HFS 9000 User Manual Strings CENNE CAL CID lt QString gt lt QString gt The first lt QString gt specifies the card to be set or queried Valid strings are CPU TB pu These query the CPU card Time Base card and Pulse Generator cards A through I respectively The second lt QString gt sets the card ID lt 10 characters for the specified card CAL CID CPU B010100 sets the CPU card ID CAL CID TB B010125 sets the Time Base card ID CAL CID A PGEN V1 0 sets the A pulse generator card ID CAL CID CPU returns the CPU card ID The CLS Clear Status command clears the HFS 9000 status data structures and puts the HFS 9000 in the Operation Complete Command Idle State and in the Operation Complete Query Idle State While in these states the HFS 9000 has nothing in its buffers and does not execute commands or queries DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMSG SRE STB CES The CLS command clears the following W the Event Queue W he Standard Event Status Register SESR m the Status Byte Register except the MAV bit see below 3 31 Commands DESE 3 32 Related Commands Syntax Arguments Examples If the CLS command
287. standard GURU card initializations Lines 330 370 initialize the HFS 9000 Lines 380 390 enable event generation The SRE 32 command enables the ESB bit but not the MAV bit Lines 400 445 read a command or query from the PC keyboard Lines 450 480 send the command or query to the HFS 9000 Line 490 calls the event handling subroutine at line 700 Line 500 checks whether there was an event and if not goes to read the next typed input Lines 510 610 check to see if the typed command was a query the header ends with If the command was a query the query response is read Line 600 checks for EOI on each read of 64 characters if no EOI is detected an additional query response is read Lines 700 through 980 are the event handling subroutine Line 730 does a serial poll to read the SBR register Lines 740 780 check the RQS bit in the SBR register The RQS bit is set only by the ESB bit because of the SRE 32 command on line 380 Lines 800 980 read the event m Lines 800 810 display the value of the SBR register m Lines 820 860 read and display the value of the ESR register m Lines 870 940 read and display all event messages At line 910 if val 0 then the event queue is empty If the event queue is not empty the ESR must be read to get the rest of the messages m Lines 970 980 report the event to the main program 3 141 Programming Examples Example 2 Listing 10
288. stant Method and Fill Scale Constant provides the value used to fill a block or the starting value for the Count Up Count Down and Random fill methods Method specifies how a channel is filled with data the options are Constant Invert Count Up Count Down and Random Fill Scale is the number of vectors that are filled with a value before generating a new fill value HFS 9000 User Manual Getting Started 9 set the fill method use the arrow keys to highlight the Method menu item 10 Turn the knob to select each of the different fill methods Observe the descriptions that appear above the menu 11 Select the Constant method 12 Use the arrow keys to highlight the Fill Block with Method menu item Press the SELECT key 13 A menu will appear informing you that the operation cannot be undone Press the SELECT key to allow the operation to proceed To view the results of the fill operation you can view the channel data in the Data Edit menu 14 Press the MAIN MENU button Highlight the Data Edit Menu item and press SELECT When the Data Edit menu appears you will see the selected channel and the data that has filled it Press Select to view other Vectors 000001 ocoonnz 4 oooOns ooona 000010 000011 00200012 000013 Data Edit Menu Figure 1 12 Viewing Channel Data You can edit each of the bits in the channel from the front panel Select
289. ta space lt address gt count Arguments pin identifies the signal to be filled with data address sets queries the start address for the data count specifies the number of data elements that follow or that should be returned ascii data represents the ascii formatted binary data to be entered Examples SIGNAL DATA 6G1 0 16 1110001000011100 enters 16 bits of data into signal G1 starting at address 0 HFS 9000 User Manual 3 101 Commands SIGNAL DATA WE 0 12 returns the first 12 bits of data starting from address 0 from signal WE SIGNal DATA COPY SIGNal DATA COPY Signal Data Copy copies data from one signal to another The source and destination signals may be the same signals This command performs the same function as the Copy Block to Dest item in the Data Copy menu Related Commands lt gt lt gt Syntax SIGNal DATA COPY lt pinl gt lt address1 gt lt count gt lt pin2 gt lt address2 gt space gt adress Arguments pinl identifies the destination channel lt address1 gt specifies the destination address count specifies the number of data elements to be copied lt 2 gt specifies the source channel address represents the source address Examples SIGNAL DATA COPY Addr0 0 512 Addr1 1024 copies 512 data bits from signal Addr1 address 1024 to
290. te between Lead Delay and Phase Then use the knob or keypad to set the value Lead Delay specifies the time between the beginning of the pulse window and the beginning of the pulse in terms of time Lead Delay can be set from 0 seconds up HFS 9000 User Manual 2 47 Pulse Generators Blinking Menu Items Phase specifies the time between the beginning of the pulse window and the beginning of the pulse in terms of a percentage of the pulse window Phase can be set from 0 to 100 m The Width alternately Duty Cycle or Trail Delay menu item lets you control when the trailing edge of the pulse occurs Choose the way you want to specify the trailing pulse edge by pressing the SELECT button to alternate between Width Duty Cycle and Trail Delay Then use the knob or keypad to set the value Width specifies the pulse width in terms of the time duration of the pulse Width can be set from 0 seconds up Duty Cycle specifies the pulse width in terms of a percentage of the pulse window specified by the time base Duty cycle can be set from 0 to 100 Trail Delay specifies the trailing edge of the pulse in terms of time from the beginning of the pulse window specified by the time base Trail delay can be set from 0 seconds up You can set the menu items described in the Pulse Timing section to conflict For example you could set the pulse width to be twice the period of the time base The HFS 9000 lets you set up conflicts but causes the
291. the Period item to a Frequency item Pulse menu Frequency 100 kHz Pulse menu Pulse Rate Normal Pulse menu Output On Pulse menu Output Off 2 Initialize the DSO 3 Connect an SMA cable from the HFS 9000 TRIGGER OUT connector to the DIRECT connector located in the TRIGGER INPUTS section of the DSO Set the DSO to trigger on that signal Turn on averaging on the DSO CAUTION To avoid accidentally damaging the sampling head of the DSO place a 5X SMA attenuator on the sampling head input Voltages in excess of 3 volts may damage the input circuit 4 After placing a 5X SMA attenuator on the sampling head input connect an SMA cable from the 5X SMA attenuator to the HFS 9000 normal OUTPUT connector of the channel under test To save time connecting the cable to other channels use the SMA slip on connector on the end of the cable that connects to the HFS 5 Set the DSO to display the signal with 50 mV div 4 divisions vertically at zero offset Set the DSO time base to 1 us div horizontally Set the DSO MAIN POSITION to minimum HFS 9000 User Manual 23 Appendix Performance Verification F 24 Display the DSO measurement menu and turn on RISE and FALL measurements Touch the RISE selector at the bottom of the DSO screen to display the RISE measurement parameters Set these parameters according to Table F 21 Table F 21 DSO Settings for Rise Fall Time Checks DSO Control Setting Left Limit 0
292. the knob the FINE button above the knob can give you more control through finer resolution 3 Use the arrow keys to highlight the Period item Getting Started 1 8 4 Use the knob to adjust the period to 6 25 ns This will require that you use the fine control First use the knob to set the Period to 6 2 ns Then press the FINE button to make the knob increments smaller Note that the FINE light turns on Finally use the knob to set it to 6 25 ns Numeric values can also be entered through the keypad Type in the number and if needed press a key to specify the unit prefix p n m M or Indicate that you are finished by pressing the ENTER key You never need to enter the units such as seconds or Volts If you make a mistake the BACKSPACE key will back up character by character 5 Use the arrow keys to highlight the Count item 6 Enter the value 5 by pressing 5 and ENTER As mentioned above the Period item can be changed to specify Frequency instead Period and frequency are two ways of specifying the same parameter When you use the SELECT button to change modes of this item the readout shows you the setting in that mode 7 Use the arrow keys to highlight the Period item Observe that the period setting is 6 25 ns 8 Press the SELECT button Observe that the item changes to Frequency and that the frequency setting is 160 MHZ the reciprocal of 6 25 ns 9 Use the knob or the keypad to set the frequ
293. the voltage levels that can be set with the normal level controls Voltage level and level limit controls are provided for each channel individually The output voltage range varies between cards as shown in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Output Voltage Limits Pulse Data Time Generator Minimum Low Level Maximum High Level HFS 9PG1 2V 2 6 V HFS 9PG2 2 V 5 5V HFS 9DG1 2 5 V 5 0 V HFS 9DG2 2 0 V 5 5V When you turn level limit on the voltage level settings for each channel are adjusted if necessary to be within the limit boundaries set for that channel NOTE Turning limiting off does not restore the channel voltage levels to their previous unlimited values Setting Voltage Levels The controls for levels are located in the Pulse Menu see Figure 2 28 or the Levels Menu see Figure 2 29 HFS 9000 User Manual 2 35 Levels Setting Level Limits 2 36 Pulse Menu press SELECT to the next channel Channel High Low Level Polarity BS8 0 mWV 1 8M Hormal Lead Delay Duty Cycle Transition z Pulse Rate Output Hormal Copy Paste Signal Type Channel Channel Pulse Figure 2 28 The Pulse Menu The Pulse menu has these level controls m Channel lets you set the channel that the other menu items control Use the SELECT button the knob or the PREVIOUS CHANNEL and NEXT CHANNEL buttons to select channels m High Level and Low Level are the voltage levels us
294. tring gt QSTring Strings Cem De iStrin Arguments The first lt QString gt is the alias label This label cannot be a command name Reserved command names are listed in Appendix C Interface Specifications Labels must start with a letter Labels can contain only letters numbers and underscores other characters are not allowed The second lt QString gt or Block 15 a complete sequence of program messages The messages must be separated by semicolons Partial set commands or queries are not allowed and will cause an error when the alias label is received HFS 9000 User Manual 3 27 Commands NOTE Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an execution error To give a new alias the name of an existing alias you must first delete the existing alias Examples ALI DEF PULSE QRY PGENA CHIl LDELAY WIDTH creates an alias called PULSE_QRY Whenever the HFS 9000 receives PULSE QRY it will replace PULSE QRY with the string PGENA CH1 LDELAY WIDTH ALI DEF PULSE QRY returns the definition of the alias PULSE_QRY which is the string PGENA CH1 LDELAY WIDTH If the query returned the string 10 this would show that no alias named PULSE_QRY exists ALIAS DELETE ALL No Query Form The ALIas DELEte ALL command deletes all existing aliases Related Commands ALIas CATalog ALIas DEFine FACTORY Syntax ALIas DELEte ALL Callas 0 DELETE AL ALIAS DELETE
295. tton to show a terse description of the failure This additional information may assist you in isolating a failure to a module or to determine if users can continue to operate the HFS 9000 The next diagnostic test will not begin until you press the SELECT button m Press the SELECT button to continue with the next diagnostic test A self test failure does not necessarily indicate that the HFS 9000 is inoperable However it does indicate that the instrument is out of specification and that it might not be fully operational F t1 Appendix Performance Verification F 12 Calibration The calibration procedure adjusts the instrument to its internal voltage and timing references and saves the settings in non volatile memory Calibrate the HFS 9000 at least every six months The instrument does not need more frequent calibration unless it is reconfigured or used in an ambient temperature that differs by more than 5 C from the temperature it was last calibrated in NOTE Run the calibration procedure only when the HFS 9000 has been powered on for 20 minutes in the temperature environment you expect it to be used in To calibrate the HFS 9000 select the Calibrate item in the Cal Deskew menu After you select the Calibrate item verify this choice in the subsequent dialog box After verification the HFS 9000 starts the Timebase calibration and prompts you to attach an SMA cable from the front panel SKEW CAL IN connector to
296. uct the termination assembly by connecting the following items in the order listed a b c d e one BNC female to dual banana connector item 2 one precision coaxial cable item 3 one feedthrough termination item 4 one BNC female to SMA male adapter item 10 one threaded SMA female to SMA male slip on connector item 11 4 Connect the banana plug end of the termination assembly to the input of the DVM and connect the other end to the channel normal OUTPUT connector 5 Set the HFS 9000 according to Table F 11 F 16 HES 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification HFS 9000 User Manual Table F 11 HFS 9DG2 and HFS 9PG2 Output Level Checks First Settings Control Pulse menu Channel Pulse menu Output Setting The channel under test On Pulse menu Output Pulse menu Pulse Rate Pulse menu Polarity Pulse menu High Level Off Off Complement 5 5 V Pulse menu Low Level 0v The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 5 340 V and 5 660 V 6 Change Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Normal The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 0 270 V and 30 270 V 7 Set the HFS 9000 according to Table F 12 Table F 12 HFS 9DG2 and HFS 9PG2 Output Level Checks Second Settings Control Pulse menu High Level Pulse menu Low Level Setting 10V 2 0 V The output voltage reading on the DVM should be between 2 090 V
297. ude lt 0 5 V accuracy typically meets the specification but is not guaranteed 10 of setting 300 ps Table 20 Warranted Characteristics Time Base Name Description Frequency accuracy 1 Table 21 Warranted Characteristic Performance to External Frequency Reference Name PHASE LOCK IN frequency range Description 6 MHz to 630 MHz Table 22 Warranted Characteristics Output Edge Placement Performance Name Description HFS 9P G1 HFS 9PG2 1 of Lead Delay Chan Delay 300 ps HFS 9061 HFS 9DG2 1 of Lead Delay Chan Delay 50 ps Delay of pulses relative to time zero reference Lead Delay accuracy Pulse width accuracy HFS 9PG1 1 of width 300 ps HFS 9P G2 1 of width 300 ps for widths 20 ns 1 of width 300 ps 500 ps for widths lt 20 ns HFS 9061 1 of width 50 75 ps HFS 9DG2 1 of width 50 ps 250 ps for widths gt 20 ns 1 of width 50 ps 450 ps for widths lt 20 ns Measured at 50 levels each channel independent Appendix B Specifications B 10 Table B 23 Warranted Characteristics Trigger Out Performance Name TRIGGER OUT signal levels Description Amplitude gt 300 mV 0 5 V gt offset gt 1 5 V driving 50 to ground Table 24 Warranted Characteristics Power Requirements Name Primary circuit dielectric break down voltage Primary Grounding Description 1500 VACn us 60
298. uem 164 6 200 MHz 1980 lxi 202 0 216 5 MHz 2143 Wee 5 218 7 233 MHz 2300 7 J 235 3 250 MHz 215 J 252 5 266 5 MHz 2638 fo ____ 269 2 283 MHz 2802 285 8 300 MHz 2910 fen 303 0 F 6 HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Verification Table 5 Test Record for HFS 9PG1 Card Channel Page of Instrument Serial Number Certificate Number Temperature RH Date of Calibration Technician Performance Test Nominal Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum Output High Level 2 of level 50 mV Level 2 of High Level 2 of amplitude 50 mV Output Complement J 26V 42498 2 702 Channel Normal 4040 J 1 05602 ______ 0 238 Normal 2V 1 200 _________ 1 910 Complement IV 1070 fo 0 930 Not Output Normal ON 9B 32 102 Channel Complement DAV 1 056025 __________ __________ 0 238 Complement f 2V 2090 1 910 Normal 1lV 1000 ______ 0 930 Rise Time Fall Time x 200 ps for Amplitude lt 1 V Output Normal TV Tr 200ps NA o ______ 200 ps Channel Complement 1V TT 20005 fo 200 ps Not Output Normal 1V Tf 200 Joo Jo 200 ps Channel Complement 1V Tr 200ps N A Jo _________ 200 ps Edge Placement Pulse Delay Time 1 of Lead Delay Chan Delay 300 ps Output Normal
299. us and Events Table 3 14 Command Error Messages CME Bit 5 Cont Code Message 111 Header separator error 112 Program mnemonic too long 113 Undefined header 118 Query not allowed 120 Numeric data error 121 Invalid character in number 123 Numeric overflow 124 Too many digits 128 Numeric data not allowed 130 Suffix error 131 Invalid suffix 134 Suffix too long 138 Suffix not allowed 140 Character data error 141 Invalid character data 144 Character data too long 148 Character data not allowed 150 String data error 151 Invalid string data 158 String data not allowed 160 Block data error 161 Invalid block data 168 Block data not allowed 170 Expression error 171 Invalid expression data 178 Expression data not allowed 180 Macro error 181 Invalid outside macro definition 183 Invalid inside macro definition 184 Command in macro requires more fewer parameters 3 136 HFS 9000 User Manual Status and Events HFS 9000 User Manual Table 3 15 lists the execution errors that are detected during execution of a command In these error messages you should read macro as alias Table 3 15 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 Code Message 200 Execution error 212 Trigger not enabled 220 Parameter error 221 Settings in conflict 222 Data out of range 223 Too much data 260 Expression error 261 Math error in expression 262
300. usa a se Reg RE RR REDE Rise Time and Fall Time Checks HFS 9PG1 and HFS 9DG1 Cards Only Rise Time and Fall Time Checks HFS 9PG2 and HFS 9DG2 Cards Only Edge Placement Checks iunn Frequency Accuracy Check cece eee Phase Lock Check F 13 F 13 F 16 F 19 21 F 22 F 25 F 27 F 31 F 34 Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1 1 MAIN MENU Button Location 1 2 Figure 1 2 Main Menu Display 1 3 Figure 1 3 The SELECT and Arrow Buttons 1 3 Figure 1 4 The Save Recall Menu 1 5 Figure 1 5 The Reset Verification Dialog 1 5 Figure 1 6 The Time Base Menu 1 6 Figure 1 7 Time Base Relationships 1 6 Figure 1 8 Mode Set to Auto Burst 1 7 Figure 1 9 The Time Base Menu After Adjustment 1 8 Figure 1 10 Pulse Generator Data Time Generator and Time Base Controls and Connectors 1 10 Figure 1 11 Setting the Signal Type 1 12 Figure 1 12 Viewing Channel Data 1 13 Figure 2 1 The Cal Deskew Menu 2 7 Figure 2 2 Channel Locations 2 9 Figure 2 3 Channel Controls on an HFS 9PG2 Card 2 10 Figure 2 4 Channel Controls o
301. utput is similar to Burst except that the HFS 9000 creates it own trigger events There is a delay of approximately 15 us between bursts In Auto mode data is output continuously without waiting for trigger events and without any startup events Data output begins with the Start vector Once End is reached the output begins again at Start or Loop if it is different from Start and continues until stopped by a knob turn or ASCII interface command RS 232 C or GPIB In Trig Auto the output is the same as with Auto mode but output does not begin until a trigger event is received The HFS 9000 waits for a trigger event at the TRIGGER IN connector a remote TRG command or a press of the MANUAL TRIGGER button If data output is stopped when Mode is set to Auto or Trig Auto note that all channels may not stop on the same vector Additionally if a signal is set to NRZ and filled with 1 s as data the channel may stop in a 0 state Vec Radix specifies how vectors are displayed Data Radix specifies how data is displayed in the Vector Edit menu Data Radix applies only to the selected channel To quickly fill vectors with data use the Data Fill menu see Figure 2 19 The underlying concept used in the Data Fill menu is the idea of a Block A Block is HFS 9000 User Manual Data Time Generators HFS 9000 User Manual a group of vectors You specify a Block using a starting vector and either an ending vector or a block size
302. v 4 divisions vertically at zero offset Set the DSO time base to 1 us div horizontally Set the DSO MAIN POSITION to minimum Display the DSO measurement menu and turn on RISE and FALL measurements Touch the RISE selector at the bottom of the DSO screen to display the RISE measurement parameters Set these parameters according to Table F 23 Table F 23 DSO Settings for Rise Fall Time Checks DSO Control Setting Left Limit 0 Right Limit 100 Proximal 20 Distal 80 Tracking On Level Mode Relative 6 Once the DSO captures high and low levels turn off tracking 7 Set the DSO sweep speed to 500 ps div and position the first rising edge at center screen The measured rise time should be between 420 ps and 1 18 ns HFS 9PG2 amp HFS 9DG2 cards Use waveform averaging to stabilize the measurement 8 Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Complement The measured fall time should be between 420 ps and 1 18 ns HFS 9PG2 amp HFS 9DG2 cards 9 Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Normal Set the Pulse menu Transition item to 5 ns 10 Set the DSO time base to 5 ns div Use the RISE measurement to verify that the rise time is between 4 2 ns and 5 8 ns HFS 9PG2 amp HFS 9DG2 cards 11 Change the Pulse menu Polarity item setting to Complement The measured fall time on the DSO should be between 4 2 ns and 5 8 ns HFS 9PG2 amp HFS 9DG2 cards HFS 9000 User Manual Appendix Performance Ver
303. y you can also connect a cable from the Time Base card TRIGGER OUT connector to the external trigger connector of your oscilloscope You may also observe the normal Burst mode operation of the HFS 9000 4 Use the arrow keys on the HFS 9000 to highlight the Mode item of the Time Base menu Use the SELECT button to select Burst mode 5 Observe that the oscilloscope is no longer triggered and displaying a signal 6 Press the MANUAL TRIGGER button to the right of the display panel Observe that each time you press this button the oscilloscope shows one and only one burst of output from the HFS 9000 Part 4 Setting Up a Data If a Data Time generator is installed in your HFS 9000 it can produce data Time Generator streams for device testing in addition to generating pulses You can perform the following steps only if your HFS 9000 has an HFS 9DG1 or HFS 9DG2 card installed 1 Perform all steps in Reset the HFS 9000 of Getting Started to reset all HFS 9000 parameters to the factory defaults 2 Use the arrow keys to highlight the Pulse menu then press the SELECT button to display the Pulse menu 3 Using the Channel menu item select a channel located on a data time generator card For a channel to generate a data stream the signal type of the channel must be set appropriately The available signal types are NRZ Non Return to Zero RZ Return to Zero and R1 Return to One A data time generator channel can also be set to DC
304. yntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DATA lt address1 gt lt count gt lt channel gt lt address2 gt od OC lt address1 gt lt count gt channel Ce aires Arguments x and n specify the card and channel to which data is swapped in other words these arguments identify the destination channel address sets the destination address count specifies the number of data elements to be swapped lt channel gt specifies the channel from which data is to be swapped it identifies the source channel address identifies the beginning of the block of data to be swapped Examples PGENB CH2 DATA SWAP 512 10 B3 0 swaps 10 bits of data from channel B3 address 0 with channel B2 address 512 PGEN x CH n DCYCle PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DCYCle Duty Cycle sets and queries the duty cycle of a selected channel This performs the same function as the Duty Cycle item in the front panel Pulse menu HFS 9000 User Manual 3 67 Commands Related Commands PGEN x CH n LDELay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt TDELay PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt THOLd PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt WIDTh TBAS PERiod Syntax PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DCYCle MIN MAX lt NRf gt PGEN lt x gt CH lt n gt DCYC1e MIN atr at space Arguments MIN sets the duty cycle to minimum WIDTh 100 TBAS PERiod MAX sets the duty cycle to channel period minimum recovery
305. you change the pulse parameters you will see their effect on the timing diagram B Pulse Menu press SELECT to the next channel Channel High Lewel Low Level Polarity 1 8M Hormal Period Lead Delay Duty Cycle Transition ans os Pulse Rate Output Hormal ort Copy Paste Signal Type View Channel Channel Pulse Channel Figure 2 35 The Pulse Menu The HFS 9000 time base defines windows in time during which each pulse generator can generate a single pulse The timing diagram above the Pulse menu shows two full pulse cycles as specified by the time base The pulse generators can be individually set to generate a pulse with varying leading and trailing edge delays and varying levels 2 45 Pulse Generators The Channel menu item lets you set which channel the other menu items control Use the SELECT button or the knob to select the channel Once you have set the desired channel you can use the other menu items to control parameters for that channel An alternate method of channel selection is to use the NEXT CHANNEL and PREVIOUS CHANNEL buttons next to the display The selected channel is highlighted in the timing diagram above the Pulse menu The selected channel has the channel name highlighted and the timing lines are drawn as solid lines on the display All non selected channels are drawn in the timing diagram with dotted lines Turning Channels On and Off Signal Type Voltage Lev
306. z Tektronix part number 161 0210 00 HFS 9009 Option A3 Australian 240 V 10 A 50 Hz Tektronix part number 161 0211 00 HFS 9009 Option A4 North American 250 V 10 A 60 Hz Tektronix part number 161 0208 00 HFS 9009 Option A5 Switzerland 240 V 10 A 50 Hz Tektronix part number 161 0212 00 HFS 9000 User Manual er Appendix B Specifications Nominal Traits HFS 9000 User Manual The HFS 9000 family of high speed logic signal source instruments have a modular architecture with factory configurable cards The channels are digitally synthesized from a common clock resulting in highly accurate independent placement of rising and falling edges The instruments are optimized for digital device characterization with unique triggering capabilities and a variety of pulse outputs The product family also features low RMS jitter the ability to compen sate for external cable skews and an easy to use graphical human interface This section contains the complete specifications for the HFS 9000 Stimulus System and Modules These specifications are classified as either nominal traits warranted characteristics or typical characteristics Nominal traits are described using simple statements of fact such as 2 6 V for the trait Maximum high level rather than in terms of limits that are perfor mance requirements Table B 1 Nominal Traits HFS 9PG1 Output Performance Each channel and complement d

PGEN:CH - Artisan Technology Group

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents